寄托天下
查看: 188|回复: 30
打印 上一主题 下一主题

希望在国外上大学的朋友帮个忙 找点资料 谢谢--- [复制链接]

Rank: 11Rank: 11Rank: 11Rank: 11

声望
172
寄托币
110070
注册时间
2002-4-30
精华
35
帖子
393

Taurus金牛座 荣誉版主 QQ联合登录

跳转到指定楼层
楼主
发表于 2004-4-1 16:09:50 |只看该作者 |倒序浏览
一般大学都会有一堆E-Journal 的 不过我们学校的系统这几天整修 没法用
所以希望大家能否帮我找点关于 “The influence of Economic Globalization”的文章?
大恩不言谢了!
找到能否发到我的信箱中dalianmiaopei@msn.com
谢谢谢谢谢!!!!
@慕容雪村:在文明世界,不轻易评判别人是一种操守。事之对错可以谈论,道德与人格要谨慎评判。但中国有一种“道德审判机”,任何事都能引起他的满腔怒火,张口便骂,动辄要杀要打要操人妈,说人道德败坏、人格下贱、猪狗不如。其中也许有高尚人士,另外一些,也许只是因为不顺心,样样都比不过,只好跟人比道德。
0 0

使用道具 举报

Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16

声望
37
寄托币
29887
注册时间
2001-4-15
精华
22
帖子
153

Sagittarius射手座 荣誉版主

沙发
发表于 2004-4-1 23:27:43 |只看该作者
didnot find it
any more information ?
常函数和指数函数e的x次方走在街上,远远看到微分算子,
常函数吓得慌忙躲藏,说:“被它微分一下,我就什么都没有啦!”
指数函数不慌不忙道:“它可不能把我怎么样,我是e的x次方!”
指数函数与微分算子相遇。
指数函数自我介绍道:“你好,我是e的x次方。”
微分算子道:“你好,我是‘d/dy!’

使用道具 举报

Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16

声望
53
寄托币
31146
注册时间
2001-10-7
精华
284
帖子
171

Sagittarius射手座 荣誉版主

板凳
发表于 2004-4-1 23:35:24 |只看该作者

TITLE: Geographical dossier: the rise and rise of globalisation

TITLE:  Geographical dossier: the rise and rise of globalisation
SOURCE:  Geographical (London, England: 1997) 75 no10 42-9 O 2003

The magazine publisher is the copyright holder of this article and it is reproduced with permission. Further reproduction of this article in violation of the copyright is prohibited.

    A taxi driver once looked in his rear-view mirror to find Bertrand Russell -- "one of the greatest minds ever, right?" -- sitting in the back of his cab. So he thought he'd take the opportunity to learn something. "I asked him, 'What's it all about, then?' But, you know, he couldn't tell me."
    Globalisation is one of those subjects -- even to the experts who live and breathe it. It means something different to everyone, but it always means something. We all know that it's important, but what exactly is it?
    We know that it raises a range of issues -- from the future of language to the future of the planet -- that includes economics, politics, sociology, geography, history, psychology and ecology. And we know that there is plenty of opposition from an equally diverse demographic -- anti-capitalism protestors, Islamic fundamentalists and peasant farmers. But other than that, most of us know very little.


Dickon Ross
    spoke to three leading academics about what globalisation means to them and how they see it affecting the world in the immediate future.


Main players 1 Dr Ian Linden
    professorial research associate at the School of Oriental and African Studies, London University. His new book, A New Map of the World, will be published later this year; 2 Professor Jan Aart Scholte acting director of the Centre for the Study of Globalisation and Regionalisation at Warwick University and author of Globalisation: a Critical introduction and international Relations and Social Change; 3 Dr Andy Pratt senior lecturer in human geography at the London School of Economics, where he founded and directs a Master's programme entitled 'City, Space and Society'
    PHOTOS (BLACK & WHITE)
    One of the main obstacles preventing many of us understanding globalisation is the fact that the term is so vaguely defined. We invited three leading academics to offer their opinions
    "Every generation, at least in the 20th century, has some kind of symbolic ideology that gives them a 'map' of the world," says Dr Ian Linden of the School of Oriental and African Studies and author of a new book on globalisation, A New Map of the World. "For 50-odd years up to 1990, the Cold War gave you the map of the world and impacted upon virtually everything. The word that gives us the map of the world after 1990 is this concept of globalisation, by which many people mean different things."
    So what are these meanings? According to Dr Linden, the term refers to the integration of the economy at a global level and involves two main features. "Most trade takes place among multinational corporations [that] are an enormous part of the economic activity of the world." Indeed, about 70 per cent of cross-border world trade is now conducted by multinationals.
    The second feature, says Linden, is that where the world economy used to be dominated by physical commodities and goods, now the major activity taking place in the global economy is the flow of money in the form of derivatives, foreign investments and the like. Daily financial flows grew from around US$200million per day in the mid-1980s to US$1.5trillion per day in the late 1990s. "That change in activity is different from the internationalisation of the economy that you saw during the period of the British Empire and before the First World War," says Linden.
    But globalisation has an impact that reaches beyond simply economics. "Contemporary globalisation is marked by changes in ecology, human-induced developments -- be they climate change, ozone depletion, tropical-forest clearing, acid rain -- that have a transworld dimension," says Professor Jan Aart Scholte of the University of Warwick. "There are also movements of people -- the tourist flows, migration flows and businesspeople who use the world as their office. It's also a global health issue."
    He points out that the term also refers to the way we perceive ourselves today. "People actually see the world as their home -- the planet as the place where they live -- rather than just their village, country or region. That's more subtle." Scholte believes that we now think about the world as a single place in a way that previous generations didn't, a reorientation of social awareness and social imagination that has implications for the way we view areas such as citizenship, identity, community and democracy.
    But the need for a definition isn't just academic. "People let globalisation mean just about anything they want," says Scholte. "When intellectuals do that, they end up with sloppy thinking, while politicians end up using globalisation as a scapegoat."
    In recent years, the term has entered common parlance and misconceptions abound. "Many people make the mistake of thinking that globalisation is like smearing US culture everywhere," says Linden. "I don't think the global economy is particularly interested in creating an economy other than one of consumerism, an economy that accepts other cultures' consumerism and accepts US values."
    Neither is it about product uniformity, says Dr Andy Pratt of the London School of Economics and Political Science. "Global processes will work and manifest themselves differently in different places," he says. "If you've got local cultures, institutions and actors interacting with an international process or organisation you get something new." Local influences are actually becoming more significant, he says. "They are what mark things out as different and give them extra value." MTV is an international brand, for example, but the content is different everywhere.
    "Ford once tried to market a 'world car' and it was a drastic failure because Americans like bigger cars, Europeans like smaller cars, there were left- or right-hand drive issues, and so on," says Pratt. "In the future, people might merge towards similar things, but they're certainly not there yet -- even in cars, a fairly ubiquitous product."
    In fact, according to Pratt, churning out products that are exactly the same is quite the exception. "It's even arguable that Coca-Cola does it. Its goods are produced in a whole range of local factories and the packaging is different. If it was globalisation as we often imagine it, it would be exactly the same in every place, probably produced in one place and shipped everywhere."
    The growth of English as the international business language is often put forward as one of the effects of globalisation, but it might also be a driver. "It's the direction of causality that's the issue there," says Pratt. "I'd argue that one of the most important things that enabled globalisation is the creation of international time, because unless you have the possibility of coordinating time zones, you can't make a deal." Pratt describes these issues of standardisation as being part of an infrastructure upon which globalisation is built. "It's like trains and railway tracks," he says. "They both need one another but unless you put the tracks down, the trains don't run."


A tiny revolution
    Like so many world-changing processes, globalisation began with a technological breakthrough. In 1971, an engineer at Intel in California's Silicon Valley, as it became known, produced the world's first microprocessor. These modern marvels are now so commonplace that we have dozens in our homes and don't even think about it. The microprocessor enabled the computer, faster communication networks and, eventually, the Internet. These in turn made possible the instantaneous transfer of money and information, which became the driver for the process we now know as globalisation.


Images of globalisation
    _GLO:gem/01oct03:45n1.jpg_PHOTOS (COLOR): Clockwise from top: as ubiquitous as everyone believes? The red and white of Coca-Cola; many farmers and small businesses are losing out as multinational corporations come to dominate markets; globalisation has increased communication across the world and democratised the spread of information; the structure of international finance markets has paved the way for an incredible flow of money around the world every day_gl_
    Globalisation is a complex phenomenon with a variety of different effects. While one village, city or country may gain, its neighbour will lose. In environmental terms, we may all suffer. So what are the effects of globalisation and what do they mean for people around the world?
    British imperialism and 'internationalisation' introduced India to everything from cricket to parliamentary democracy, but globalisation has changed things further. India liberalised its economy in 1991, and within a few years, US firms were producing chapatis in Mexican factories and selling them in India, undercutting the local manufacturers. So the 'local' food was being produced 'globally'. But recently, India has begun to take call-centre contracts from the UK: if you ring a help desk or direct-banking service in the UK, you may well end up talking to someone in India without knowing it.
    These examples underline the fickle nature of globalisation -- it giveth and it taketh away. Many factors interact to determine the winners and losers. One of these is migration, as it leads to exchanges of cultural values and wealth. "When people move away from cities they get poorer," says Pratt. "When they move to them they get richer." Only three per cent of the world's population is migrant -- typically the economically well off or highly skilled. "That affects the donor regions because it's usually the young, healthy males who clear off, which generally doesn't do the economy much good," he says. However, many of them send back remittances that can be extremely important. "In some countries, 50 per cent of the GNP is from remittances," says Pratt.
    Migration often looks more widespread to us because of the destinations migrants are choosing. "There has emerged a hierarchy of important cities around the world that are networked together, the so-called world or global cities," says Pratt. "These play an important role as command-and-control cities in the global economy." At the very least, the list includes the global financial centres: London, New York and Tokyo. They aren't always the largest cities, which are rarely the most powerful. The global cities are networked together, he says, so resources flow between them and don't necessarily flow to their hinterland. "In fact, the nation-states behind them don't always benefit," he says.
    These migration patterns will create hotspots of economic and cultural activity, says Pratt. "Those hotspots are going to get hotter but you're also going to have a lot of cold spots -- the places from which people are migrating. They're net-loss areas, and they're becoming more conservative, unstable and out of the loop," he says.
    "The major losers are people on the African continent, who have been virtually excluded from the global economy," says Linden. "They don't get any financial flows and nobody wants to invest in Africa, except in the mineral- and oil-rich areas and that just creates local enclaves."
    What about on a smaller scale? "You'll find that in any given situation in the developing world, when the economy is liberalised, on average 60 per cent of the population win and 40 per cent lose," says Linden. "It's quite complicated because if you liberalise agriculture, for example, a lot of the smaller farmers lose. But some people in urban areas win because they get cheaper food." On the whole, small farmers without a lot of land are the losers because they can't compete with globalised agriculture. "That represents a huge part of the developing world." The winners, on the other hand, can range from big farmers through urban traders to government officials.
    Children may also be losers. "The process of the woman going out to salaried employment has greatly accelerated around the world," says Linden. In the past, these women would have been involved in local agriculture, while the men went out to work. "A slow process of change that took perhaps more than 50 years in the West -- women going out to work, family life changing and so on -- is happening very rapidly in some countries as a result of globalisation and changes in the labour pool." He attributes the rise in child labour, child soldiers and child prostitution to this change in traditional family structures.
    According to Dr Nick Brooks of the School of Environmental Science at the University of East Anglia, the environment is also suffering from the effects of globalisation. "There's evidence that a lot of the processes of globalisation end up putting more strain on environmental resources. People need to use more and more of their resources and end up over-using them."
    There is a view that globalisation leads to more-intensive agriculture, but this isn't always the case. The removal of subsidies on fertilisers in the Sahara region caused a lot of farmers to turn to animal fertiliser and integrated cropping systems to increase the scale of their agriculture and improve soil fertility. "In this case globalisation pressures have encouraged people to develop more sustainable agriculture," says Brooks.
    However, more trade means more transportation of goods and hence the release of more greenhouse gases. "There's a fundamental incompatibility between the notion of increasing globalisation and reducing greenhouse gas emissions and global warming," he says.
    Through increased industrialisation, more-intensive agriculture and changes in the types of crops grown, globalisation has put more strain on water resources. "In West Africa, the population has apparently moved over to a preference for rice, the sort of water-intensive rice grown in Southeast Asia," Brooks says. Whether the crops needed to supply this increase in demand are grown locally or overseas, the end result is an increase in the demand for water.
    Changes in agricultural practices can lead to increased land clearing, he says. "If you are looking at a process of globalisation where people are clearing forests in order to convert them to prairie so they can produce beef for export, then that is quite a dramatic change in the environment and that can have knock-on effects to do with localised rainfall."


Do the anti-globalisation protestors have anything useful to say?
    "The terms of trade mean there's not a level playing field so it's inevitable that people feel wronged. I guess because there's no final court of appeal -- like a world parliament where people can raise their opinions -- people in every nation state have taken it to the streets. So, yeah, it will happen."
    Dr Andy Pratt, London School of Economics
    "It's an umbrella for all kinds of people who in many cases have contradictory visions. But because they've got such a loosely defined notion of what is globalisation, they think they can cohabit."
    Professor Jan Aart Scholte, University of Warwick
    "I think they're very unrealistic if they think they can stop globalisation. But I wouldn't want to stop it altogether. Let's change it, channel it and turn it into 'globalisation from below' in the interests of the poor."
    Dr Ian Linden, School of Oriental and African Studies
    _GLO:gem/01oct03:47n1.jpg_PHOTOS (COLOR): Images of globalisation Clockwise from above: there is a view that a rapid increase in the number of women in developing countries going out to work has led to a change in family structures and a rise in the number of child soldiers, child prostitutes and child labour; US companies have been able to undercut Indian chapati manufacturers since Indian trade regulations were relaxed in 1991, experts predict a rise in 'global cities' that attract resources and money from around the world_gl_
    The rise of the anti-capitalist protestor and the recent spate of terror attacks in the USA, Indonesia and the Middle East has shown that globalisation has provoked strong reactions across the world. While some object to its economic impact, many are concerned about its cultural influence
    "No country can be allowed to resist American cultural imperialism," wrote the US Chamber of Commerce to the US Trade Representative in 1996. Globalisation is a policy as well as a process and it's no wonder that it has met with resistance around the world.
    The most obvious negative reaction to globalisation are the demonstrations that began in Seattle and spread around the world. However, according to a paper written by the think-tank Demos, the movement has failed to inform mainstream political thinking because it failed to unite behind a coherent set of policies or values. This has led to more of a stand-off than a public debate or discussion.
    Even so, the protestors aren't the only resistance. "Globalisation is one of the key factors in creating identity politics, religious revival, ethnic consciousness and a new type of exclusive particularism," says Linden. "You could say that al Qaeda is a classic type of reaction to globalisation. It's a global movement basically rejecting the global culture of the USA. There's an awful lot more to why you get religious fundamentalism, but I think globalisation is one important factor."
    He points out that the protestors and al Qaeda share some common ground in their opposition to globalisation. "Both are reactions primarily to the cultural effects of globalisation, rather than the economic," he says. "Islamic fundamentalism tends to be led by people who have a certain amount of money and a certain amount of education. They're university teachers, civil servants, engineers and so on. The leaders of al Qaeda are people who have travelled, who know Western culture, who understand the USA."
    While these people stand to benefit from globalisation in economic terms, they are objecting to the cultural effects. "They see Western life as corrupt and perverse and believe that America is the bearer of all this," says Linden.
    It's clear that globalisation brings many problems. After the 2001 May Day protest, billionaire financier George Soros expressed sympathy with the protestors. "There's considerable justification for being critical of the present arrangement," he said. "[The anti-globalisation movement] has put Third World debt on the agenda."
    David Mepham, head of the Institute of Public Policy Research's international programme, says economic development needs to become more environmentally sustainable. In the past, there has been a distinction between the environmental movement and development agencies. "We can't say the answer is to keep people poor because if they become richer they damage the environment," says Mepham.
    The West also needs to make globalised trade fairer, he says. "There's an underlying hypocrisy in this debate around trade and globalisation. The rich countries preach liberalisation, openness and reduction of trade barriers but they don't practice what they preach. They maintain protectionist systems, particularly in agriculture. When countries try and process their own produce and get more value by exporting it they face penalties for doing so."
    Mepham also points out that multilateral rules, though essential for globalisation, can be too tough on developing countries. "There needs to be more flexibility so developing countries are given more time to meet criteria." One example is a recent agreement on trade-related aspects of intellectual property, which pushes up the cost of drugs for developing countries that are no longer able to make their own generic versions. "There is an expectation that a poor country such as Mozambique can have a complex intellectual property regime that is difficult enough for us to properly manage and police," says Mepham.
    The advocates of 'global governance' go the farthest to call for supra-states arrangements with ecological, competition, taxation or migration policies. "We're talking about governance rather than government," says a spokesman for Demos. "It doesn't imply some kind of Dr Evil taking over the world, but it could mean nation states waiving some of their statehood rights, pulling some of their powers in return for a much higher degree of cooperation and security."
    It might look similar to the European Union. The world's regional trade bodies might one day merge into one 'global governance' body. A common market turning into a World Union.


What can be done?


1) Tobin tax
    Originally the idea of Nobel-prize-winning economist James Tobin, these are simple taxes on currency trades across borders, which currently amount to about US$1.8trillion per day. They would be enacted by national governments but need multilateral cooperation to work. They could help to prevent financial crises while raising money to mitigate the negative effects of globalisation.


2) Special drawing rights
    Proposed by billionaire financier George Soros. Countries that can't repay their debts could restructure their loans with easier terms on the condition they pursued policies approved by the IMF. The idea is to allow countries to confront their problems. "If there is no reward for good behaviour, meltdowns will multiply," said Soros.


3) International finance facility
    Proposed by UK Chancellor of the Exchequer Gordon Brown and former International Development Secretary Claire Short in January. It would provide long-term (more than 30 years), but conditional, funding from the world's richest to the world's poorest countries in order to allow them to plan investment over longer timespans. The aim is to double the total amount of development aid available.


Images of globalisation
    _GLO:gem/01oct03:49n1.jpg_PHOTOS (COLOR): Far left: those who've joined the exodus from rural areas to towns and cities in search of a better life often live in worse conditions than before; Above left: many fear that globalisation is leading to increasing homogeneity at the expense of minority religious and cultural interests, but India's film industry has managed to withstand the spread of US cultural imperialism; Above: corporate USA has reached China_gl_

使用道具 举报

Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16

声望
53
寄托币
31146
注册时间
2001-10-7
精华
284
帖子
171

Sagittarius射手座 荣誉版主

地板
发表于 2004-4-1 23:35:51 |只看该作者

TITLE: THE NEW AMERICAN CENTURY

TITLE:  THE NEW AMERICAN CENTURY
SOURCE:  The Nation 278 no5 11-14 F 9 2004

(C) Reprinted with permission from The Nation magazine. For subscription information please contact 1-800-333-8536. Web site: www.TheNation.com

ARUNDHATI BOY
    In January 2003 thousands of us from across the world gathered in Porto Alegre in Brazil and declared--reiterated--that "Another World Is Possible." A few thousand miles north, in Washington, George W. Bush and his aides were thinking the same thing.
    Our project was the World Social Forum. Theirs--to further what many call the Project for the New American Century.
    In the great cities of Europe and America, where a few years ago these things would only have been whispered, now people are openly talking about the good side of imperialism and the need for a strong empire to police an unruly world. The new missionaries want order at the cost of justice. Discipline at the cost of dignity. And ascendancy at any price. Occasionally some of us are invited to "debate" the issue on "neutral" platforms provided by the corporate media. Debating imperiablism is a bit like debating the pros and cons of rape. What can we say? That we really miss it?
    In any case, New Imperialism is already upon us. It's a remodeled, streamlined version of what we once knew. For the first time in history, a single empire with an arsenal of weapons that could obliterate the world in an afternoon has complete, unipolar, economic and military hegemony. It uses different weapons to break open different markets. There isn't a country on God's earth that is not caught in the cross-hairs of the American cruise missile and the IMF checkbook. Argentina's the model if you want to be the poster boy of neoliberal capitalism, Iraq if you're the black sheep. Poor countries that are geopolitically of strategic value to Empire, or have a "market" of any size, or infrastructure that can be privatized, or, God forbid, natural resources of value--oil, gold, diamonds, cobalt, coal--must do as they're told or become military targets. Those with the greatest reserves of natural wealth are most at risk. Unless they surrender their resources willingly to the corporate machine, civil unrest will be fomented or war will be waged.
    In this new age of empire, when nothing is as it appears to be, executives of concerned companies are allowed to influence foreign policy decisions. The Center for Public Integrity in Washington found that at least nine out of the thirty members of the Bush Administration's Defense Policy Board were connected to companies that were awarded military contracts for $76 billion between 2001 and 2002. George Shultz, former Secretary of State, was chairman of the Committee for the Liberation of Iraq. He is also on the board of directors of the Bechtel Group. When asked about a conflict of interest in the case of war in Iraq he said, "I don't know that Bechtel would particularly benefit from it. But if there's work to be done, Bechtel is the type of company that could do it. But nobody looks at it as something you benefit from." In April 2003, Bechtel signed a $680 million contract for reconstruction.
    This brutal blueprint has been used over and over again across Latin America, in Africa and in Central and Southeast Asia. It has cost millions of lives. It goes without saying that every war Empire wages becomes a Just War. This, in large part, is due to the role of the corporate media. It's important to understand that the corporate media don't just support the neoliberal project. They are the neoliberal project. This is not a moral position they have chosen to take; it's structural. It's intrinsic to the economics of how the mass media work.
    Most nations have adequately hideous family secrets. So it isn't often necessary for the media to lie. It's all in the editing--what's emphasized and what's ignored. Say, for example, India was chosen as the target for a righteous war. The fact that about 80,000 people have been killed in Kashmir since 1989, most of them Muslim, most of them by Indian security forces (making the average death toll about 6,000 a year); the fact that in February and March of 2002 more than 2,000 Muslims were murdered on the streets of Gujarat, that women were gang-raped and children were burned alive and 150,000 driven from their homes while the police and administration watched and sometimes actively participated; the fact that no one has been punished for these crimes and the government that oversaw them was re-elected...all of this would make perfect headlines in international newspapers in the run-up to war.
    Next thing we know, our cities will be leveled by cruise missiles, our villages fenced in with razor wire, US soldiers will patrol our streets, and Narendra Modi, Pravin Togadia or any of our popular bigots will, like Saddam Hussein, be in US custody having their hair checked for lice and the fillings in their teeth examined on prime-time TV.
    But as long as our "markets" are open, as long as corporations like Enron, Bechtel, Halliburton and Arthur Andersen are given a free hand to take over our infrastructure and take away our jobs, our "democratically elected" leaders can fearlessly blur the lines between democracy, majoritarianism and fascism.
    Our government's craven willingness to abandon India's proud tradition of being non-aligned, its rush to fight its way to the head of the queue of the Completely Aligned (the fashionable phrase is "natural ally"--India, Israel and the United States are "natural allies"), has given it the leg room to turn into a repressive regime without compromising its legitimacy.
    A government's victims are not only those it kills and imprisons. Those who are displaced and dispossessed and sentenced to a lifetime of starvation and deprivation must count among them too. Millions of people have been dispossessed by "development" projects. In the past fifty-five years, big dams alone have displaced between 33 million and 55 million in India. They have no recourse to justice. In the past two years there have been a series of incidents in which police have opened fire on peaceful protesters, most of them Adivasi and Dalit. When it comes to the poor, and in particular Dalit and Adivasi communities, they get killed for encroaching on forest land, and killed when they're trying to protect forest land from encroachments--by dams, mines, steel plants and other "development" projects. In almost every instance in which the police opened fire, the government's strategy has been to say the firing was provoked by an act of violence. Those who have been fired upon are immediately called militants.
    Across the country, thousands of innocent people, including minors, have been arrested under the Prevention of Terrorism Act and are being held in jail indefinitely and without trial. In the era of the War against Terror, poverty is being slyly conflated with terrorism. In the era of corporate globalization, poverty is a crime. Protesting against further impoverishment is terrorism. And now our Supreme Court says that going on strike is a crime. Criticizing the court is a crime too, of course. They're sealing the exits.
    Like Old Imperialism, New Imperialism relies for its success on a network of agents--corrupt local elites who service Empire. We all know the sordid story of Enron in India. The then-Maharashtra government signed a power purchase agreement that gave Enron profits that amounted to 60 percent of India's entire rural development budget. A single American company was guaranteed a profit equivalent to funds for infrastructural development for about 500 million people!
    Unlike in the old days, the New Imperialist doesn't need to trudge around the tropics risking malaria or diarrhea or early death. New Imperialism can be conducted on e-mail. The vulgar, hands-on racism of Old Imperialism is outdated. The cornerstone of New Imperialism is New Racism.
    The best allegory for New Racism is the tradition of "turkey pardoning" in the United States. Every year since 1947, the National Turkey Federation has presented the US President with a turkey for Thanksgiving. Every year, in a show of ceremonial magnanimity, the President spares that particular bird (and east another one). After receiving the presidential pardon, the Chosen One is sent to Frying Pan Park in Virginia to live out its natural life. The rest of the 50 million turkeys raised for Thanksgiving are slaughtered and eaten on Thanksgiving Day. ConAgra Foods, the company that has won the Presidential Turkey contract, says it trains the lucky birds to be sociable, to interact with dignitaries, school children and the press. (Soon they'll even speak English!)
    That's how New Racism in the corporate era works. A few carefully bred turkeys--the local elites of various countries, a community of wealthy immigrants, investment bankers, the occasional Colin Powell or Condoleezza Rice, some singers, some writers (like myself)--are given absolution and a pass to Frying Pan Park. The remaining millions lose their jobs, are evicted from their homes, have their water and electricity connections cut, and die of AIDS. Basically they're for the pot. But the Fortunate Fowls in Frying Pan Park are doing fine. Some of them even work for the IMF and the WTO--so who can accuse those organizations of being antiturkey? Some serve as board members on the Turkey Choosing Committee--so who can say that turkeys are against Thanksgiving? They participate in it! Who can say the poor are anti-corporate globalization? There's a stampede to get into Frying Pan Park. So what if most perish on the way?
    As part of the project of New Racism we also have New Genocide. New Genocide in this new era of economic interdependence can be facilitated by economic sanctions. New Genocide means creating conditions that lead to mass death without actually going out and killing people. Denis Halliday, who was the UN humanitarian coordinator in Iraq between 1997 and 1998 (after which he resigned in disgust), used the term genocide to describe the sanctions in Iraq. In Iraq the sanctions outdid Saddam Hussein's best efforts by claiming more than half a million children's lives.
    In the new era, apartheid as formal policy is antiquated and unnecessary. International instruments of trade and finance oversee a complex system of multilateral trade laws and financial agreements that keep the poor in their bantustans anyway. Its whole purpose is to institutionalize inequity. Why else would it be that the US taxes a garment made by a Bangladeshi manufacturer twenty times more than a garment made in Britain? Why else would it be that countries that grow cocoa beans, like the Ivory Coast and Ghana, are taxed out of the market if they try to turn it into chocolate? Why else would it be that countries that grow 90 percent of the world's cocoa beans produce only 5 percent of the world's chocolate? Why else would it be that rich countries that spend over a billion dollars a day on subsidies to farmers demand that poor countries like India withdraw all agricultural subsidies, including subsidized electricity? Why else would it be that after having been plundered by colonizing regimes for more than half a century, former colonies are steeped in debt to those same regimes and repay them some $382 billion a year?
    For all these reasons, the derailing of trade agreements at Cancún was crucial for us. Though our governments try to take the credit, we know that it was the result of years of struggle by many millions of people in many, many countries. What Cancún taught us is that in order to inflict real damage and force radical change, it is vital for local resistance movements to make international alliances. From Cancún we learned the importance of globalizing resistance.
    No individual nation can stand up to the project of corporate globalization on its own. Time and again we have seen that when it comes to the neoliberal project, the heroes of our times are suddenly diminished. Extraordinary, charismatic men, giants in the opposition, when they seize power and become heads of state, are rendered powerless on the global stage. I'm thinking here of President Lula of Brazil. Lula was the hero of the World Social Forum last year. This year he's busy implementing IMF guidelines, reducing pension benefits and purging radicals from the Workers' Party. I'm thinking also of the former president of South Africa, Nelson Mandela. Within two years of taking office in 1994, his government genuflected with hardly a caveat to the Market God. It instituted a massive program of privatization and structural adjustment that has left millions of people homeless, jobless and without water and electricity.
    Why does this happen? There's little point in beating our breasts and feeling betrayed. Lula and Mandela are, by any reckoning, magnificent men. But the moment they cross the floor from the opposition into government they become hostage to a spectrum of threats--most malevolent among them the threat of capital flight, which can destroy and government overnight. To imagine that a leader's personal charisma and a c.v. of struggle will dent the corporate cartel is to have no understanding of how capitalism works or, for that matter, how power works. Radical change cannot be negotiated by governments; it can only be enforced by people.
    At the World Social Forum some of the best minds in the world come together to exchange ideas about what is happening around us. These conversations refine our vision of the kind of world we're fighting for. It is a vital process that must not be undermined. However, if all our energies are diverted into this process at the cost of real political action, then the WSF, which has played such a crucial role in the movement for global justice, runs the risk of becoming an asset to our enemies. What we need to discuss urgently is strategies of resistance. We need to aim at real targets, wage real battles and inflict real damage. Gandhi's salt march was not just political theater. When, in a simple act of defiance, thousands of Indians marched to the sea and made their own salt, they broke the salt tax laws. It was a direct strike at the economic underpinning of the British Empire. It was real. While our movement has von some important victories, we must not allow nonviolent resistance to atrophy into ineffectual, feel-good, political theater. It is a very precious weapon that must be constantly honed and reimagined. It cannot be allowed to become a mere spectacle, a photo opportunity for the media.
    It was wonderful that on February 15 last year, in a spectacular display of public morality, 10 million people on five continents marched against the war on Iraq. It was wonderful, but it was not enough. February 15 was a weekend. Nobody had to so much as miss a day of work. Holiday protests don't stop wars. George Bush knows that. The confidence with which he disregarded overwhelming public opinion should be a lesson to us all. Bush believes that Iraq can be occupied and colonized as Afghanistan has been, as Tibet has been, as Chechnya is being, as East Timor once was and Palestine still is. He thinks that all he has to do is hunker down and wait until a crisis-driven media, having pricked this crisis to the bone, drops it and moves on. Soon the carcass will slip off the bestseller charts, and all of us outraged folks will lose interest. Or so he hopes.
    This movement of ours needs a major, global victory. It's not good enough to be right. Sometimes, if only in order to test our resolve, it's important to win something. In order to win something, we need to agree on something. That something does not need to be an overarching preordained ideology into which we force-fit our delightfully factious, argumentative selves. It does not need to be an unquestioning allegiance to one or another form of resistance to the exclusion of everything else. It could be a minimum agenda.
    If all of us are indeed against imperialism and against the project of neoliberalism, then let's turn our gaze on Iraq. Iraq is the inevitable culmination of both. Plenty of antiwar activists have retreated in confusion since the capture of Saddam Hussein. Isn't the world better off without Saddam Hussein? they ask timidly.
    Let's look this thing in the eye once and for all. To applaud the US Army's capture of Saddam Hussein, and therefore in retrospect justify its invasion and occupation of Iraq, is like deifying Jack the Ripper for disemboweling the Boston Strangler. And that after a quarter-century partnership in which the Ripping and Strangling was a joint enterprise. It's an in-house quarrel. They're business partners who fell out over a dirty deal. Jack's the CEO.
    So if we are against imperialism, shall we agree that we are against the US occupation and that we believe the United States must withdraw from Iraq and pay reparations to the Iraqi people for the damage that the ware has inflicted?
    How do we begin to mount our resistance? Let's start with something really small. The issue is not about supporting the resistance in Iraq against the occupation or discussing who exactly consititutes the resistance. (Are they old killer Baathists, are they Islamic fundamentalists?)
    We have to become the global resistance to the occupation.
    Our resistance has to begin with a refusal to accept the legitimacy of the US occupation of Iraq. It means acting to make it materially impossible for Empire to achieve its aims. It means soldiers should refuse to fight, reservists should refuse to serve, workers should refuse to load ships and aircraft with weapons. It certainly means that in countries like India and Pakistan we must block the US government's plans to have Indian and Pakistani soldiers sent to Iraq to clean up after them.
    I suggest we choose by some means two of the major corporations that are profiting from the destruction of Iraq. We could than list every project they are involved in. We could locate their offices in every city and every country across the world. We could go after them. We could shut them down. It's a question of bringing our collective wisdom and experience of past struggles to bear on a single target. It's a question of the desire to win.
    The Project for the New American Century seeks to perpetuate inequity and establish American hegemony at any price, even if it's apocalyptic. The World Social Forum demands justice and survival.
    For these reasons, we must consider ourselves at war.
ADDED MATERIAL
    Arundhati Roy, the author of The God of Small Things and War Talk, lives in New Delhi, India. A collection of interviews with David Barsamian, The Checkbook and the Cruise Missile, and a new essay collection, An Ordinary Person's Guide to Empire, are forthcoming from South End Press. This article was adapted from her January 16 speech to the opening plenary of the World Social Forum in Mumbai.

使用道具 举报

Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16

声望
53
寄托币
31146
注册时间
2001-10-7
精华
284
帖子
171

Sagittarius射手座 荣誉版主

5
发表于 2004-4-1 23:36:11 |只看该作者

TITLE: Local Development in the Global Economy

TITLE:  Local Development in the Global Economy
SOURCE:  NACLA Report on the Americas 37 no3 40-4 N/D 2003

The magazine publisher is the copyright holder of this article and it is reproduced with permission. Further reproduction of this article in violation of the copyright is prohibited. To contact the publisher: http://www.nacla.org/

    It is now commonplace to affirm that globalization has accentuated the importance of local spaces. Contrary to the supposed worldwide trend toward homogenization induced by global markets, the socio-cultural and political peculiarities of specific places are now understood to be crucial to determining how communities cope with the challenges of globalization. Global cities, winning regions, industrial districts, economic clusters, are just some of the terms observers have used to signal the importance of socio-territorial environments that have been more or less able to insert themselves successfully into globalizing processes.
    Much of the recent discussion of the ways localities have inserted themselves into the global economy has emphasized the nature of local and multinational firms, inter-firm relations and the institutional framework that determines the pattern of economic governance. This emphasis is hardly surprising given the centrality of the global market.
    By contrast, in our discussion of globalization from a local perspective, we assign priority to three elements that highlight the importance of local socio-contextual factors. In the first place, we draw attention to experiences in which neither multinational firms nor state policies have been the drivers of change. Rather, we analyze processes of global insertion "from below" that tend to be overlooked in the mainstream literature. Second, we focus on local communities where an economic activity inserted into global markets has developed through the efforts of a cluster of small firms. And third, we analyze community dynamics as these evolve in complex interaction with the process of globalization. Certainly, localities are affected by globalization, but they also create the conditions that make possible their insertion into global markets.
    Our reflections are based on the experiences of three Central American communities that have developed economic activities articulating the local with the global: tourism in La Fortuna, a small town in Costa Rica; handicrafts in La Palma in northern El Salvador; and apparel manufacturing subcontracting in San Pedro Sacatepéquez, a municipality located just outside of Guatemala City.(n1) In all three communities locally owned businesses have engaged in specific activities constituting clusters.
    We will highlight some of the more determinant community dynamics--equity, cohesion of enterprises in the cluster and the existence of local institutional support structures--found in the three cases. What we reveal is a complex web of dynamics that present promising opportunities for these communities, but that also challenge them to adapt to changing conditions that, if not confronted successfully, could represent serious threats to the communities and their members. We present each case separately, concluding with a series of reflections regarding the challenges faced by these types of communities inserted into the global process.


La Fortuna: The Dynamism of Global Tourism
    La Fortuna, a community of approximately 7,500 inhabitants, is inserted into global markets through its natural tourist attractions, in particular the nearby active volcano, El Arenal. As one of the main tourist destinations in Costa Rica, a cluster of small locally owned enterprises (hotels, restaurants, tour operators, etc.) has developed in La Fortuna.
    Of the three communities we discuss, La Fortuna is clearly the most successful. Its location in Costa Rica implies a higher level of economic development and social welfare than is found in El Salvador or Guatemala, and La Fortuna is alone among our three cases as a place where poverty is minimal and social integration is virtually universal. In Central America as elsewhere, differences in educational levels provide much of the explanation for differences in social indicators, and La Fortuna has benefited immensely from Costa Rican investments in social development. In this regard, La Fortuna's situation reminds us that the nation still matters. Although our focus here is on the dialectic between the local and the global--and indeed globalization introduces much that is new--legacies of the state-centric era remain powerfully present, and globalization has not meant erasing the old and starting anew.
    Just as La Fortuna has benefited from decades of non-authoritarian social development in Costa Rica, higher levels of impoverishment in La Palma and San Pedro Sacatepéquez reflect the exclusionary development models pursued in El Salvador and Guatemala.
    The second advantage enjoyed by La Fortuna is that its globalized activity is tourism, one of the most dynamic areas of the global economy and one in which Costa Rica--again the national enters into play--has been able to carve out an important niche. An important characteristic of tourism is that it can create opportunities for small businesses, and the Fortunans have taken advantage of these opportunities, setting up hotels and restaurants, organizing tours and so on. This has encouraged a certain division of labor among the enterprises within the cluster, leading to what economist Alfred Marshall defined in the 1920s as external economies of specialization: the reduction of costs based on factors outside the firm itself that involve the development of its respective sector.(n2) Thus, it is not surprising to find that employment in the tourism sector generates higher incomes, with positive effects for the welfare of the households of this community.
    Yet the generally optimistic picture of La Fortuna must be tempered by concern about two issues that appear crucial to its future. First, collective action among local business owners, local government and other community organizations is generally absent and appears nowhere on the horizon. This void reflects a fundamental flaw of the Costa Rican model of national modernization inaugurated at the end of the 1940s: a passive approach to the construction of social citizenship. Costa Ricans have enjoyed important social services provided by the state, but these benefits were given to them in top-down fashion, rather than won through political and social struggle. Collective action is further discouraged by the sheer dynamism of the tourism industry, which causes Fortunans to believe that opportunities will be available for all without the need to organize. In other words, individuals acting in isolation from one another can access the benefits of globalization.
    The town's second problem is institutional and reflects disadvantages accruing from the community's status as a secondary district in the cantón--an administrative division within a province--of San Carlos, the seat of local municipal government, rather than as an autonomous unit of its own. The distant centralized authority in San Carlos, for example, continues to provide support for local agrarian activities, which are of little relevance to a place like La Fortuna, where tourism has replaced farming as the critical driver of local economic life.
    Though latent at the moment, these two problems may become critical if non-local tourist businesses establish themselves in the area. Of particular concern is the possibility that international hotel chains will try to gain a foothold in the community. A handful of local business owners perceive this threat, but there is not a collective consciousness about it. Thus, the likelihood of proactive responses to this danger, which could ultimately provide incentives for collective action, seems remote. The absence of collective action also prevents Fortunans from effectively demanding resources and services from cantón authorities in San Carlos, thereby limiting their autonomy.


La Palma: The Hard Road of Handicrafts in Globalization
    La Palma, located in the northern department of Chalatenango in El Salvador, has a population of just over 10,000 people. Roughly a third of the working population in the urban center of this community works in the elaboration of brightly painted wooden handicrafts that are sold in local, national and international markets. Handicrafts are not a traditional activity in this community, but were introduced a few decades ago by a group of young artists from the Salvadoran capital. The residents of La Palma learned the craft and ended up appropriating it and developing their own designs.
    A little more than half the households in La Palma have overcome poverty in recent years, yet globalized handicraft production has not played a significant role in this process. As in much of El Salvador, decreased poverty levels are powerfully associated with the receipt of remittances from residents who have migrated to work abroad. The relatively minimal impact of handicraft activity on poverty rates brings us to probably the most pressing problem affecting handicraft development in La Palma: the type of competition that prevails among the approximately 100 workshops. Competition is clearly based on imitation and not on design innovation. The predatory effects of imitation are limited somewhat by the market's segmentation, but there are other negative consequences. The first is that those who copy tend to crowd out the innovators in the market niches opened up by the most creative firms. This crowding out takes place through cutthroat competition that relies on suppressing costs to levels that preclude enhancing social welfare. The use of unpaid family labor, carrying out the activity in the home in order not to incur infrastructure costs is one example. Moreover, this form of competition based on a logic of subsistence means that producers are unable to make the shift into accumulative strategies based on a logic of entrepreneurship.
    The tendency toward imitation also erodes community capital: When an artisan sees her creative efforts in developing a new design copied by a neighbor and sold for a fraction of the cost of her time, she will be hard put to trust and cooperate with other artisans the next time around.(n3) And since it is very difficult to sanction those that compete based on imitation, creativity stagnates.
    Another important element in La Palma is of a political-institutional nature. Without a doubt, of the three cases considered here, this community shows the greatest degree of institutional density, measured as the number of local institutional actors and their level of interaction particularly related to the globalized activity, in this case handicrafts. La Palma's institutions interact among themselves, developing leadership in coalitions relating to issues of importance to handicraft producers. However, what is missing is any sign of the emergence of a hegemonic process that would unite the majority of La Palma's population behind a common vision of community development. The explanation for this absence can be traced to the partisan political polarization that pervades the community. As happens in many Salvadoran municipalities, the confrontation between the Farabundo Marti National Liberation Front (FMLN) and the National Republican Alliance (ARENA) has impeded the ability to reach significant agreements, at least for now.(n4)
    Again, the national setting and specific characteristics of the country's past prove to be important determinants of local capabilities to thrive in the global. While in Costa Rica a half-century of national social development was the main explanation for higher levels of welfare, in La Palma the aftermath of the civil war continues to negatively affect local dynamics.


San Pedro Sacatepéquez: Indigenous People Facing Globalization
    San Pedro Sacatepéquez, a community of 21,000 residents, 80% of whom are Kakchiquel, lies about 15 miles from Guatemala City. The origin of this economic cluster goes back to the middle of the last century, when commerce replaced subsistence farming as the main economic activity. Sewing workshops emerged in the town and have subsequently been subcontracted for apparel manufacturing, mostly for maquila companies.
    The Guatemalan case highlights most clearly the issues related to upgrading in the respective market chain.(n5) According to the national exporters association, Guatemala is receiving more and more "full package" orders--production of a good from start to finish--since the more simple and low paid assembly work can be done in other countries. This presents the challenge of upgrading for the San Pedran producers in two ways. First, it means moving from simple assembly to a more integral production process, and secondly, it calls on them to upgrade from sewing basic clothes to fashion production.
    Upgrading in the San Pedran cluster is not impossible. There are four large factories in the community, and their experiences show that both upgrading and downgrading are possible. Upgrading poses three principal challenges. The first involves the possibility of obtaining full assembly contracts with firms that are willing to establish long-lasting, cooperative relationships with groups of local producers. The lack of a division of labor among San Pedran firms makes this difficult, and mechanisms need to be found that can replicate the role that former business leaders played years ago in forming one of the first subcontracting associations among workshop owners. This is essential, for if different workshops can specialize in different parts of the production and marketing processes and work in coordination, the resulting division of labor would generate what we referred to earlier as external economies of specialization.
    The second challenge relates to infrastructure. Full package production requires fabric-cutting operations that can only be done in very long rooms. This is a major limitation, since the vast majority of producers carry out their work in their homes, but the municipal government has lands where an industrial park could be established with adequate warehouses. What is interesting is that, for the first time, the mayor's office wants to have a role in the economic development of the community and not just limit itself to providing basic services. The municipal government is trying to obtain a loan from the Central American Bank for Economic Integration to finance this park. If this takes place, San Pedro Sacatepéquez will have overcome one of its main limitations, which has been the weakness of local institutions. This example demonstrates precisely why the availability of forward-looking local institutions, particularly local government, can have a significant impact on community prospects in global activities.
    The third challenge, and perhaps the most important, is to reverse the deterioration of community capital resulting from an erosion of collective identity. As they have become more deeply engaged in subcontracting, San Pedrans have stopped selling their own garments directly in retail markets. In so doing, they are losing the possibility of permanently recreating their identity as a community of producers and merchants. In terms of the cohesion in the cluster, a lack of cooperation and association exists, in addition to the serious problem of identity erosion.
    The community's deficient internalization of values and lack of trust, however, could be revitalized through the activation of cooperation and economic association. For this to happen, a collective perception of the need to upgrade must emerge, along with a realization that if this does not happen, the vast majority of producers would be excluded from the industry. If upgrading is achieved, then San Pedran producers could rediscover their traditional role in the market and recover that part of their identity lost through subcontracting.


Conclusions
    These three Central American experiences show some of the threats as well as opportunities that communities face in their insertion into the process of globalization. All three communities participate in the market through different types of global chains, and their sustainability depends upon their ability to upgrade. It is precisely in terms of this issue that we find the first major dilemma. Is it up to the market, in a selective manner, to allow for the upgrading of the most competitive firms? Or, by contrast, can upgrading be a more collective undertaking that involves the community as a whole? In other words, will just a few be able to upgrade or will the majority? Clearly, the latter is essential if local development is to take place. And the social integration and cohesion of the community is essential. It is important to note that starting with the social dimension means prioritizing the reduction of poverty and exclusion rather than placing this process on the back burner as occurs when one bets on the "trickle down effect" to overcome social deficits.
    Our studies of these communities show three factors that are significantly linked to household welfare. The first is socio-demographic and involves the need for households to incorporate gender and generational equality in order to maximize income generation. Reaching non-authoritarian family consensus is fundamental. Education is a second factor. And since the provision of education relies upon national policy, we are again reminded that regardless of how globally integrated they may be, these communities cannot escape their particular national context. Finally, our studies have confirmed a fact that is as widely overlooked by policymakers as it's suspected by globalization's critics: Employment in globalized activities does not always lead to a reduction in poverty. The type of insertion in the global market, rather than the act of insertion itself, is what matters.
    The generation of employment in the globalized activity is significant, but what matters more is the kind of jobs that are created. Labor can be viewed merely as a cost to be minimized or it can be seen as a form of human capital to be developed. The first approach signals the "low road" toward global integration, whereas the latter envisions a "high road." In this sense, the quality of employment is a strategic issue, and knowledge--in a broad sense--must be understood as a strategic resource for communities attempting to confront globalization.
    Employment generation must be based in the cluster of small and medium size businesses that characterize these types of communities. Because such clusters tend to be heterogeneous, global insertion is likely to bring about losers as well as winners. The challenge is how to increase the number of winners while minimizing the losers. In addition to the well known types of interventions that can be applied at the level of the individual firm--provision of credit, training, support for technological innovation, etc.--communities can also draw on collective resources that reinforce the cohesion of the cluster, leading over time to more widely diffused capabilities and increased competitiveness.
    External economies--including specialization, communication and information--are one such resource. Another is community capital, an asset that reminds us that the market is not autonomous but rather is embedded in specific social and cultural contexts. Business owners can appropriate the different types of socio-cultural resources available to these communities, thus contributing to the cohesion of the cluster. When fully internalized, shared values can lead to the consolidation of business identities. Reciprocity, for example, expressed through frequent sharing of tools, raw materials, labor and other resources, can generate sufficient trust leading to cooperative actions among businesses. Solidarity can be a valuable asset when the community is faced with external threats, and it can encourage the crystallization of business organizations that can strengthen local firms. And finally, the deepening of community norms can encourage forms of competition within the cluster based on innovation rather than imitation.
    A four-stage local process appears to us as crucial. First, the presence of sufficient institutions, in particular organized business owners and a supportive local government, is absolutely necessary for success. Second, the institutions need to interact among themselves in order to avoid redundancy. The basis of this interaction constitutes the dialogue between the organized business owners and local government. Third, this interaction needs to lead to the formation of coalitions. And finally, this process of "institutional thickening" should lead to the formulation of a hegemonic local development project. Consensus plays a fundamental role in this process. Among the underlying material foundations of this consensus are social integration and gains in equity in terms of class, gender, ethnicity, etc. In other words, this is a strategy for community upgrading where equity is seen as a vital factor for competitiveness. This hegemonic project constitutes a local social contract that ensures that the path through globalization is the most decent possible and that the exclusionary effects that globalization tends to bring about are overcome or at the very least minimized.


NOTES
    (n1.) We have carried out a series of studies over the last decade involving 15 communities in Central America with two common denominators: a) neighborhood communities with b) a cluster of small businesses inserted in the global market. Greater detail and analysis can be found in our recent book, Communities in Globalization: The Invisible Mayan Nahual (Lanham, Maryland: Rowman and Littlefield, 2003).
    (n2.) "External economy" is a term developed by Alfred Marshall in his studies of local economies in England at the beginning of the twentieth century. Economies of specialization result from the division of labor among firms within the cluster. There are also economies of communication and information when details about suppliers and clients circulate within the cluster. Labor economies, meanwhile, exist when there is a sufficient supply of skilled workers within the cluster.
    (n3.) By community capital we mean the individual appropriation of community resources that are socio-cultural in nature (social norms and values, identity, reciprocity and trust). We have been particularly interested in the use of community capital among business owners and the role this plays in bringing about cohesion within the cluster.
    (n4.) ARENA is the right-wing political party that has dominated the executive branch of government since 1989. The FMLN, now a political party, was the main guerrilla organization engaged in the decade-long armed conflict in El Salvador during the 1980s and is now the principle rival of ARENA.
    (n5.) Upgrading refers to the move from simple to more complex processes in the production process, a shift that is associated with increasing revenues and greater possibilities for local autonomy and control.
    PHOTO (BLACK & WHITE): Tourists from around the world come to the community of La Fortuna, Costa Rica, to visit El Arenal, the active volcano seen behind the town's church.
    PHOTO (BLACK & WHITE): An artist at a cooperative in La Palma, El Salvador, painting hand made wood figurines for export.
    PHOTO (BLACK & WHITE): A man working at a factory in San Pedro Sacatepéquez, Guatemala.
ADDED MATERIAL
    Katharine Andrade-Eekhoff works at FLACSO in El Salvador.

使用道具 举报

Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16

声望
53
寄托币
31146
注册时间
2001-10-7
精华
284
帖子
171

Sagittarius射手座 荣誉版主

6
发表于 2004-4-1 23:36:41 |只看该作者

TITLE: Defense Expenditure and Economic Growth in the SAARC Countries

TITLE:  Defense Expenditure and Economic Growth in the SAARC Countries
SOURCE:  The Journal of Social, Political and Economic Studies 28 no3 275-93 Fall 2003

The magazine publisher is the copyright holder of this article and it is reproduced with permission. Further reproduction of this article in violation of the copyright is prohibited.

M. Kabir Hassan; M. Waheeduzzaman; Aminur Rahman


ABSTRACT
This paper examines growth empirics in the context of five of the seven South Asian Regional Cooperation Council (SAARC) nations with special emphasis on the impact of military expenditure on economic growth using a panel data over the 1980-1999 period. It sheds light on both theoretical and empirical evidence about the many ways macroeconomic policies affect growth. The author's results indicate that ICT infrastructure, FDI, GDP growth, human capital, population growth, globalization index, gross domestic investment, government expenditure, per capita income, exchange rates and military expenditure all appear to influence net inward FDI flows and economic growth. ICT infrastructure and its utilization deserve more study.
    Key Words: South Asian Regional Cooperation Council; Military expenditure; Economic growth; ICT infrastructure; FDI; GDP growth; Human capital; Population growth; Globalization index; Gross domestic investment; Government expenditure; per capita income; Exchange rates.


INTRODUCTION
    This paper examines the relationship between military spending and economic growth in the context of a multivariate economic growth framework in five of the seven-member SAARC countries over the period from 1980 through 1999. The central theme of this paper is to ascertain whether military expenditure has any impact on economic growth and FDI.
    A number of studies have been carried out to find the determinants of countries' economic growth. Solow (1956) conducted an empirical study on the determinants of growth based on neoclassical theory. The Solow growth model predicts that in steady-state equilibrium the level of GDP per capita will be determined by the prevailing technology and the exogenous rates of saving, population growth and technical progress. That study concludes that different saving rates and population growth rates might affect different countries' steady-state levels of per capita income. However, recent growth theorists dismiss the Solow model in favor of an endogenous growth model that assumes constant and increasing returns to capital. The critics allege that the standard neoclassical model fails to explain the observed difference in per capita income across countries. The different implications of exogenous and endogenous growth models have led to renewed empirical work in recent years (Khan and Yim, 2000; Mehanna, 2001).
    The relationship between defense spending and economic development is a controversial topic. There is no sufficient theoretical framework and empirical evidence that crystallizes this relationship. Standard literature has synthesized few theoretical explanations. Defense spending can affect economic development either negatively through a crowding out of investment, positively through an expansion of aggregate demand, or positively through increased security. There are four arguments in favor of military expenditure's promoting economic growth. First, the defense expenditures can have a stimulative effect on the economy through the Keynesian multiplier mechanism, and this impact will be stronger in developing countries. Second, nations can experience positive externality from the state-of-the art technologies, which can be adopted in producing civilian goods. Third, a significant part of the overall defense budget usually goes to the development of infrastructure (roads, highways, airports and information technology), which will promote growth. Fourth, defense expenditure supports economic growth by maintaining internal and external security, and this creates a positive trade and investment climate for domestic as well as foreign investors.
    There are essentially four arguments showing military expenditure retarding economic growth. First, higher defense expenditures can crowd out both public and private investment that may be more growth-oriented and need-based than those of defense spending. This crowding out of essential investment may have an adverse impact on the long-run economic growth. Defense expenditure may crowd out private sector R&D activities, of which the technological innovations spill over faster to the civilian sector than those of the defense sector. A number of innovations in the defense sector may not be useful in the civilian sector. Second, defense expenditure can cause balance of payments problems if hard-earned foreign exchanges are used to purchase arms and defense hardware. Third, defense can inhibit growth by diverting resources from the export sector, which is often considered an engine of growth. Finally, the defense sector limits growth through inefficient bureaucracy and excess burdens created by taxes necessary to finance military spending. Since defense spending can cause both positive and negative effects, its final impact on growth will depend on the strength of the opposing forces. It is usually believed that the LDCs are likely to gain more from defense spending vis-à-vis the developed countries, as benefits are more widespread across the economy in these countries.
    We examine the impact of defense spending in five South Asian countries on economic growth and FDI in the context of a neo-classical growth framework. Single-equation and simultaneous-equation models have been estimated, and more recently there has been the application of techniques that investigate causal links. Studies have varied from extensive cross-country analyses, which failed to reach any consensus, to detailed case studies of individual countries. Dunne (1996) provides an extensive survey. The present study contributes to the debate in two ways. First, it provides a further case study of five of the regional cooperation SAARC countries. Second, it goes beyond the standard "Granger causality" econometric techniques used in previous econometric work, and uses a panel data approach within the framework of an economic growth model. Therefore, our approach is more comprehensive than others.
    The rest of this paper is structured as follows: Section 2 briefly reviews the literature on military expenditure and economic growth. Section 3 sets out the conceptual framework of the model and analyzes the data. Section 4 discusses the political economy of military expenditure in the SAARC Countries. Section 5 concludes the paper.


THE LITERATURE
    A key element of the neoclassical growth theory is the assumption that technical change is exogenous and that the same technological opportunities are available across countries. This assumption implies that steady-state growth depends solely on exogenous population growth and exogenous technical progress. In other words, the model predicts that poor countries should gradually converge toward richer countries. However, studies undertaken by Romer (1986) and Lucas (1988) have dropped this central assumption. The broad consensus highlighted in the literature is that a country's growth over a long period is basically determined by three factors, namely: (1) the efficient utilization of the existing stock of resources, (2) the accumulation of productive resources such as human capital, and (3) technological progress.
    In the aftermath of the work of Benoit (1973, 1978), who suggested that there was a positive relation between military spending and development, there has been considerable debate over the links between military spending and development. After the comprehensive critique provided by Ball (1983), a large number of econometric works attempted to overcome the deficiencies of the applied analysis in Benoit. There have been studies using single-equation analyses, simultaneous-equation systems, and large macroeconometric models, all developed from a variety of theoretical positions. Studies have been applied to different cross-sectional samples of countries, time series for individual countries, and pooled time series and cross-sectional data. No consensus has developed, but the most common findings are that military spending has no significant impact, positive or negative, on economic growth (Dunne 1996 provides an extensive survey).
    One important part of the single-equation work has been the recent application of causality tests to the data to see if there is any effect of military spending on growth and vice versa. Joerding (1986) considered two measures of military spending and growth for 57 less-developed countries (LDCs) for the period from 1962 to 1977 and found no evidence that military spending causes growth, whereas Chowdhury (1991, studying 73 LDCs) and Kusi (1994, 77 LDCs) found no common result. The findings that there was no general result sparked a number of more detailed case studies. Kinsella (1990) studied the causal relationship between defense spending and various economic variables (including output) of the United States and concluded that there was no substantial relationship between defense spending and output. Looney (1991) analyzed India and Pakistan and found a positive effect of military spending on growth for Pakistan but a negative one for India. Chen (1993) analyzed China and found no evidence of a causal link. Madden and Haslehurst (1995) found no causal relationship between military spending and growth. Finally, Kollias and Makrydakis (1999) examined Greek data and likewise found no causal relationship.
    Using a panel data of 95 countries and 8 MENA countries over the 1980-2001 period, Hassan (2003) examines the important factors that contribute to FDI and economic growth in the world and compares them with those of MENA countries. FDI brings host countries capital, productive facilities, new technology and modern management knowhow. Information and communication technology (ICT) is essential to growth, necessary to develop a country's productive capacity in all sectors of the economy, and links a country with the global economy and ensures competitiveness. This paper finds both growth and FDI are related to a host of macroeconomic, ICT and globalization variables. This paper provides policy recommendations for improving FDI inflows with special focus on trade facilitation, export processing zones, investment promotion agencies, export performance requirements and WTO rules and incentives. Table 1 provides a summary of important papers on FDI and economic growth.


DATA AND RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
    Data for this analysis are derived from World Development Indicators, International Financial Statistics, the World Telecommunication Development Report, and the UNESCO database. The analysis is based on data from a cross section of five of the seven SAARC countries over time from 1980 to 1999. Table 2 provides data description and their nominal statistics.
    FDI inflows are net inflows of investment to acquire a lasting management interest (10 percent or more of voting stock) in an enterprise operating in an economy other than the home country of the investor. The measure is the sum of equity capital, reinvestment of earnings, other long-term capital, and short-term capital as shown in the balance of payments.
    ICT infrastructure, or information and communications technology infrastructure, is a composite variable composed of indicators such as the density of Internet hosts and the number of computers, telephone mainlines, fax machines, TV sets, radios, users of mobile phones, and subscribers to newspapers. The reliability alpha among the sub-factors was .89. All the sub-factors were standardized and then combined to make the ICT-infrastructure variable.
    Globalization is calculated as the sum of exports and imports divided by GDP. This ratio of trade to GDP provides a measure of the degree of economic openness.
    Human capital means the percentage of the relevant group participating in secondary education. Secondary education completes the provision of basic education that began at the primary level, and aims at laying the foundations for lifelong learning and human development by offering more subject- or skill-oriented instruction using more specialized teachers. Population growth rate is the exponential change of population each year.
    Gross domestic investment consists of outlays for additions to the fixed assets of the economy plus net changes in the level of inventories. It is coded as a percentage of GDP. Also indicated by percentage of GDP, Government's Expenditure denotes central government's total expenditure including nonrepayable current and capital expenditure. FDI inflows are net inflows of investment to acquire a lasting management interest (10 percent or more of voting stock) in an enterprise operating in an economy other than the home country of the investor. The measure is the sum of equity capital, reinvestment of earnings, other long-term capital, and short-term capital as shown in the balance of payments.
    Inflation rate indicates a GDP implicit deflator measuring the average annual rate of price change in the economy. Exchange rate is a measure of each country's currency stability. Larger numbers indicate a weaker currency.
    Our hypothesis explaining economic growth and military expenditure, based on a review of the theoretical and empirical literature and on the ideas we presented above in our theory section, are represented by the equation below. Y0 is the initial GDP per capita, FDI is net FDI inflows, ICT is information and communications technology infrastructure, GI is globalization index (an indicator of market openness), GDP is gross domestic product, GDI is gross domestic investment, PG is population growth, GE is government expenditure, FDI is foreign direct investment, ER is exchange rate, IR is inflation rate, ME is military expenditure, epsilon is error, i represents each sampled country, and t represents each year. Ordinary least squares (OLS) regression analysis was used for analysis. We use a panel data method to estimate the following two equations: one for GDP growth and other for FDI.
    (GDP GROWTH)[subit] = beta[sub0] + beta[sub1](Y0) + beta[sub2](GI)[subit] + beta[sub3](ICT)[subit] + beta[sub4](HC)[subit] + beta[sub5](PG)[subit] + beta[sub6](GDI)[subit] + beta[sub7](GE)[subit] + beta[sub8](FDI)[subit] + beta[sub9](ER)[subit] + beta[sub10](IR)[subit] + + beta[sub11](ME)[subit] + epsilon[subit]
    (FDI)[subit] + beta[sub0] + beta[sub1](Y0) + beta[sub2](GI)[subit] + beta[sub3](ICT)[subit] + beta[sub4](HC)[subit] + beta[sub5](PG)[subit] + beta[sub6](GDI)[subit] + beta[sub7](GE)[subit] + beta[sub8](GDP GROWTH)[subit] + beta[sub9](ER)[subit] + beta[sub10](IR)[subit] + + beta[sub11](ME)[subit] + epsilon[subit]
    There are different channels through which positive externalities associated with FDI can occur. In a competition channel, increased competition leads to increased productivity, efficiency and investment in human and/or physical capital; and also increased competition may lead to changes in the industrial structure toward more competitiveness and more export-oriented activities. Second, in a training channel, increased training of labor and management can enhance growth. Third, in a linkages channel, foreign investment is often accompanied by technology transfer, and such transfers may take place through transactions with foreign firms. Finally, in a demonstration channel, domestic firms imitate the more advanced technologies used by foreign firms.


ANALYSIS OF EMPIRICAL RESULTS
    We provide pooled cross-section estimates in Tables 3 and 4. In the pooled cross-section regression gross investment, foreign direct investment (FDI) and military expenditures (ME) are statistically significant at 5 percent level. Domestic and foreign investments, and military expenditure positively influence the GDP growth. Infrastructure, government expenditure, and exchange rates negatively affect GDP growth; but none of the coefficients of those variables are statistically significant. On the other hand, human capital, population growth and inflation affect the GDP positively but insignificantly. Per capita GDP affect negatively as expected, but the coefficient is statistically insignificant.
    We find almost similar and consistent results when we regress foreign direct investment against a set of explanatory variables. We find how globalization exerts a positive and significant effect on FDI inflow. We also find that an information technology proxy contributes positively to the FDI flows. However, we find unexpectedly negative effects of human capital and population growth variable on the FDI inflows. We also find the exchange rate impacts FDI flows negatively, and it signifies that domestic currency devaluation exerts a negative influence on FDI inflows. Our important finding is that military expenditure has a negative impact on FDI. The negative and significant coefficient of income per capita supports the income convergence hypothesis among these five regional countries.


THE POLITICAL ECONOMY OF DEFENSE EXPENDITURE IN THE SAARC COUNTRIES
    Statistically we have been able to show some positive relationship between growth and military expenses in the above analysis. However, the growth concepts are not usually kept in mind while making expenditures for military purposes, at least in the SAARC countries. Sometimes military expenditure and GDP comparisons are misleading. The proportion of national resources allocated to defense reflects the perceptions of the national elite and decision-making circle, which is largely founded on the security milieu in which a country finds itself. It simply does not represent any comprehensive plan of sound investment where mass benefits exist.
    All countries (under SAARC) in our discussion are extremely poor and resources are transferred to defense at the cost of the economic and social development sector. The defense expenses are made with high hopes of maintaining internal and external security. In the SAARC countries, national security should be intrinsically linked with human security. Human security should have the upper hand in any security issue, since no security is sustainable in a country with an average 30% of hard-core poor in the total population, whatever the size of military build-up. So for internal purposes, except in some internal insurgency cases, the emphasis should be on the development of human resources, not on military expenditure. The central point is that without the development of human resources, poverty cannot be reduced. In such a state, poverty becomes the center of discussion for growth, not military expenditure. To ensure human security, what needs to be accommodated are access to education, better sanitation and health. If there is only military security, it will be a fragile growth initiative.
    In the case of Bangladesh, external security threats are threats from neighboring India and Myanmar. However, looking at the military might of India in conventional as well as non-conventional senses, Bangladesh is no match. An effort to match it will be a futile exercise. Even Myanmar has a much better arsenal of military build-up than Bangladesh. Even with a larger budget, Bangladesh will not be able to keep up with them. So falling in a competitive trap with Myanmar will again be impracticable. The analogy above does not put Bangladesh in a helpless situation. The cases of India and Myanmar are different. One is engulfed in several long-standing disputes with its neighbor in the north and the other is ruled by a military junta. Even with these adversaries, India spends only 2.5 percent of her GDP for defense purposes, which is quite low compared to China and Pakistan. Of course, there are some concealed budget in Bangladesh in the form of pension and other funds for military personnel disbursed by other sectors. But they are part of social safety network, not directly military expenses.
    If military strength can be treated as an export item, the expansion of that with the growth potential of the country might have some linkage. In the case of Bangladesh this phenomena is producing some positive impact as remittances sent by the exported army personnel meet some of the foreign currency gap of the country. Still, the quality of its use remains to be tested as most of the earned currency is used for real estate purposes at an exorbitantly high price leading to inflation. In the case of Sri Lanka the picture is a bit different. The country has been fighting a secessionist war for many years. So priority has been shifted to the military budget from welfare programs. The increased budget there could not bring any positive growth, as foreign indebtedness has only increased over the years.
    Military priorities dominate political decisions in Sri Lanka. The situation is such that the country can no longer afford the present size of military expenses. Overspending has victimized social service expenditure, which has been in decline over the years. Luckily, Sri Lanka has a skilled and educated workforce compared to all her neighbors. In this sense, Sri Lanka has missed a double opportunity, as the return from human development would have been much higher in Sri Lanka, producing a better growth potential compared to her neighbors.
    In the case of Nepal, which used to maintain a low budget compared to her mighty neighbor until recently, the budget has increased to face the Maoist insurgency in the north. Thus, the growth factor here has been seen as a secondary one, not the primary one.
    The military expenditures in Pakistan have been enormous. It has always been rationalized by concern over Indian attitudes. The military expenses have been increased over the years alarmingly for increasing security, but unfortunately this has produced an opposite effect, increasing insecurity. Ironically, military expenditures have been made by slashing the budget for social sector development. The effect has been that both internal and external insecurity have increased. Moreover, development was not the overriding concern of the rulers of Pakistan. The result is a huge public debt and wastage of funds that could have had a higher value-added if they had been invested in the social sector.
    Our analysis above calls for reassessing national priorities in the backdrop of social development and opportunity cost because that reassessment is necessary for human resource development in encountering poverty. Military expenditure has some positive impacts because of the trickling-down effect on employment and infrastructure development, but the magnitude of that impact is low compared to the potential in alternative uses.


IMPLICATIONS AND CONCLUSION
    Our results indicate that ICT infrastructure, FDI, GDP growth, human capital, population growth, globalization index, gross domestic investment, government expenditure, per capita income, exchange rates and military expenditure all appear to influence and have some relationship to net inward FDI flows and economic growth. ICT infrastructure and its utilization deserve more study. ICT infrastructure and its utilization matter because they are important to attract and retain investment. A consideration regarding emerging markets is that FDI inflows may sometimes be highly controlled by governmental or public bodies, but our finding tells us that this has not significantly deterred investment. Military expenditure has significant positive impact in our growth equation, but negative impact in the FDI equation. While globalization has positive impact on FDI inflows, it has no definable impact on economic growth.
    We find that the SAARC region, mostly composed of developing countries, gains more from defense spending vis-à-vis the developed countries, as benefits are more widespread across the economy in these countries. We also find that the ultimate impact of defense on growth is positive because it brings overall stability in the economy by providing security against all external threats and aggression. However, the immediate objective of military spending may not be directly related to growth. It is imperative that we carefully assess various supply-side (spin-offs from technology or infrastructure) and demand-side (resource diversion) factors.
ADDED MATERIAL
    M. Kabir Hassan, Ph.D.
    Professor of Finance at the University of New Orleans
    M. Waheeduzzaman, Ph.D.
    Professor of Public Administration and Department Chair at the Austin Peay State University
    Aminur Rahman, Ph.D.
    Associate Professor of Economics at Independent University, Bangladesh.
    Table 1: Summary of Main FDI and Growth Studies


  Author(s)           Sample            Period of         Impacts on       Impacts on     Interaction between FDI and
                                        estimation        growth           investment            other factors
Aggregate Studies on FDI
Saltz (1992)         68 developing     1970-80          Negative           Not tested
                     countries
(1994)               78 developing     1960-85          Positive for       Not tested     Positive and significant for
                     countries                          overall sample                    higher income countries but
                                                                                          insignificant for lower
                                                                                          income countries
Borensztein et       69 developing     1970-79 and      Insignificant      Positive       Positive when combined
al. (1998)           countries         1980-89                             and larger     with schooling
                                                                           than 1
Oloffsdotter         50 developing     1980-90          Positive           Not tested     Positive when combined
(1998)               countries                                                            with bureaucratic efficiency
                                                                                          and with property right
                                                                                          protection, but not with
                                                                                          openness nor with
                                                                                          schooling.
Balasubramanya       46 developing     1970-85          Positive for       Not tested     Insignificant for import-
m et al. (1999)      countries                            overall sample                  substituting economies
                     Split sample:
                     Export-
                     oriented vs
                     import-
                     substituting
                     economies
Hermes and           67 developing     1970-95          Negative           Not tested     Positive impact of FDI when
Lensink (1999)       countries                                                            combined with schooling or
                                                                                          with financial depth
Nunnenkamp           55 developing     Time series      Positive and       Not tested
(2000)               countries         1970-97          significant for
                                                        Latin American
                                                        economies only
                                       Cross-section
                                       1970-79
                                       1980-89          Positive
                                       1990-97          Insignificant
                                                        Positive
                                       Pooled analysis
                                                        Positive for all
                                                        groups without
                                                        lags
Nair-Reichert et     24 developing     1971-95          No effect          Not tested     Heterogeneous impact of
al. (2000)           countries         Contemp-         Positive and                      FDI x Openness. No
                                       oraneous         significant but                   impact of FDI x Human
                                       Correlations     heterogeneous                     capital
                                       Dynamic
                                       Panels
Marino (2000)        42 developing     1980-95                             Not tested     Positive for open
                     countries                                                            economies.
                                                                                          Negative for closed
                                                                                          economies.
Alfaro et.al.        Different         Three            Positive when      Positive       Positive when combined
(2001)               samples           periods:         investment         and larger     with financial depth but
                     39 countries      1981-97          excluded from      than 1         not with schooling and
                     (mixed)           1977-97          the explanatory                   infrastructure
                     41 countries      1970-95          variables
                     (primarily                         Insignificant
                     developed)                         when
                     49 countries                       investment
                     (primarily                         included
                     developing)
Aggregate studies on various capital inflows
Bosworth and         62 developing     1978-95          Positive           No effect for
Collins (1999)       countries of                       through            the overall
                     which 18                           impact on          sample
                     emerging                           TFP                Positive for
                     markets                                               emerging
                                                                           markets but
                                                                           close to 1
Soto (2000)          44 developing     1986-97          Positive           Not tested
                     countries
Studies on limited samples
Fry (1993)           16 developing     1966-88          Positive for       Positive for
                     countries of                       the overall        East Asia and
                     which 5 East                       sample and         negative for
                     Asian                              for East           the control
                     economies                          Asian              group
                                                        economies
                                                        but negative
                                                        for the
                                                        control group
Mody and Wang        7 Chinese         1985-89          Positive           Not tested
(1997)               coastal regions
Bouklia-Hassane      54 developing     1975-97          Positive           Positive       Positive when combined
and Zatla            countries                                                            with schooling
(2001)
                     9                 1985-97          Positive but
                     Mediterranean                      insignificant
                     economies
Bosworth and         62 developing     1978-95          Positive           No effect for
Collins              countries of                       through            the overall
(1999)               which 18                           impact on          sample
                     emerging                           TFP                Positive for
                     markets                                               emerging
                                                                           markets but
                                                                           close to 1
    Table 2: Summary Statistics (1985 - 1996)


                                                                 Gross
                  FDI             GDP            Govt.          Domestic       Inflation       Exchange
                                 Growth       Expenditures     Investment                        Rate
Mean            2.20E+08        4.986833        9.640000        21.17200        8.966000       31.38600
Median          49916842        4.900000        9.975000        21.20000        9.010000       30.72000
Maximum         2.82E+09        9.920000        16.78000        27.33000        20.06000       56.69000
Minimum        -5100000.        0.420000        2.200000        16.58000        0.290000       12.37000
Std. Dev.       4.91E+08        1.798462        3.328741        2.920503        3.648375       11.49387
Skewness        3.831786        0.078432       -0.480703        0.211140        0.342203       0.280072
Kurtosis        18.31876        3.260030        2.692210        2.009482        4.421634       2.332053
Jarque-         733.4872        0.230555        2.547588        2.898617        6.223637       1.899785
Bera
Probability     0.000000        0.891119        0.279768        0.234733        0.044520       0.386783
                Population                       GDP Per
                  Growth       Globalization                  Infrastucture      HC2?         GC2?         ME2?
                                                  capita
Mean            2.072667        37.66583         370.0970      6.091667        41.18750     1396.690     14.54821
Median          2.110000        32.91500         325.0200      5.400000        38.25000     1296.045     13.25000
Maximum         2.940000        81.64000         727.0000      18.40000        75.50000     2907.510     29.30000
Minimum         0.910000        13.84000         165.2000      1.200000        17.20000     653.7400     4.900000
Std. Dev.       0.516569        19.37957         152.4701      4.185661        19.57068     523.1604     7.573446
Skewness       -0.435771        0.801781         0.573168      1.062840        0.513248     1.008246     0.644975
Kurtosis        1.962903        2.503748         2.374267      3.511458        2.024255     3.562700     2.243136
Jarque-         4.587890        7.044195         4.264073      11.95027        4.011547     10.95718     5.219234
Bera
Probability     0.100868        0.029537         0.118596      0.002541        0.134556     0.004175     0.073563
    Note: Number of cross-sections:
    5 (Bangladesh, India, Pakistan, Sri Lanka, Nepal)
    Table 3 Regression Estimates of Pooled Cross-Section and Panel Fixed Effect Models (GLS), SAARC (Dependent Variable: GDP Growth Rate)


             Explanatory Variables/Expected signs          Pooled Cross-Section
                                                               GLS (N = 5)
Globalization
      GI (Globalization Index) +                      0.058
                                                     (0.959)
Infrastructure
      ICT (ICT Configuration) +                      -0.252
                                                    (-0.734)
      HC (Human Capital) +                            0.008
                                                     (0.159)
      PG (Population Growth) +/-                      0.690
                                                     (0.474)
National Investment
      GDI (Gross Domestic Invest) +                   0.398(FN**)
                                                     (2.112)
      GE (Government Expenditure) +/-                -0.061
                                                    (-0.542)
      FDI (FDI Inflows) +                             2.44E-09(FN**)
                                                     (2.129)
Economic Factors
      IR (Inflation Rate) +/-                         0.036
                                                     (0.420)
      ER (Exchange Rate) +/-                         -0.039
                                                    (-0.381)
      ME (Military Expenditure) +/-                   0.212(FN**)
                                                     (2.431)
      GC (Per capita Income) -                       -0.007
                                                    (-0.757)
Constant                                             -5.800
                                                    (-0.851)
      Number of observations                         44
      R2                                              0.55
      Adjusted R2                                     0.48
      F-Value                                         4.531
    t-statistics in parentheses
    * p < .05
    *** p < .001


FOOTNOTES
    Table 4 Regression Estimates of Pooled Cross-Sectionand Panel Fixed Effect Models (GLS), SAARC (Dependent Variable: FDI Inflows)


            Explanatory Variablest Expected Signs           Pooled Cross-Section
                                                               GLS (N = 5)
Globalization
      GI (Globalization Index) +                      14396779(FN***)
                                                      (2.801)
Infrastructure
      ICT (ICT Configuration) +                       2.74E+08(FN***)
                                                      (6.812)
      HC (Human Capital) +                            -13948619(FN**)
                                                      (-2.110)
      PG (Population Growth) +/-                      -4.74E+08(FN***)
                                                      (-3.905)
National Investment
      GDI (Gross Domestic Invest) +/-                 -17095071
                                                      (-0.941)
      GE (Government Expenditure) +/-                 -74223773
                                                      (-5.250)
      GDP Growth Rate +                               3592527
                                                      (0.325)
Economic Factors
      IR (Inflation Rate) +/-                         -8765971
                                                      (-1.194)
      ER (Exchange Rate) +/-                          -28097102(FN***)
                                                      (-4.984)
      ME (Military Expenditure) +/-                   -15471545(FN**)
                                                      (1.859)
      GC (Per capita Income) -                        -3119457(FN***)
                                                      (-3.761)
Constant                                              3.06E+09(FN***)
                                                      (4.586)
      Number of observations                          44
      R2                                              0.89
      Adjusted R2                                     0.85
      F-Value                                         24.73
    t-statistics in parentheses
    * p < .05


FOOTNOTES


REFERENCES
    Ball, N. 1983 Defense and development: A critique of the Benoit study. Economic Development and Cultural Change 31 (3): 507-24.
    Barro, Robert J. 1991 "Economic Growth in a Cross Section of Countries." Quarterly Journal of Economics 106, vol. 2 (May): 407-433.
    Batchelor, Peter, and Sue Willett. 1998 Disarmament and defense industrial adjustment in South Africa. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press.
    Benoit, E. 1973 Defense and economic growth in developing countries. Boston: D. C. Heath.
    Benoit, E. 1978 Growth and defense in developing countries. Economic Development and Cultural Change 34:176-96.
    Chen, C. H. 1993 Causality between defence spending and economic growth: The case of mainland China. Journal of Economic Studies 20 (1): 37-43.
    Chowdhury, A. R. 1991 A causal analysis of defense spending and economic growth. Journal of Conflict Resolution 35:80-97.
    Dakurah, Henry A., Stephen Davies, and Rajan Sampath. 2001 "Defense Spending and Economic Growth in Developing Countries: A Causality Analysis," Journal of Policy Modeling 23(6), pp. 651-658.
    Dunne, Paul and Eftyshia Nikolaidou. 2001 "Military Expenditure and Economic Growth: A Demand in Supply Model for Greece, 1960-96," Defence and Peace Economics. 12(1), pp. 47-67.
    Dunne, Paul and Dimitrious Vougas. 1999 "Military Spending and Economic Growth in South Africa," Journal of Conflict Resolution 43(4), pp. 521-537.
    Dunne, J. P. 1996 Economic effects of military expenditure in developing countries: A survey. In The peace dividend, edited by N. P. Gleditsch, O. Bjerkholt, A. Cappelen, R. P. Smith, and J. P. Dunne, 439-64. Amsterdam: Elsevier.
    Gupta, Sanjeev, Luiz de Mello, and Raju Sharan. 2001 "Corruption and Military Spending," European Journal of Political Economy 17(4), pp. 749-777.
    Hassan, M. Kabir, M. Waheeduzzaman and Aminur Rahman. 2002 "Defense Expenditure and Economic Growth in the SAARC Countries," Paper presented at the 2002 Annual Conference of Federation of Business Disciplines (FBD) in Houston, Texas, March 3-6.
    Hassan, M. Kabir. 2003 "FDI, Information Technology and Economic Growth in the MENA Countries," Paper to be presented at the 10th ERF Conference in Marakkesh, Morocco on December 16-18, 2003.
    Joerding, W. 1986 Economic growth and defense spending: Granger causality. Journal of Development Economics 12:35-40.
    Khan, Habibullah and Yap Wei Yim. 2000 "Defense Spending and Economic Growth: Evidence from Asean Using Cointegration and Causality Tests," Paper presented in the 7th Annual Meeting of the ASBBS, Las Vegas, February 17-21, 2000.
    Kinsella, D. 1990 Defence spending and economic performance in the United States: A causal analysis. Defence Economics 1:295-309.
    Kollias, Christos G. 1994 "The Economic Effects of Defense Spending in Greece, 1963-90: Some Preliminary Econometric Findings," Spoudai 33(4), pp. 114-130.
    Kollias, Christos and Stelios Makrydakis. 1997 "Defence Spending and Growth in Turkey 1954-1993: A Causal Analysis," Defence and Peace Economics 8(2), pp. 189-204.
    Kollias, Christos, and S. Makrydakis. 1997 Is there a Greek-Turkish arms race? Evidence from cointegration and causality tests. Defence and Peace Economics 8:355-79.
    Kusi, Newman K. 1994 "Economic Growth and Defense Spending in Developing Countries: A Causal Analysis," Journal of Conflict Resolution 38(1), pp. 152-159.
    Looney, Robert E. 1991 Defense expenditures and economic performance in South Asia: Tests of causality and interdependence. Conflict Management and Peace Science 11 (2): 37-67.
    Lapidus, Kevin. 1993 "National Security at What Price? The Economic Consequences of Military Spending," The American Economist 37(2), pp. 68-77.
    Madden, Gary G., and Paula I. Haslehurst. 1995 Causal analysis of Australian economic growth and military expenditure: A note. Defense and Peace Economics 6:115-21.
    Mauro, Paul. 1995 "Corruption and Growth," Quarterly Journal of Economics 110(3), pp. 681-712.
    Mehanna, Rock-Antoine. 2001 "Defense Spending and Economic Development in Lebanon: A Cointegration and Vector Autoregression Analysis" Working Paper, 2001, Wartburg College, US.
    Mintz, Alex and Chi Huang. 1990 "Defense Expenditures, Economic Growth, and the Peace Dividend," American Political Science Review 84(4), pp. 1283-1293.
    Mueller, Michael J. and Sommez Atesoglu. 1993 "Defense Spending, Technological Change, and Economic Growth in the United States," Defence Economics 4(3), pp. 259-269.
    Szymanski, Albert. 1973 "Military Spending and Economic Stagnation," American Journal of Sociology 79(1), pp. 1-14.
    Ward, Michael and David Davis. 1992 "Sizing Up the Peace Dividend: Economic Growth and Military Spending in the United States, 1948-1996," American Political Science Review 86(3), pp. 748-755.

使用道具 举报

Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16

声望
53
寄托币
31146
注册时间
2001-10-7
精华
284
帖子
171

Sagittarius射手座 荣誉版主

7
发表于 2004-4-1 23:37:07 |只看该作者

AUTHOR: JOHN S. LEVIN

AUTHOR:  JOHN S. LEVIN
TITLE:  Two British Columbia University Colleges and the Process of Economic Globalization
SOURCE:  Canadian Journal of Higher Education 33 no1 59-86 2003

The magazine publisher is the copyright holder of this article and it is reproduced with permission. Further reproduction of this article in violation of the copyright is prohibited. To contact the publisher: www.education.mcgill.ca/csshe



ABSTRACT
This qualitative investigation identifies a condition of frenetic change experienced by organizational members at two university colleges in British Columbia, Canada, during the past decade. Prominent outcomes of the formal designation of five former community colleges as university colleges included curricular change and the evolution of a new institutional mission. The brief history of the university colleges of British Columbia parallels the process of economic globalization in the province of British Columbia, and the responses of managers and faculty at university colleges indicate that globalization influenced the formation and functioning of these institutions. Cette recherche qualitative identifie une condition de changement majeure à laquelle les représentants institutionnels de deux collèges universitaires en Colombie-Britannique, au Canada, ont d&ucirc; faire face au cours de la dernière décennie. Ainsi, l'identification formelle de cinq anciens collèges communautaires à titre de collèges universitaires a provoqué des changements à leurs programmes d'études et l'évolution vers une nouvelle mission institutionnelle. La brève histoire des collèges universitaires en Colombie-Britannique est semblable au processus de mondialisation économique dans cette province, et les choix des personnes en autorité dans les collèges universitaires indiquent que la mondialisation a influencé la formation donnée dans ces institutions ainsi que les modes de fonctionnement de celles-ci.
    Established as provincial public colleges in the 1960s, the community colleges of British Columbia were modeled after California's junior colleges yet located in a context that challenged notions of social class imported from the United Kingdom, including views of elitism that placed barriers to higher education and severely limited access beyond the twelfth grade of secondary school. Until the 1960s there was only one higher education institution in the province of British Columbia, and that institution, the University of British Columbia, contributed the educated class to the province's economy and society. Somewhat surprisingly, it was leaders at the University of British Columbia who spearheaded the movement to develop not only additional universities in the province but also regional two-year colleges. Both the University of British Columbia and provincial school trustees exerted considerable influence on the formative years of community colleges in British Columbia (Dennison & Gallagher, 1986). By the mid-1970s, and specifically through a legislative act in 1977, the provincial government claimed the role of dominant influencer of British Columbia's colleges (Dennison & Gallagher, 1986; Levin, 1995). By the 1980s, the colleges were both de jure and de facto a system of provincial colleges, answerable for operations to the government minister. They were both locally responsive and legislatively mandated to meet local needs but they were provincially governed and funded. They maintained a traditional community college orientation and philosophy, including a comprehensive curriculum, open-access to education and training, focus upon student needs, and community responsiveness (Dennison, 1995; Dennison & Gallagher, 1986; Dennison & Levin, 1988a; Dennison & Levin, 1988b; Levin, 1995; Levin, 2001).
    Rising pressures upon government for greater access to education and training during the mid-1980s, evident in increasing numbers of students in the province's universities and colleges and documented thousands of students unable to obtain places at these institutions, resulted in a government appointed committee to recommend ways to alleviate the stresses upon the postsecondary education system. The findings of the Provincial Access Committee (Province of British Columbia, 1988) indicated that access to university education, specifically to baccalaureate degree programming, was limited and particularly restricted to two geographical areas of the province--the Vancouver region and the Victoria region, areas where the three provincial universities were located in the 1980s (Dennison, 1992; Gallagher, 1999; Petch, 1998). The recommendations of the Provincial Access Committee (Province of British Columbia, 1988) included the establishment of university colleges that would provide university degree programs through "an upper level university college component" at existing colleges (read community colleges) in densely populated areas outside of Vancouver and Victoria. Government acceded to the access committee's recommendations for establishing university colleges, and three colleges were designated in 1989, with two more designated in the 1990s.
    But government's motives and intentions were not solely to provide access to university degree programming. Government economic policy placed university colleges in a contributory role for provincial economic development. Schuetze and Day (2001), in their examination of postsecondary education in B. C. from 1989-1998, while acknowledging that university colleges were part of a government strategy to address the demand for university education, also note that government decisions were "based strongly on brick and mortar investments which were seen as the generating of jobs and enhancing economic development" (pp. 26-27). Other sources indicate that fiscal and economic issues were at the forefront of the reasons for the maintenance of university colleges (Perrin, 2001; University Colleges of British Columbia, 2000). The Assistant Deputy Ministry of Education, Training, and Technology in 1998 (Ciceri, 1998) stated in a letter to the Chair of the University colleges presidents' group that university colleges "play a significant role in preparing students for life and work and in strengthening the economy, both regionally and provincially." The provincial government's strategic plan for colleges (Province of British Columbia, 1996) characterizes the degree program component of university colleges as programs "with an applied emphasis and a focus upon employment opportunities." The plan stresses a condition of economic globalization that faces the province and exhorts public postsecondary education institutions to meet the demands of international competition, including keeping pace with technological advances and training a highly skilled workforce (Province of British Columbia, 1996).


ECONOMIC GLOBALIZATION
    Globalization and its institutional dynamics are largely understood as an economic theory. Changing modes of production both to capitalize upon labor saving technologies and to exploit a global workforce, for example breaking up production components so that different national locations serve as production sites, are among the defining features of global economic competitiveness. Economic globalization in particular refers to the dominance of the market in organizational and social behaviors and the interventionary role of the state through education, training, and labor market policies (Dudley, 1998). Globalization and responses to globalization, by governments for example, clearly affect practices of institutions (Robertson, 1992). Indeed, institutional agendas reflect the choices available from global forces that promote technological change and market forces, as well as reflect a particular ideology and political decisions at national and regional levels (Held, McGrew, Goldblatt, & Perraton, 1999). But, globalization is not simply a one-way process. Governments and institutions are both vehicles of globalization and definers of the impact of global forces. This interdependence is a cornerstone of globalization (Robertson, 1992).
    Globalization theory has implications for community colleges. Knowles (1995) suggests that in recognizing the presence of a global economy that impinges upon the local environment, community colleges are required to diversify their resource base as well as their program offerings. Organizational actions of community colleges that include alteration to mission and purpose, such as the development and implementation of baccalaureate degree programs, are consistent with the dynamics of economic globalization. Globalization would thus tend to affect community colleges by not only stimulating market sensitive behaviors, such as programming for the needs and demands of students and employers, but also their conformation to government policy, such as developing a globally competitive work force by expanding access to higher level educational credentials. Globalization may be viewed through responses of institutional officials -- including governing board members, administrators and faculty -- and lead to change of organizational paradigm, mission and purpose, culture, or functional processes such as communication mechanisms (Levy & Merry, 1986): all or any may reflect global flows and responses by such entities as government, the public, or business. These global flows include massive immigration from the East to the West and from the South to the North (Held et al., 1999), technological advances such as electronic network communications (Castells, 1996), changing modes of production (Teeple, 1995), worldwide webs of economic activity (Barnet & Cavanagh, 1994), and "growing interdependence across the world" (Robertson, 1992, p. 176), particularly economic interdependence.


THE STUDY OF THE UNIVERSITY COLLEGE
    This investigation relies upon qualitative field research methods as well as historical analysis including data collection, data analysis and theory application, modification, and re-application (Berg, 1995; Burgess, 1984; Mason, 1996; Miles & Huberman, 1994). Postsecondary education in British Columbia constitutes an exceptional case (Yin, 1984). It is this jurisdiction where the first university colleges were established.(FN1) The research addresses organizational change in the university colleges of British Columbia from their inception in 1989 to the year 2001. Data collection includes interview data from organizational members at two university colleges, document analysis of British Columbia government documents and institutional documents, and observations on site by a research team.
    Interview data include interviews with approximately 120 people on site from the period of 1997-2001. Included are data from a sample of administrators and faculty. These organizational members were interviewed during two extended site visits -- once in the 1997/98 academic year and once in the 1998/99 academic year. Several of these organizational members were interviewed twice. Furthermore, college presidents (there were three at the two colleges during this period) were interviewed during the two site visits and then two were interviewed again in 2000 and 2001. Additionally, in 2001, two college vice presidents, the chair (faculty member) of the Education Council (a senate-type body), a program head, and a faculty union leader were interviewed. Interview questions and responses covered areas that included organizational change as well as curricular and government changes. These questions addressed both determinants and outcomes of the change process.
    In addition to interview data, documents were collected over the period of 1989 to 2001 as data sources. Document analysis covered government legislation, government strategic plans and reports, letters between government and institutional officials, government and institutional studies, institutional reports, and formal notes from meetings among college officials. Documents also included institutional budgets, college calendars, and collective agreements, as well as college and student newspapers.
    Observational data comprised another data set. Observations were carried out on two separate site visits to two colleges lasting several days each. Research team members from the first site visit and the principal investigator from both site visits noted their observations. The principal researcher maintained a detailed set of notes and written observations during three site visits at the two institutions. These data formed a journal, which included theorizing, such as comparing observations from the sites with established globalization and organization theory.
    Data analysis relied upon both globalization theory and organizational change theory (Levin, 2001; Levy & Merry, 1986; Robertson, 1992) as analytical frameworks. Globalization literature either implicitly or explicitly suggests a number of institutional behaviors influenced by globalizing processes (See Figure 1). These identified behaviors characterize how higher education institutions (their members) respond to global forces as well as to the behaviors of the state in its responses to global forces such as global competitiveness. Behavioral sets or categories include internationalization, multiculturalism, commodification, homogenization, marketization, workforce training, re-structuring, labor alterations, productivity and efficiency, and electronic communication and information. Furthermore, with the role of the state increasing in the affairs and operations of public higher education institutions, the state has become a more noticeable institutional actor, intervening or interfering in colleges' actions. I refer to this set of behaviors as state intervention, although it is not an institutional behavior but rather a behavior of the state acting upon higher education institutions. Some of these sets of behaviors are not present in all organizations, not present simultaneously in an organization, and not enacted in all areas of an organization. These organizational behaviors are not only consistent with globalization but also reflect both the impact of global forces upon higher education institutions and the reproduction of the globalization process (Levin, 2001).
    Levy and Merry (1986) develop a conceptual framework for organizational change, premised upon the concept of second-order, fundamental, and enduring change. They employ four main categories of change for their framework: paradigmatic change, mission and purpose change, cultural change, and change in functional processes. Paradigmatic change refers to alteration to the assumptions of those who are stakeholders and influencers of the organization. This change also suggests that the organizational world-view has altered: that organizational members define their institution differently and regard their institutional context as altered over time. Mission and purpose refer to intentionality of organizational members and other stakeholders with respect to organizational actions and outcomes. Cultural changes refer to beliefs, norms, and values of organizational members. Functional processes include structures, management, technology, decision-making, and communication patterns. In this investigation, Levy and Merry's (1986) framework is applied to organizational change in university colleges that can be associated or connected with globalizing behaviors.
    Two of five university colleges in the province of British Columbia were examined as specific sites. Both institutions are given pseudonyms consistent with researcher and interviewees' understanding of maintaining anonymity. Other indicators of institutional identity, such as specific location, are concealed. Interview, documentary, and observational data from the two institutions -- East Shoreline University College and Rural Valley University College -- are presented and analyzed.


EAST SHORELINE UNIVERSITY COLLEGE
    Decision-making and deliberation as well as the day-to-day management of East Shoreline University College (ESUC) altered in the past decade, attributable in large part to government action to designate East Shoreline College as a university college and legislation that codified shared institutional governance -- a bi-cameral arrangement where a senate-type body of organizational employees and students deliberate over educational and educationally related issues, advising a college board of governors on some matters and conveying their decisions to the board on other matters. "The biggest change for ESUC has been changing to a university model," noted a college administrator. "Most of the college's energy is focused on the degree programs," stated another administrator, noting as well that there was a "dramatic evolution from college to university college." Alterations to governance structures and processes at ESUC granted faculty greater decision-making authority and lessened the power of both administrators and the governing board in directing the college.
    Furthermore, in addition to legislation on governance, the provincial government and its department responsible for colleges were parties to two other major developments in the latter half of the 1990s: provincial-wide collective bargaining and a system-wide strategic plan for the colleges. These two initiatives not only coordinated college actions and decision-making in a number of areas, such as the use of electronic technology in instruction and faculty compensation, but also reduced institutional autonomy. Single institutions depended upon all other similar institutions as a whole as well as upon government. Thus, these actions increased the role of government in the management of each college, including ESUC.
    East Shoreline University College expanded considerably in the 1990s, in student numbers, in programs, and in revenues and expenditures; at the same time, government funding did not keep pace with growth. Thus, in order to support and maintain growth the college enlarged its resource generating behaviors, focusing upon international markets as well as local markets. Although there was less government funding relative to institutional expenditures over a ten-year period, there was increased government influence and control over college behaviors and actions. Government funding behaviors included productivity incentives and targeted funding for specific programs. Government intervention in the collective bargaining relationship between faculty and the college was evident in the establishment of a provincial-wide bargaining structure. Government legislative action changed the composition of all colleges' governing board and established a formal provincial body (Educational Council) to share governance with the institutional governing board and administration. These interventions had considerable influence over college actions and in the development of college structures and processes. Moreover, government permissive legislation for baccalaureate degree programs at ESUC affected not only growth but also academic culture and institutional purpose.
    These actions, including government policy, government funding behaviors, greater institutional alignment to both international and local markets, and growth itself aided in increasing globalization of ESUC (See Table 1). For example, commodification of higher education can be seen in the exportation and selling of both training and education in Asia, South America, and Europe: this exchange of goods and services for revenues was intended to support institutional growth. Internally, the college emphasized productivity and efficiency, with larger class sizes, fewer administrators, and more reliance upon electronic technology for work: actions intended to cope with budget shortfalls. The college also turned toward workforce training, not so much in providing vocational programs to students, but in providing skills and job-specific training to employers for their workforce and by providing job skills in baccalaureate degree programs. Additionally, privatization grew, with for example the establishment of an international, private secondary school, under the jurisdiction of the college, drawing resources from private citizens in Asia, particularly Japan. In this environment, the college created "winners" and "losers," imitating global economic behaviors. At ESUC, degree programs were viewed as productive and were in high demand; traditional vocational programs -- the trades, or vocational programs -- lost their once prominent position and faltered both in acquiring resources and in demand. College structural change was continual, with re-structuring as a consequence of the establishment of baccalaureate degree programs.
    Strategy at East Shoreline University College was a continual response to changing external conditions, including government policy, government funding behaviors, the local demands for education and training, and to a lesser extent to changing global economies (See Table 2). But strategy also included responding to internal demands for change, most particularly and recently for alteration of college purposes and of identity to a university. Fiscal behaviors were predominant, especially in the latter half of the 1990s, as college members deliberated over actions dependent upon funding and resources. The college management actively pursued funding sources outside of the traditional government operating grants, and the president of the college devoted considerable time and energy to fund raising and to the acquisition of international contracts in concert with other college officials, including faculty. Strategy was not solely about survival, but was motivated by the desire to grow and to change, that is adapt to external requirements such as changing student and workplace needs.
    There were numerous strategies at East Shoreline University College, with some complementary to and others conflicting with organizational behaviors. For example, financial strategies complemented academic growth, but economic concerns superseded educational values. Organizational members expressed both a condition of fatigue over their numerous activities and confusion about institutional direction. The overriding strategy was to take advantage of government legislation that designated East Shoreline College as a university college. "It was unfortunate that participatory governance was introduced at the same time the college was turning to university status," noted a faculty member. "Degree programs are cutting back on introductory courses," noted an adult basic education instructor. "The government transformed the colleges by creating the university college and this led to more work," observed a nursing instructor. While academic faculty, and particularly those in baccalaureate degree programs, worked toward the development of a more prominent academic institution, with increased professional authority and a university culture, vocational and collegiate or nondegree program faculty worked toward program and job survival. Educational services to students at the lower end of the educational hierarchy were jeopardized by the increasing emphasis on higher learning, that is baccalaureate degree programs. Administrative leadership strategies involved actions directed to growth, productivity, and labor-management stability. These strategies translated into administrative work in securing resources, in managing budgets with both art as well as craft, and in intense political lobbying, internally with organizational members and externally with government officials.
    The comprehensive nature of the college curriculum, from college preparation to trades training to baccalaureate degrees, resulted in a student body that was diverse in both interests and abilities. Thus, institutional strategies directed toward student interests and needs were diffuse. Strategies for students occurred at the unit or program level, not at the institutional level. For example, the Forestry Technology program altered curriculum and instruction to adapt to a changing workplace and to increase student opportunity for employability. The Nursing program dramatically changed its curriculum so that graduates could adapt to the changing health care environment of the province. These unit or program strategies were not always compatible or consistent with larger institutional strategies, but because the college operated as a collection of relatively autonomous work areas, the inconsistencies were not regarded as problems.
    The overall institutional strategy of responsiveness to environmental opportunities, such as new institutional status as a university college, was consistent with organizational functions of growth and survival (Mintzberg, 1983). Nonetheless, in choosing these strategies, East Shoreline University College experienced several critical internal conflicts, such as the "schism between university and vocational programs" (Adult basic education faculty) and emphasis on "training for slots rather than education" (Science faculty), all suggestive of "a major cultural change" (Administrator).


RURAL VALLEY UNIVERSITY COLLEGE
    Rural Valley University College (RVUC) experienced considerable growth in the last decade, nearly doubling its full-time equivalency (FTE) student numbers to approximately 3800 FTE by 1996/97. Institutional growth was precipitated by two major factors: local population growth and the establishment of a limited number of baccalaureate degree programs at the institution. These factors resulted in significant alterations in various areas, such as resources and facilities, personnel, curriculum, and governance. The college's budget, for example, expanded 200% over the period of 1990/91 to 1995/96, a 40% per year growth. In the 1990s, the college hired approximately 100 full-time faculty. In addition, major facility expansion and dramatic curricular change, the development and offering of four-year degree programs in the Arts and Social Sciences, in career-oriented areas such as Nursing, and in selected Science areas, altered both institutional mission and internal relationships. For one faculty member, the increase in size meant that long-time colleagues were no longer "physically crossing paths;" for other faculty, the historically close connection to the local community gave way to preoccupation with internal processes such as governance, co-ordination of work, labor relations, and, not least of all, academic professionalism which included program and professional development. Finally, the development of baccalaureate programs led to reform in institutional governance.
    While maintaining many of their former processes and behaviors of decision-making, college personnel continued to adjust to the new governance structures and processes. One identified change was that the individual units, or disciplines, were more independent than in the past, likely the consequence of new faculty with doctoral degrees and experience largely in university environments. The institution was "moving out of an older model," according to an English instructor, whether that model was conceived of as a labor-management model, a collegial model of a small institution, or a traditional community college model that values a "practitioner's culture" (McGrath & Spear, 1991) rather than professional expertise and focuses upon student personal and social development instead of cognitive and intellectual development.
    Organizational culture altered to accommodate two distinct institutions, a community college and a university. Described characterizations of Rural Valley University College suggested that there were at least two institutions -- a community college and a university. "RVUC is both a university and a community college," asserted a college dean. "The mission has changed its focus to upper-level," observed a vocational instructor. This alteration was both foundational as well as stressful. "We have a new identity," asserted a union official. The college's president stated, "we are moving toward a university model." "There is a problem of equilibrium between the community college and the university college," noted a social science department head. "We question whether we have gone in too many directions," observed a humanities faculty member and union official.
    Four dominant behaviors signal the impact of global forces upon Rural Valley University College (RVUC). These included education and training, governance, financing, and labor-relations (See Table 3). All of these behaviors emanate from the provincial government and its departments or agencies. To improve the economy, buffeted by international markets and economies, government policy supported and indeed promoted workforce training, higher-level educational attainment, and higher-level participation rates, not least to reduce the high provincial unemployment figures. The province "faces a change in interfacing with the world," noted the president of RVUC. Government expended millions of additional dollars in the early 1990s to support the evolution of university colleges. Outcomes of the development of university colleges in the province, and this was the case for RVUC, included massive growth in student numbers, faculty, and facilities. An unintended outcome was major growth in fields not traditionally connected to employment or job training -- the liberal arts. Accompanying this growth was increasing academic professionalism and provincially coordinated faculty union power. In the mid-1990s, the government enacted legislation to alter governance structures at colleges so that faculty had not only voice in decision-making but also a partially shared role with administrators in managing the institution, as faculty were given plurality representation on an educational council, the preeminent academic decision-making body in the institution. Government intervention altered not only organizational functioning but also organizational culture as the institution rapidly adopted behaviors characteristic of a university.
    At Rural Valley University College, alterations from a two-year to a four-year institution led to reduced attention to the local community and greater attention, initially, to internal academic concerns and governance and management matters, such as scholarship, program credibility, and university status. It has also led to tensions among groups, as some areas prospered and others became impoverished and disillusioned, reproducing in microcosm the concept of "winners and losers" characteristic of economic globalization. Thus internal allocation of resources was a factor of institutional change, creating both "haves and have-nots." And, following the early 1990s efforts to establish university colleges, government funding altered both in its largesse and in its laissez-faire approach to oversight.
    Beginning in the mid-1990s, government-funding behaviors were more restrictive and controlling. However, there was less public sector funding from the provincial government relative to institutional growth. As a share of revenue, provincial grants fell from 72% of total revenues to 69%, whereas tuition fees rose from 15% to 21% of total revenues. This shift suggests that public sector spending reductions meant increased private consumer spending, a clear example of the privatization of public education. Furthermore, and probably most significant, government began to fund by applying competitive measures -- whether outcomes measures of institutional productivity or input measures for lowest cost -- in order to control college institutional behaviors and actions. Thus, Rural Valley University College as an evolving, developing, and growing institution in the early 1990s was required to accept and abide by government policy if maintenance of growth was to be preserved in the latter part of the 1990s. Government policy included furthering privatization of college services and increasing productivity.
    Institutional responses to government actions were also influential in organizational change. On the one hand, Rural Valley University College exhibited increasing characteristics of a business: homogenizing and commodifying its educational and training products so that these would appeal to business and government agencies. Thus market behaviors were ascendant. On the other hand, university college status and baccalaureate programming for the college led to growth, expansion of mission, and the elaboration of structure, as the institution became a larger and more complex place.


There is growing centralization; structural change is underway. (College president)
Deans are now seen as managers and faculty are seen as experts. (Economics faculty member)
As a result of new university college status, departments are more independent... There is more administration at the department level and [the] role of department heads has expanded. (Union official)
There is a trend toward inter-disciplinarity. (Social Science department head)
    For some, the new mission and function resulted in a substantially altered relationship between the college and its community.


There are divisions within the college, tensions between the university college and local needs. (Health sciences department head)
    In resolving the tensions among its community orientation, its local focus, and its more cosmopolitan and professional orientation, Rural Valley University College moved toward a university model, in spite of dissension from numerous organizational members who were devoted to serving their local communities and all educational and social levels of those communities.


We have shifted from a community college to [a] degree granting [institution]: this still affects the old guard who has old expectations. (English department head)
    Strategy at Rural Valley University College contained contradictory ideas: develop into a four-year degree granting institution while maintaining the purposes of a community college. Furthermore, there was considerable intent and effort to acquire resources for sustaining growth and development (See Table 4). The effects of implementation of these strategies produced impediments. The tensions inherent in developing four-year degree granting institutions and simultaneously maintaining a community college have been discussed above. The strategy to secure additional resources is discussed below.
    The pursuit and acquisition of resources by college members were responses both to perceived government deterioration in funding and to government policy and funding incentives for institutions so they would rely less upon government and more upon the private sector. One notable contradiction here was that government "froze" tuition fees for a three-year period, nullifying the student as a source of non-government funding. Rural Valley University College expanded its contract services activities, its international education behaviors which until 1997 led to increasing student numbers, and its partnerships with school districts and civic government in order to acquire more resources. But, these actions served largely to off-set not supplement provincial government funding grants, and by 1996/97, the college found itself with less revenue than in 1995/96, although it had about $4 million more than in 1993/94. Because government moved base grant funding money to competitive one time funding, the college could not rely upon either competitive funding for more than a year or upon "earned revenues" from contracts as on-going sources of funds. Thus, the acquisition of non-base funding was not compatible with the functioning of an educational enterprise, especially one that offered four-year degree programs, because the educational behaviors required a stable context over an extended time period, and the sources to support those endeavors were transitory and unstable.


AGENTS OF GLOBALIZATION
    The evolution of baccalaureate programs in university colleges blossomed most in the Liberal Arts, yet the government's priorities were jobs and workforce training, with education as a means to decrease unemployment and improve the economy to stimulate government revenues. The demand for and growth of liberal arts-oriented programming outstripped expectations. Although professional, work-related programs such as Nursing and Education were in demand, the Bachelor of Arts degree was the most numerous credential attained. Of 1,283 baccalaureate degrees granted in 1999 at the five university colleges in British Columbia, 402 or 31% were Bachelor of Arts degrees (University Colleges of British Columbia, 2000).
    While government policy in the late 1980s and early 1990s, under two separate governing parties, was favorable to baccalaureate programming at community colleges, government policy in the mid and late 1990s emphasized institutional productivity and workplace skills in education, as well as closer institutional-private sector relationships and ventures. In responding to a faltering economy, the provincial government applied neo-liberal approaches to funding the public sector. Some college programs as a result faced elimination or reduction; there was a provincial moratorium on facility construction; and base funding was reduced with additional funds available on a competitive basis, with criteria set by government. As noted previously, in order that colleges did not seek additional revenues from students to fund expansion, the government placed a "freeze" on tuition fees. Finally, labor relations moved in the 1990s from the local level to the provincial level, requiring a system-wide approach to both personnel relations and to labor. This pattern suggests as well that an industrial model of state control over production in education and training evolved in the province so that the government had more control over the economy.
    The provincial government served as an intermediary force, buffering the college from direct confrontation with global forces of change and translating those forces to its own political agenda. This political agenda contained several social goals, such as increasing access to postsecondary education and training, and several economic goals, such as reducing the burden on government for postsecondary system expansion. These goals were not necessarily compatible, or at least they provided tensions and conflicts to those institutions that were coping with these goals. Conditions at both Rural Valley University College and East Shoreline University College demonstrate some of the tensions operating in institutions with the presence of globalizing behaviors, such as greater government involvement in college operations coupled with government policies that promote reduced institutional dependence upon government for fiscal resources.
    Government was not the sole agent of globalization in the colleges of British Columbia. Administrators and faculty furthered the globalizing process by their actions to establish and develop their institutions as university colleges, including the provision of baccalaureate degrees, the elaboration of structures, and the advancing of professionalism. Students, too, served as agents of change by enrolling in increasing numbers in these institutions and particularly by their program choices: programs that were credentialed at the baccalaureate level. The communities, too, primarily in the form of organized bodies such as the Chamber of Commerce, local hospitals, and school districts, promoted the new status of university colleges and supported college efforts to implement new baccalaureate degree programs. These efforts shifted the focus of community colleges, now university colleges, to the economic marketplace and toward the preparation of a globally competitive workforce.
    Neither the relative autonomy of the state (Dougherty, 1994) nor the independence of institutional officials (Brint & Karabel, 1989) is a sufficient explanation for organizational change and the transformation of community colleges to university colleges. Government officials and politicians responded to economic globalization as well as to public pressure for advanced degree opportunities. Governing boards, administrators, and faculty responded to government policy and incentives as well as to their own aspirations and their communities' perceived needs. The baccalaureate degree serves several functions: it is an internationally recognized credential, raising the profile and the prestige of public colleges in British Columbia; it signifies advanced education at a level appropriate for a knowledge-based economy (Reich, 1991); and it serves as an efficient way for providing increased access to postsecondary education. Combining both traditional liberal arts curricula (such as English literature, Psychology, and Biology) and professional programs (such as Nursing and Education), university colleges also maintain a comprehensive community college curriculum: they have expanded their mission and their growth in students, in employees, and in resources has continued unabated since their inception.
    In spite of the growth of university colleges, the development of a hybrid institution, merging a functioning community college with the concept of a university or four-year college, suggests clashes with differing expectations and value systems. For example, while the community college promotes egalitarianism, the university champions expertise; and while the community college's mission is expansive and multi-faceted, the university's traditional mission is three fold: teaching, research, and service. The dual mission that has emerged within university colleges is indeed the nexus of competing value systems and these have their correspondence in the globalization debate. Whether the issue is the preservation of a way of life, for example forestry and fisheries, or the preservation of species and vegetation, economic globalization both quickens the pace of change and heightens resistance to change. Community colleges continue to be viewed by governments, organizational members, and the public as serving the needs of the state and their communities, thus the pressure to provide education and training to develop a competitive workforce and to enhance students' marketability will mount. Baccalaureate degree granting status for community colleges was a momentous turning point in the evolution of an institution.
ADDED MATERIAL
    JOHN S. LEVIN
    North Carolina State University
    Figure 1 Globalization Behaviours


Category                                     Abbreviation Code
internationalization                            [I]
multiculturalism                               [MC]
commodification                               [COM]
homogenization                                [HOM]
marketization                                 [MRK]
workforce training                             [WT]
restructuring                                   [R]
labor alterations                              [LA]
productivity and efficiency                   [P/E]
electronic communication and information       [ET]
state intervention                             [SI]
    Table 1 Globalization -- East Shoreline University College


Themes                          Behaviours
Internationalization            * curricular and program emphasis on
                                  international topics
                                * development and establishment of
                                  international secondary school
                                * foreign sites for faculty development and
                                  student work placements
                                * loss of revenues ($500,000) in 1997/98 as a
                                  result of Asian economic downturn
                                * contract training projects in Asia
Commodification                 * college responds to provincial government
                                  policy in having education move closer to
                                  business
                                * training and education sold to Asian, South
                                  American, and European countries
                                * college expends energy and resources in
                                  marketing both the college and education,
                                  locally and internationally
Homogenization                  * measurable outcomes of organizational actions
                                  emphasized
Marketization                   * revenues help to support college growth
                                * president interacts with private sector in search
                                  of revenues for college
                                * competitive environment internally for
                                  resources
Workforce training              * shift in emphasis to "life-long learning"
                                * development of applied degrees
                                * emphasis upon job preparation in Sciences
                                * increasing attention to skills development for
                                  workplace readiness
                                * enrollments in traditional work force training
                                  areas diminish
Restructuring                   * major structural change with baccalaureate
                                  degrees (e.g., new programs, new personnel,
                                  new governance, new funding)
Labor alterations               * alteration in academic faculty workload
                                  negotiated to permit scholarship and reduce
                                  classroom teaching
                                * new delivery approaches (e.g., on-line
                                  instruction) increase faculty workload
                                * governance structures and processes lessen
                                  managerial control over labor
Productivity and efficiency     * increases of class sizes to accommodate
                                  growth without increasing costs
                                * college uses key performance indicators
                                  (efficiency measures) for decisions about
                                  reductions
Electronic technology           * administrative systems increasingly automated
                                * experimentation with on-line courses
                                * health sciences and business programs attempt
                                  to respond to increasing use of computers in
                                  clinical settings and in workplace
State intervention              * legislated the establishment of university
                                  colleges as baccalaureate degree granting
                                * legislated shared governance
                                * instituted a three-year tuition freeze
                                * altered funding policy to more specific
                                  targeted funding
                                * used outcomes measures for decisions and
                                  funding allocations
    Table 2 Strategy -- East Shoreline University College


Description                          Intended Outcomes
Enlarge academic program area        Accomodate more students; satisfy internal
by developing and establishing       and external demands for degree programs;
baccalaureate degree programs.       achieve university status.
Cope with growth and govern-         Generate revenues to support growth in
ment funding inadequacies by         education and training areas of college.
increasing contract training and
international student revenues.
Promote college services and         Respond to local demand; attract inter-
programs locally and inter-          national students for revenue.
nationally.
Emphasize committee structure        Model university behaviours to achieve
for decision-making.                 university status; shift balance of internal
                                     influence away from administrators and
                                     toward faculty; cope with new issues arising
                                     from the establishment of baccalaureate
                                     programs (e.g., research ethics, greater
                                     expertise for decision-making).
Emphasize role of president as       Raise money; improve profile of the
fund raiser and college program      institution locally and internationally.
and service promoter.
Accomodate growth through            Provide space especially for new degree
major building projects.             programs and for vocational programs.
Increase electronic technology       Increase productivity; experiment with
use and purchase of equipment        alternate delivery systems (e.g., distance
for both administrative work         education); serve more students; upgrade
and instruction.                     faculty skills; improve administrative
                                     operations.
Emphasize international              Gain revenues; develop opportunities for
activities and services.             faculty and students for professional and
                                     educational growth.
Change structures, including         Adapt to fiscal conditions; seek opportunities
department and unit alignments.      to expand, to acquire resources, to achieve
                                     greater efficiencies; respond to changing
                                     personnel needs; adapt to administrative
                                     personnel retirements and resignations.
    Table 3 Globalization -- Rural Valley University College


Themes                          Behaviours
Internationalization            * increasing international student numbers over
                                  the decade until 1997/98
                                * 175 students in 1996/97 generated $2 million
                                  revenue, up by $500,000 over 1995/96
                                * loss of students in 1997/98, over 10%   during
                                  Asian economic turndown
                                * 1995/96, associate degree program in inter-
                                  national studies, for students looking for
                                  careers in business, journalism, government
Commodification                 * consumer demand for choice and service:
                                  "students demand flexibility and access"
                                * college becoming more entrepreneurial and
                                  fiscally aggressive, more like a business
Homogenization                  * enrollment growth rewarded with government
                                  funding; decline or stagnation is punished
                                * centralized bargaining standardizes relation-
                                  ships at the local level, reducing autonomy in
                                  labor relations
Marketization                   * use of international education as revenue
                                  generator
                                * use of continuing education as revenue
                                  generator
                                * serve local business and industry through
                                  contract training in order to generate revenues
Workforce training              * new institutionally-based training program
                                  captures former welfare-to-work clientele
                                * emphasis on new skills in health sciences, with
                                  changing role of nursing, from hospital to
                                  community
                                * programs seek competitive edge through
                                  applied experiences in Liberal Arts
Restructuring                   * loss of jobs of seven full-time and part-time
                                  faculty as a result of downsizing
                                * elimination of position of Dean of Education
                                  Support and integration of units within that
                                  area with other areas
                                * growth in Liberal Arts area led to separation of
                                  Social Sciences and Humanities -- now more
                                  "autonomous"
Labor alterations               * faculty duties include more counseling and
                                  assessment of students
                                * no layoff clause negotiated to protect faculty
                                  job security concerns (1994-97 contract)
                                * role and responsibilities of departmental
                                  chairs in spotlight because of devolution of
                                  work from senior administrators
                                * loss of faculty in program areas because of
                                  low enrolments
Productivity and efficiency     * government strategic plan "wants faculty to
                                  work harder" and "produce more students"
                                * non-credit courses that are not cost-recovery
                                  are "axed"
                                * government restricts funding and pressures
                                  college to seek partnerships with private sector
                                  and to increases efficiencies
                                * college drops programs (e.g., office careers)
                                  and merges departments
                                * pressure on faculty "to have maximum
                                  numbers of students"
Electronic technology           * internal debates about the use of technology,
                                  especially computer instruction
                                * 1994-97 collective agreement item on new
                                  modes or models of instruction and techno-
                                  logical change; interactive distance education
                                  classes with other colleges
                                * 1,000 new computers on campus
                                * new management system implementation of
                                  software system (Banner) for financial, student
                                  and human resources management
                                * computers and electronic technology in
                                  instruction, e.g., physics
State intervention              * legislation in mid-1990s to alter mission and
                                  purpose of college
                                * government agreement with provincial faculty
                                  association to embark upon system-wide
                                  collective bargaining
                                * development and implementation of
                                  provincial strategic plan
                                * governnment introduction of performance
                                  indicators
                                * government introduction of new funding
                                  policy targeted and competitive funding
    Table 4 Strategy -- Rural Valley University College


Description                            Intended Outcomes
Develop and offer four-year            Serve more students, grow, provide
degree programs in the Arts and        alternatives to university education in the
Sciences and occupational fields.      local community.
Maintain comprehensiveness             Maintain community college identity while
in curriculum that maintains           developing into a four-year degree granting
the mission of the community           institution; continue to serve all segments of
college.                               the community.
Become more "entrepreneurial,"     Finance growth; decrease dependency upon
more aggressive externally with        government funding.
the generation of funds.
Improve and document institu-          Increase productivity; help employees
tional outcomes, including             adjust to change; improve institutional
services, employee socialization,      climate and maintain healthy labor relations.
employee participation in
decision-making.
FOOTNOTE


REFERENCES
    Barnet, R., & Cavanagh, J. (1994). Global dreams: Imperial corporations and the new world order. New York, NY: Simon & Schuster.
    Berg, B. (1995). Qualitative research methods for the social sciences. Boston, MA: Allyn and Bacon.
    Brint, S., & Karabel, J. (1989). The diverted dream: Community colleges and the promise of educational opportunity in America, 1900-1985. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
    Burgess, R. (1984). In the field: An introduction to field research. London, UK: George Allen and Unwin.
    Castells, M. (1996). The rise of the network society. Cambridge, MA: Blackwell
    Ciceri, R. (1998). Letter to Richard Johnston, President, East Shoreline University College, February 3.
    Dennison, J.D. (1992). The university-college idea: A critical analysis. The Canadian Journal of Higher Education, 22(1), 109-124.
    Dennison, J. D. (1995). Challenge and opportunity. Vancouver, BC: The University of British Columbia Press.
    Dennison, J.D., & Gallagher, P. (1986). Canada's community colleges. Vancouver, BC: The University of British Columbia Press.
    Dennison, J.D., & Levin, J.S. (1988a). Canada's community colleges in the nineteen eighties: Renewal and responsiveness. Toronto, ON: Association of Canadian Community Colleges.
    Dennison, J.D. & Levin, J.S. (1988b). Goals of community colleges in Canada: A 1987 perspective. The Canadian Journal of Higher Education, 28(1), 49-63.
    Dougherty, K. (1994). The contradictory college. Albany, NY: State University of New York.
    Dudley, J. (1998). Globalization and education policy in Australia. In J. Currie & J. Newson (Eds.), Universities and globalization, (pp. 21-43). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
    Gallagher, R. (1999). A vanishing vision -- part II? A discussion paper (draft). January.
    Held, D., McGrew, A., Goldblatt, D., & Perraton, J. (1999). Global transformations: Politics, economics and culture. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
    Knowles, J. (1995). A matter of survival: Emerging entrepreneurship in community colleges in Canada. In J. Dennison (Ed.), Challenge and opportunity. (pp. 184-207). Vancouver, BC: The University of British Columbia Press.
    Levin, J. (1995). Power in the British Columbia community college. B.C. Studies, 107, Autumn, 60-80.
    Levin, J. (2001). Globalizing the community college: Strategies for change in the twenty-first century. New York. NY: Palgrave/St. Martin's Press.
    Levy, A., & Merry, U. (1986). Organizational transformation: Approaches, strategies, theories. New York, NY: Praeger.
    McGrath, D., & Spear, M. (1991). The academic crisis of the community college. Albany, NY: State University of New York Press.
    Mason, J. (1996). Qualitative researching. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
    Miles, M., & Huberman, A. (1994). Qualitative data analysis. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
    Mintzberg, H. (1983). Power in and around organizations. Englewood Cliffs; NJ: Prentice Hall.
    Perrin D. (2001). Toward regional comprehensive universities: Legislation for BC's university colleges. Draft #2, The University Colleges of British Columbia, April 27.
    Petch, H. (1998). Degree programs at the university colleges: A British Columbia success story. A report prepared by Howard Petch at the request of the presidents of the university colleges of British Columbia. Victoria, BC, July.
    Province of British Columbia, Ministry of Education, Skills and Training. (1996). Charting a new course: A strategic plan for the future of British Columbia's colleges. Victoria, BC
    Province of British Columbia, Ministry of Advanced Education. (1988). Access to advance education and job training in British Columbia. Report of the provincial access committee. Victoria, BC
    University colleges of British Columbia. (2000). 1999-2000 Annual Report.
    Report of the Provincial Access Committee. (1988). Access to Advanced Education and Job Training in British Columbia. Victoria, BC
    Reich, R. (1992). The work of nations. New York, NY: Vintage Books.
    Robertson, R. (1992). Globalization: Social theory and global culture. London, UK: Sage Publications.
    Schugurensky, D., & Higgins, K. (1996). From aid to trade: New trends in international education in Canada. In R. Raby & N. Tarrow (Eds.), Dimensions of the community college: International, intercultural and multicultural, (pp. 53-78). New York, NY: Garland Publishing.
    Schuetze, H., & Day, W. (2001). Postsecondary education in BC 1989-1998: The impact of policy and finance on access, participation, and outcomes. Center for Policy Studies in Higher Education and Training. University of British Columbia, March.
    Teeple, G. (1995). Globalization and the decline of social reform. New Jersey: Humanities Press.
    University College of Cape Breton. (2001). Web site, November.
    Yin, R. (1984). Case study research. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications.

使用道具 举报

Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16

声望
53
寄托币
31146
注册时间
2001-10-7
精华
284
帖子
171

Sagittarius射手座 荣誉版主

8
发表于 2004-4-1 23:37:37 |只看该作者

AUTHOR: FULONG WU

AUTHOR:  FULONG WU
TITLE:  Globalization, Place Promotion and Urban Development in Shanghai
SOURCE:  Journal of Urban Affairs 25 no1 55-78 2003

The magazine publisher is the copyright holder of this article and it is reproduced with permission. Further reproduction of this article in violation of the copyright is prohibited. To contact the publisher: http://www.elsevier.com/



ABSTRACT
Globalization, rather than being a definite outcome, is a political discourse embedded in a complicated process. The perception of the coming global era casts a shadow on economies that are under market transition. Shanghai, the largest city in China, provides a vivid case for understanding local responses to globalization. The city has seen unprecedented growth in foreign investment and foreign trade since the adoption of the open door policy in 1978. The key argument of this article is that the influence of globalization does not lie in the quantity of foreign investment but in the catalytic effect brought about by foreign investment and foreign trade.
    Globalization is not a single causal mechanism but a complex and even contradictory trend resulting from many causal processes (Jessop, 1999). Its rhetorical power lies in the illogical conceptualization of capital's capacity for jumping scales in a global world. The normative definition of local development (Ettlinger, 1999) would reject the assumptions that globalization is an objective and thus uncontrollable process, that the fate of the city is determined by its position in a global hierarchy, and that its social spatial structure is shaped by global forces. In political discourse, globalization is often deployed by those who justify a particular neo-liberal policy (Short & Kim, 1999). The neo-liberal discourse of globalization foresees the future of a borderless world, which is questionable and thus should be contested (Yeung, 1998). Globalization can comprise many processes, including economic, political, and cultural components (Short & Kim, 1999). Globalization also involves the spatial integration of economic activities, movement of capital, migration of people, emergence of information technologies, the formation of supra-national political organizations, and the spread of values and norms across the world (Marcuse & van Kempen, 2000). While claims of the placelessness of capital accumulation, hypermobility of capital, and demise of the nation state are often exaggerated, the process of globalization is real (Marcuse, 1997). Behind a glossy discourse is the decline in public power over economic activity, particularly at the local level (Marcuse, 1997). For example, Rydin (1998) discussed how intense competition between local authorities and local partnerships and the demise of regional strategic planning has forced the local state to play a subsidiary role and control few meaningful resources allowing it to exercise power. Whereas the impact of globalization is still unclear, especially regarding whether it creates a new spatial order (Marcuse & van Kempen, 2000), the transition of advanced capitalism in urban and regional governance is apparent (Harvey, 1989).
    Much of the transition in governance is summarized under the notion of urban entrepreneurialism (Harvey, 1989). Jessop (1998) portrayed this transition from a regime perspective as the change from the Keynesian Welfare National State (KWNS) to the Schumpeterian Workfare Postnational Regime (SWPR). Post-Keynesian urban management is characterized by the practice of civic boosterism to modify urban image (Short, Benton, Luce, & Walton, 1993) or place marketing or promotion (Hall & Hubbard, 1998). Cox and Mair (1991) suggest that the interests embedded in the local place form the basis of a localized social structure through which place promotion is conducted. One frequently identified interest lies in real estate, which is spatially fixed. The growth machine theory emphasizes the alliance of real estate developers and urban politicians to promote local economic development (Logan & Molotch, 1987). Other studies suggest strong mayoral leadership as a contributing factor (Clarke & Gaile, 1998). More recent geographic studies highlight the role of a single political leader such as the mayor of Barcelona in inventing the new discourse and image of the global city (McNeill, 2001). In a more general sense, institutional thickness, learning regions, and social networks are developed to describe the capacity of some cities to engage in collective action to promote their places (MacLeod & Goodwin, 1999). The tactics, as suggested by Short and Kim (1999), include packaging an attractive image. Two basic themes of image promotion have been used (Short & Kim, 1999). The first is the city of work, which is concerned with attracting business by representing the city as a place of low taxes, cheap and docile labor, and presenting the image of the city as a pro-business environment. The second theme is the city at play, which is an attempt to capitalize culture and thus attract capital from consumers and conventions.
    If globalization truly means the expansion of economic activities at a world scale, the best place to observe such a process would be at its frontier--the place where globalization engulfs the space under its reach. Pacific Asia would be such a location. In End of Millennium, Castells (1999) used globalization and the state to summarize development and crisis in the Asian Pacific. The growth of global cities in the Asian Pacific through mega-projects is the focus of research attention (Olds, 2001). While there is a growing literature of globalization and global cities in both developed and developing countries (Lo & Yeung, 1998), the exact impact of globalization on these cities has not been examined. To some researchers, globalization means both promise and peril (Yeung, 1999). China, as a latecomer in the wave of globalization, is involved in the global economy. The involvement will obviously be accelerated by China's recent membership into the World Trade Organization (WTO). The effects of the position of China on urban development are unclear, largely because China had closed linkages with the capitalist world market between 1949 and 1979 (Song & Timberlake, 1996). While not to deny the incredible and important variations exist between China and other Asian countries, China has begun to follow the successful development of Asian tiger economies in pursuing an export-oriented development strategy since the late 1980s. Increasingly urban patterns in China become similar to those found in other Asian cities. Song and Timberlake (1996) suggest that the consequence would be the emergence of many typical characteristics of peripheral urbanization such as informalization of the labor market, over-urbanization, and urban overcrowding. On the other hand, new features may emerge due to the integration of the global market. Dick and Rimmer (1998) suggest that the peculiarity of the Southeast Asian cities is no longer covered under the Third World City thesis and that it should not be used to exclude the application of the more general theme of urbanization. In particular, this article attempts to reveal new features of urban development such as the promotion of locality through market-friendly policy directives that have not been seen under state socialism.
    We began our exploration with Shanghai, the largest city in China. According to standards in the literature, Shanghai should not be considered a global city. The city rarely appears in the list of global cities such as New York, London, and Tokyo (Friedmann & Wolff, 1982; Friedmann, 1995; Sassen, 1991, 1994; Lo & Yeung, 1998; Marcuse & van Kempen, 2000). Marcuse and van Kempen (2000) explicitly spell out the distinction between a global city and a globalizing city. The former is often seen as a matured product, while the latter refers to a city under the influence of global forces. Most cities belong to the latter category. Marcuse and van Kempen (2000) emphasize,


We call it Globalizing Cities, not Global Cities, because we treat both cities that do and cities that do not make it into the global cities category, as most commentators define them. But we also like the title because we view globalization as a process, not a state, and a process that affects all cities in the world (p. xvii).
    Shanghai fits the criteria of a globalizing city. It is under the influence of global forces such as foreign direct investment and the discourse of globalization is embedded in local politics. This is best illustrated in the effort to recreate Shanghai as the dragonhead--a global city of China. Remaking Shanghai as a global city appeared as a formal objective in its urban development strategy in the past two years. Recently, discourse about Shanghai has begun to appear in sensational journalism, e.g., titles such as "Far Eastern Promise" (Fry, 2000), "The Shanghai Bubble" (Ramo, 1998), and "Field of Dreams" (Yatsko, 1996). In academic research, attention is now drawn to profound urban changes in the once largest economic center in China (Wu, 1999; Yeung & Sung, 1996).
    Despite its peripheral and frontier location, globalization has had a tremendous impact on Shanghai. The inflow of foreign capital is unprecedented (Figure 1). In 1996 the contract value of foreign investment was US $15.14 billion (a substantial increase from 1985) and realized foreign investment was US $7.51 billion. The number of foreign tourists visiting Shanghai increased from 0.24 million in 1978 to 1.43 million in 1996; and the total export value of foreign trade increased from US $2.89 billion in 1978 to US $13.24 billion in 1996 (Shanghai Statistical Bureau, 1998). A quick glance at the urban landscape suggests that the impact of globalization is tremendous and pervasive. Advertisements for the commercial goods of multinationals are quickly becoming the dominant symbols of modern Shanghai (Rose, 1997). In the Lujiazui Finance and Trade Zone, a new central business district of Shanghai, a new epoch of skyscrapers is beginning. The Shanghai World Financial Center is expected to be the world's tallest building. The city plan stipulated that central Lujiazui would become a landmark area as an international business base for global corporations expanding into the Chinese market.
    Does the story of Shanghai fit into a globalization discourse claiming that global forces are reshaping and determining the urban future? This article attempts to analyze urban development in Shanghai by focusing on the interaction between global and local forces. In the section that follows, two aspects of change, globalization and place promotion, will be discussed. A closer look at the changes in urban governance is provided in the next section followed by a more detailed analysis of investment structure. The implication of globalization is examined with regard to changing urban dynamics. In the conclusion I emphasize that urban development in transitional economies clearly demonstrates that global forces are conditioned by indigenous political economic change and that an integrated global-local perspective is needed for understanding urban changes.


GLOBALIZATION AND LOCAL DEVELOPMENT
    Globalization and local development are main themes of a fast growing literature (Amin & Thrift, 1994; Hall & Hubbard, 1998; Harvey, 1989; Jessop, 1999; Short & Kim, 1999). No one denies that urban development is still dependent upon local conditions despite increasing global influences. However, there are qualitative differences among: 1) local conditions as they appear in classical location theory, 2) the analysis of natural resources and assets, and 3) the local conditions as crafted by creative place promotion in response to real and perceived globalization. The literature of place promotion documents the trend of local development as the reengineering of the place (Ashworth & Voogd, 1990; Chevrant-Breton, 1997; Cochrane et al., 1996; Hall & Hubbard, 1998; Paddison, 1993; Short et al., 1993).
    In contrast, the primary attention of research into socialist/post-socialist cities has been on the political and economic reform of socialism (Andrusz, Harloe, & Szeleny, 1996). Focus on indigenous political economic change is understandable as the reform of socialism triggered the internal changes. However, system transformations such as deregulation, privatization, and price liberalization in the Eastern European countries have already set the preconditions for local urban restructuring to be shaped by forces of contemporary global capitalism (Sykora, 1994). Globalization is such a profound theme of change that individual countries are now connected and interdependent. Despite a growing literature on globalization and global cities, inadequate attention has been paid to transitional economies. The concept of the world city is almost exclusively derived from the cities at the top of the world urban hierarchy. But the implication of globalization for those at the bottom of the hierarchy should be considered.
    The complexity of how external forces influence local economies lies in the interaction between the global and the local. In the classic literature of global cities, the external forces of transnational corporations, global capital, and a new international division of labor are seen as the major determinants of urban growth (Friedmann & Wolff, 1982). Some recent studies have recognized the relative autonomy of local politics in the process of urban restructuring (Eade, 1997; Knox & Taylor, 1995; Machimura, 1998). This recognition of the local dimension in the process of globalization is more appropriate for the understanding of urban changes in transitional economies because these economies are still at the periphery of the world economy. The influence of globalization is catalytic in the sense that it helps to accelerate the transition to a market economy. The understanding of a global context requires another angle for looking at economic reforms: how the reforms established the conditions and channels for global forces to penetrate the local space.
    The significance of such a global-local perspective lies in a dialectical understanding of the interaction between the local state and foreign investors. Fainstein (1990) compared the global perspective and local autonomy perspective in explaining urban restructuring in advanced capitalist economies and suggested that there could be linkages between the two. The extent of local entrepreneurship depends on the amount of institutional decentralization that occurs in the context of the internationalization of economic competition. To attribute urban restructuring to either global or local forces is not appropriate. Global forces cannot play their role in the absence of local changes. Applying an integrated global-local perspective, Fainstein (1994) investigated the property boom of the 1980s and the bust of the 1990s in London and New York and discussed how public officials poured enormous resources into property-led development. Local states and cultures make their unique impacts on the way in which the built environment is transformed, and particular urban issues and sites have been reconditioned according to the historical relation to globalization processes (King, 1993). The change is spatially filtered through and affected by geography, policies of individual states, and shifts in capital. To an extreme extent, urban economies can be independent of the fortunes of their nations' economies (Church & Reid, 1996; Lever, 1997). Studies of urban development in the Asian Pacific illustrate the dynamic and complex relationship between different geographical scales (Olds, Dicken, Kelly, Kong, & Yeung, 1999).
    The glossy future of world cities and the necessity of participating in the world economy have been used by local governments to justify a proactive role in urban development. The peril behind a fast liberalization of regulatory control alone has been revealed recently by the Asian crisis (Bullard, Bello, & Malhotra, 1998). To what extent have increasing global forces led to the decline of public power over economic activity (Marcuse, 1997) in a transitional economy? This question has both theoretical and practical implications. Because of the diversity of transitional economies, it is unwise to generalize a single trajectory of the change of the global-local nexus. The history of socialist development and reform in each country is produced by multiple contingencies.


URBAN GOVERNANCE IN POST-REFORM CHINA
    Global and local forces in post-socialist China are complicated due to the fact that reform is a historical process. The local force of transformation has been released through the gradual relaxation of state control over a web of properties such as urban land. Bian and Logan (1996) highlight how the gradualism of incremental and partial economic reform formed a new hybrid or segmented economic system in which market coordination is blended with bureaucratic coordination. In turn, the localization process has created conditions for the global force to play a greater role. The management of urban land is a typical example (Dowall, 1994). Before land reform, urban land in China was administratively allocated but the actual development was mainly carried out through state development projects (Yeh & Wu, 1996). In the late 1980s, China began to adopt a leasehold system, following the Hong Kong model. According to the new system, urban land could be leased to developers or users through negotiation, tender, or public auction. However, most land was leased through negotiation, because the municipality, as the representative of the state in the new land use system, felt that it could extract the maximum benefit from negotiated land development. The result of this reform is the coexistence of leased and administrative land (Yeh & Wu, 1996). The establishment of the urban land-leasing system has introduced various actors (e.g., foreign investors, local governments and state-owned enterprises) into the game of urban development. Because of a web of de facto control and the competition among the central and local states, it is impossible to attribute the outcome to a single player. In essence, global and local forces are intertwined.
    The conomic reform has triggered profound political economic changes in China. There has been a significant shift of power from the central state to localities. However, decentralization of state power did not simply break from socialist ideology but stemmed from political economic necessities. The force behind this transition is a severe fiscal deficit and the failing state finances of the late 1970s. The state was unable to sustain the rate of investment through central planning. Due to the introduction of the fiscal contract system, localities have gained higher levels of autonomy. In fact, a closer look at the decision making process in pre-reform China would suggest that property rights (the right to derive economic benefits from the ownership of an asset) have been dispersed (Walder, 1992). The state work-units were the basic organizers of the socialist economy and undertook a comprehensive social and economic role (Walder, 1986; Whyte & Parish, 1984). In contrast, the role of the municipalities was more subsidiary due to the direct relationship between the state and the enterprises. Economic reform has further redistributed some property rights to local governments. The establishment of a city-based land management system has further strengthened the power of municipalities who have gained control over urban land through authorizing land leasing and granting planning permissions. The rising role of the local state (in both rural and urban areas) has been well documented (Oi, 1995).
    Localization initially was a response to indigenous changes. State-led industrialization achieved a rapid increase in industrial output at the expense of efficiency. State-owned enterprises lacked incentives to economize production. The expansion of production capacity was driven by capital construction investment. Because of the unconstrained demand for investment, the central budget finally ran into difficulty. The central government had to diversify the financial burden to localities but at the same time it had to transfer more power to localities for revenue generation and mobilization.
    Since the 1980s, the conjoined process of globalization, in particular in the form of foreign investment, has accelerated the momentum of localization. Through a series of reform and open-door policies, local governments were granted fiscal autonomy and the responsibility of managing state land. They began to represent the state in negotiating with overseas investors. Localities now have access to external resources to initiate investment projects. Foreign direct investment has not only brought about resources beyond socialist capital circulation but also highlighted the importance of urban space both as an investment asset and a local political arena.
    The implication of globalization to urban governance is that the latter is becoming increasingly ungovernable, e.g., there is a constant battle over the control of urban land. Urban space under socialism was developed through state development projects, which are subordinated to various levels of government. This style of development management led to a cellular, or self-contained, type of urban development. This characteristic is being strengthened in significant ways through the introduction of overseas investors. Walder (1992) pointed out that the property rights under socialism dispersed across governmental hierarchies. The management of urban land was reliant upon state production units. While the state held the nominal right of ownership, control of land was defined through actual occupancy or tenancy. As a legacy of fragmented urban management, foreign investors could directly approach actual landowners. Therefore, it has become increasingly difficult to monitor urban land use changes through formal planning procedures. Further decentralization is needed. In large cities such as Shanghai, Beijing, and Guangzhou power has been further decentralized to district governments. Since 1990 the district governments in Shanghai have gradually gained a whole array of administrative powers, including planning, financial management, maintenance of public works, regulation of foreign trade, and industrial and commercial administration (Wang & Li, 1997). In a sense, globalization does not create localities as new political entities but reinforces fragmentation by providing opportunities for these rights to be capitalized.
    The new form of urban governance is characterized by more decentralized, fragmented, ambiguous, and constantly redefined power relationships between various levels of government. The division of power between the municipal and lower levels such as district governments varies from city to city. With the involvement of state-owned firms, private developers, and overseas investors, the urban development process has become increasingly complicated. The outcome of this game-like process is, however, contingent upon the relative strength and weakness of participants and the local context in which development takes place. It is under this type of urban governance that development interests can often mobilize and maneuver local politics to gain an upper hand. By contrast, community interests are less mobilized due to the lack of local resources and representative mechanisms. Traditionally, residents were affiliated to state work-units through which their interests in development were represented. The state work-units' intermediate role in interest representation has been seriously undermined. This is due to two reasons. First, there are more actors in the development processes. Enterprises themselves no longer undertake housing construction. Instead, they buy commodity housing in the open market. Therefore, the interest of real estate developers also influences the location of households. Second, the use of urban land, infrastructure, and other resources needs to be negotiated with the city and district governments. For example, the right of development is now being transferred to the local planning authority that can in turn sell the right in a land market. This has led to competition for land use control, which has raised the importance of capital in urban development.


INVESTMENT IN URBAN DEVELOPMENT
    To understand the driving forces of urban change in transitional economies, it is vital to study investment and the circulation of capital. However, this is a difficult task because capital circulation is complicated by the coexistence of planned and market elements and the sensitivity of such issues as misused funds and gray incomes. For example, a large proportion of housing investment now comes from the self-raised funds of state work-units (Wang & Murie, 1996, 1999). In Shanghai, work units raised 86% of new investment capital for public housing construction in 1990, a sharp increase from 55% in 1980 (Zhou & Logan, 1996). As state-owned firms gained a high level of autonomy to decide the use of retained profits, they used production funds inappropriately in property markets. The short-term behavior is due in part to the fear that they might lose control of these funds in the future. The misuse of funds may be due to insider control, which means that the actual controller of the property (managers of state enterprises) makes decisions without regard to the interest of the property owner (the state). Evidence suggests that the operation of real estate as a sideline business is widespread (Zhu, 1999), although the exact method and the amount of capital transference from the circuit of production to the circuit of property development are largely unknown. Presumably, both legal and illegal channels may be involved.
    Similarly, land revenue is a sensitive issue. Some sources suggest that land-generated revenue can account for as much as 25 to 50% of local revenue in some cities (Zou, 1998). In Shanghai approximately US $1.8 billion was raised in 1990 (Chan, 1996), and land revenue could be as high as 100 billion Renminbi since 1992 (Peng, 1998). However, the land-related benefit is so sensitive that local governments tried to disguise the actual figure. As land revenue is shared between central and local governments, the latter invented various methods to escape taxation from central government, for example encouraging developers to make in-kind contributions to infrastructure development instead of capital payments. As a result, it is difficult to trace the movement of capital.
    While the income from land is not well documented, it is possible to get relatively accurate information about investments as these projects are registered with the government. There is no particular reason why the government should hide the amount of investment. The method to circumvent the problem is to analyze the structure of investment and the proportion of investment, e.g., the ratio of infrastructure investment to gross domestic product (GDP) and the ratio of housing investment to GDP. During the period from 1978 to 1996, these two ratios increased. The ratio of infrastructure investment to GDP increased from 0.02 in 1978 to 0.13 in 1996. This suggests that while Shanghai experienced rapid economic growth in this period, investment in infrastructure increased at an even faster pace. Similarly, the ratio of housing investment to GDP increased. Detailed analysis suggests that the change is not driven by private consumption power but rather through the involvement of state work-units in commodity housing consumption. In fact, the affordability of commodity housing for state workers is constrained by the decreasing wage relative to housing investment. The ratio of the total workforce wage to housing investment decreased from 12.36 to 1.14 during this period. The ratio of the total workforce wages to investment in fixed assets changed from 1.01 in 1978 to 0.25 in 1996. In comparison with the expansion of investment, these changes constrained the end-users' affordability in a pure market sense. Commodity housing produced in this period, was subsidized in one way or another by relaxed control over the use of collective funds, as many state-owned firms have become property investors and purchasers.
    With regard to the influence of global forces on the local economy, foreign investment and trade can be compared with the size of the economy including inputs and outputs. Investment in fixed assets and infrastructure can measure inputs, while the outputs can be measured by GDP. Investment in fixed assets is referred to as the amount of work done in the construction and purchase of fixed assets, each expressed in monetary terms (State Statistical Bureau, 1997). Three aspects of change can be examined. First, the temporal change can reveal the scale of growth to its baseline value. Using the year 1990 as a benchmark, Table 1 shows the growth of GDP, investment in fixed assets, infrastructure investment, foreign investment, and the total export value of foreign trade. The table suggests significant growth of investment in fixed assets, infrastructure, and foreign capital. The scale of GDP growth is smaller than that of investment growth, and the growth of foreign export in comparison with investment is even less significant.
    Second, the ratios between these economic values suggest their relative scale of change. Specifically, these include the ratio of foreign investment in fixed assets and the ratio of foreign investment to infrastructure investment. The interpretation of these ratios is not straightforward. For example, infrastructure expenditures may entail some foreign investments whereas total foreign investment does not occur only in infrastructure. The main purpose of the analysis is to contrast the foreign related elements with the total scale of economic activities. The exchange rate increased from 1.71 in 1981 to 8.29 in 1997 (State Statistics Bureau, 1998). This may create a problem as it could exaggerate the proportion of foreign investment. Table 2 presents these ratios (adjusted by the exchange rate) from 1985 to 1997. In general, the ratios increased, which reflects the significant increase in the initial period (1985 to 1989) and stabilization in the second phase of reform (1992 onwards). But after 1990 the ratio of foreign investment to investment in fixed assets decreased until 1996. Similarly, the ratio of foreign investment to infrastructure investment showed a pattern of rapid growth in the initial period, decreased in 1990 to 1991, and then increased to the peak in 1992 when real estate began to experience a boom.
    Third, the ratio of foreign investment to GDP and the total export value of foreign trade to GDP (when adjusted by the exchange rate) can reflect the proportion of foreign related activities to the local economy as a whole. Bearing in mind that Renminbi has been devaluated since 1981, this can mean that foreign-related activities are exaggerated during conversion. Table 3 shows these two ratios adjusted by the exchange rate. In 1997, at the comparable exchange rate, foreign investment was as much as 16% of GDP, and the total export value of foreign trade accounted for about 36% of GDP. Both have grown respectively from 1% and 23% of GDP in 1985. The growth of foreign investment was apparent after 1991, while the growth of export value is less obvious. Foreign investment firms contributed positively to the growth of trade (Chen, 1999). However, the official exchange rate is problematic because it tends to understate the purchasing power of the domestic currency (Lardy, 1992), and thus to overstate the significance of foreign investment and trade.
    From the above analysis, we can reach tentative conclusions about selected features of urban growth in Shanghai. Firstly, rapid urban development in Shanghai has been mainly driven by the significant expansion of several types of investment in the form of fixed assets. These investments entail both infrastructure investment and foreign investment. (including both foreign loans and foreign direct investment). Because of the relatively low intensity of domestic investment in the 1980s, foreign investment stimulated the expansion of total investment. The intensity of domestic investment dramatically increased after the central government decided to develop Shanghai into a strategic economic center (especially financial and trade) in China. In real terms, the size of foreign investment to GDP is about 16%. It is not known how much of the investment in fixed assets came from foreign capital, but the nation-wide figure shows that in 1997 foreign investment accounted for 10.6% of total investment in fixed assets (State Statistical Bureau, 1998).
    Second, while foreign investment is an important source of capital, rapid urban expansion, especially the real estate boom, was not wholly fueled by foreign capital. This percentage of foreign investment in total investment overstates the contribution of foreign investment because the official exchange rate undervalued Renminbi (if the currency is valued in purchase power). Evidence also suggests that the real estate boom in Shanghai is not purely fuelled by foreign capital, although the contribution of foreign capital to the performance of Shanghai's real estate market in the year 1992 to 1993 has been recognized (Jiang, Chen, & Issac, 1998). While nationally a tight macroeconomic policy was enforced, Shanghai still managed to increase investment in infrastructure and fixed assets. This peculiar situation is due to the strategic support Shanghai received from the central state and local governments' enthusiastic place promotion. Lardy (1998) attributed the real estate boom to excess lending to state enterprises or various development companies. The formation of building boom including the excess capacity in fixed assets, luxury villas and first-class office space has been stimulated by easily obtained bank loans (Lardy, 1998). The explanation is consistent with Ramo's (1998) observation. Both of them have drawn attention to the problematic financial system in China as an indigenous factor behind the boom.
    Third, the impact of foreign investment on urban development differs significantly in different regions. Foreign investment played a role in inducing regional urbanization in the Pearl River Delta (Sit & Yang, 1997), mainly through labor-intensive export processing industries. But in Shanghai the profile of investment is more internationally oriented and is concentrated in a few nodes of development zones such as Shanghai Pudong. However, Lardy (1996) cautiously reminds us that the quantity of foreign investment might be overstated. The preliminary evidence appears to confirm that foreign investment did not occupy a predominant position even taking into account all utilized foreign capital. In Shanghai, a large proportion of the foreign capital utilized in urban development is foreign direct investment in the real estate sector, amounting to US $1.05 billion in 1996 (Shanghai Statistical Bureau, 1998). Investment in the real estate sector stimulated the establishment of a land market. Therefore, the effect of foreign investment is less direct, in the sense of creating the new urban landscape as it does in south China. Here, the importance of Chinese domestic investment should be emphasized. In the next section, place promotion in Shanghai is examined to draw attention to the role of the central/local state in the process of globalization.


PLACE PROMOTION
    Globalization imposes a challenge to urban governance. Similar to cities in advanced market economies, Shanghai faces a shrinking centrally allocated budget, the growing inflow of foreign capital, and increasing levels of local economic autonomy. The influence of economic globalization can be physical (through the presence of multinationals and foreign capital) and perceived (in the sense of spreading a dominant discourse of entrepreneurial management). The municipal government of Shanghai has adopted a proactive role in urban development through place promotion. The promotion strategy includes a wide range of policies such as the designation of development zones (e.g., Economic and Technological Development Zones and Free Trade Zones), preferential treatment of investors, land-leasing instruments to facilitate land use changes, key infrastructure projects, and direct investment in urban development.


IMAGE ENHANCEMENT/ENTREPRENEURIAL DISCOURSE
    The Shanghai Municipal Government used various high-profile conferences, exhibitions and international planning consultants to promote a new image of Shanghai. In particular, the planning of the Lujiazui Finance and Trade Zone has attracted wide international media attention (Olds, 1997). The city also boasts its openness and favorable investment environment through symbolic urban landscapes. The 460-meter high TV tower (the Oriental Pearl), along the Huangpu River, presents the image of a booming city. Great efforts have been directed to improve urban landscapes. New streets have been designed. For example, Riverside Avenue was built recently for sightseeing and recreation. New parks, a concert hall, a theatre, a museum, and shopping malls are planned or are under construction. A cluster of skyscrapers is located in the Lujiazui business district. Shanghai also uses the Internet to display various new plans and promotional materials. International affairs such as Global Forum 99 and APEC 2001 provide a good opportunity for publicizing a booming city. In the promotion of Shanghai, a new discourse of the entrepreneurial city has been invented. The discourse portrays the efficiency of local government in dealing with investors and the overall investor-friendly environment. The discourse has important effects on the practices in development management. Government officials are urged to behave in a way that conforms to the international standard. The popularity of the global city has shaped Shanghai's policy direction towards more globally oriented activities, emphasizing economic competitiveness and the new image of global Shanghai. For example, in recent years, large green spaces have been planned with the aim of creating the impression of an ecological city. The projects created a movement of city beautification that competes for resources required to subsidize laid-off workers and improve poor housing conditions.


DESIGNATION OF DEVELOPMENT ZONES
    Shanghai was designated by the central government as one of 14 open coastal cities in 1984. Nevertheless, compared with those Special Economic Zones in southern China, Shanghai had not enjoyed similar preferential treatment in taxation, foreign trade, and fiscal autonomy until 1990. This is mainly due to Shanghai's strategic importance to the central government. The city contributed about one-sixth of the state's revenue. Therefore, caution has been exercised in the opening of Shanghai. Until 1990 Shanghai saw slower growth than southern China. In 1990, the State Council announced an entirely new development package. At the core of this package was the designation of the Pudong New Area that would enjoy an even higher degree of autonomy and preferential treatment, e.g., foreign banks are allowed to operate Renminbi business in Pudong.
    The development of Pudong means the construction of a brand new city in the east of Shanghai. The area covers 522 km[sup2] and is located to the southwest of the estuary of the Yangtse River and to the east of the Huangpu River, facing the Shanghai Bund on the other side. Its massive scale suggests the determination of the central government to remake Shanghai as a world city. The state has also designated various development zones in Shanghai. These include Shanghai Minhang Economic and Technological Development Zone (ETDZ), Hongqiao ETDZ, Shanghai Caohejing Hi-Tech Park, Lujiazui Finance and Trade Zone, Jingqiao Export Processing Zone, Waigaoqiao Free Trade Zone, Zhangjiang Hi-Tech Park, and Xinghuo Development Area. They offer preferential treatment to foreign investors according to the "Regulations on ETDZ in Shanghai" as well as additional development incentives offered by the state and Shanghai Municipal Government. The Waigaoqiao Free Trade Zone is an example of the successful attraction of foreign investment. Located in the Pudong New Area, Waigaoqiao has enjoyed an annual growth rate of over 20% in GDP since it was established in 1990. The zone reaped a 24% rise in GDP on an annual basis to RMB 6.3 billion (US $760.80 million) in 1998, with sales growing by 19.6% to RMB 44.97 billion (US $5.43 billion) and industrial output value climbing 43% to RMB 9.6 billion (US $1.16 billion). The zone handled $2.96 billion in foreign trade last year, with exports reaching US $1.5 billion. The zone now has more than 1,000 domestically funded enterprises and more than 2,400 overseas funded enterprises involving $4.44 billion in investment.


PREFERENTIAL TREATMENT TO INVESTORS
    To attract foreign investment, Shanghai has so far promulgated 74 regulations and preferential treatments for foreign investors. Preferential policies regarding taxation are made. For example, in the Pudong Area concessions are made to the income tax of foreign investors, custom duties, and tax for equipment, vehicles, and building materials related to foreign investment. Shanghai Municipal Government also specified a list of projects and investment areas that would receive priority support. For example, projects that can increase exports and gain a share in the world market are encouraged. The government also seeks foreign investors to set up ventures in the Waigaoqiao Free Trade Zone to deal with import and export trade, international entrepot, and services for international trade.
    Incentives for foreign investors are stipulated but there is more room for negotiation on a case-by-case basis. In development zones, foreign-invested manufacturing enterprises can enjoy a 15% reduction in income tax. Enterprises expected to operate for 10 years or more are exempt from tax in the first two profit-making years. In the following three years, the tax will be reduced by 50%. Imports of equipment, raw materials, and vehicles for offices and homes and future product exports are exempt from duties and taxes: In some development zones, further special treatment is given. For example, in the Songjiang Industrial Zone in a suburb of Shanghai, it is stipulated that for newly established foreign-invested enterprises, total investment over or equal to $10 million is exempt from tax for three years. The stipulation of preferential treatment, however, has two side effects. First, it induced domestic enterprises to seek cooperation with overseas investors or to register outside the border, especially in Hong Kong. This strategy was necessary in order to enjoy preferential treatment (Lardy, 1996). Second, a number of foreign enterprises reported deficits to take advantage of the tax exemption. Foreign investors are also encouraged to invest in the construction of infrastructure such as airports, ports, railways, roads, and power stations. Further tax relief is given to these projects. In Pudong, foreign banks are allowed to operate in Renminbi businesses and tertiary industries such as production services, finance, and international trade.


LAND LEASING INSTRUMENTS
    As a result of property reform, local municipal governments in China began to control state land through authorizing the lease of the right to use the land (Nan & Xiao, 1992). This allows local governments to use land-leasing instruments to promote urban development. Various promotional strategies are based on providing accessible land to private developers. In the acquisition of land for redevelopment, municipal governments facilitate the relocation of existing residents, coordinate development companies to conduct site clearance, and engage in infrastructure provision. Because the municipal land authority controls the land leasing process, it has a stake in the intensity of development. The role of landowner often contradicts the role of development regulator. Planning goals and the function of development control are often compromised by the need to generate land related incomes. The dilemma faced by the city governments is similar to the one under neo-liberal urban governance in later capitalism. The transition of the latter towards market-sensitive planning means a predominant consideration for revenue generation rather than relocation of wealth (Rydin, 1998; Short & Kim, 1999). This redefinition of the role of local governments has profoundly changed the framework in which various urban policies can be formulated.
    The use of land leasing instruments is a significant feature of urban promotional strategies in Chinese cities. In coastal cities such as Guangzhou, Shanghai, and Beijing and in Shenzhen Special Economic Zones, land leasing has increased since the further opening of the economy to the world market. The first piece of land in Shanghai was leased in 1988. From 1988 to 1991, 12 pieces of land were leased (9.8 million square miles). But since 1992, when Deng Xiaoping made a tour of southern China, the speed of land development has quickened. The major change in the land use system is from administrative acquisition to market allocation based on the leasehold market (Yeh & Wu, 1996). In 1992, 205 land parcels were leased (20.71 million square miles). In 1993, an additional 244 land parcels (49.33 million square miles) were leased to developers. The number of land parcels and the space leased in that year were as much as 1.20 and 1.67 times the total of the previous five years respectively. In 1994, 620 land parcels (19.20 million square miles) were leased, among which 452 parcels (15.94 million square miles) were leased to inward investors (Shanghai Statistical Bureau, 1995). Foreign investment represents the major demand for leased land. Since January 1, 1995, development projects of domestic commerce, tourism, recreation, finance, service, or commodity housing are required to get land through the market. The change allowed the local government to gain legal control over developed urban land.
    The use of land leasing instruments allows the government to induce urban land use changes according to its desired direction. The redevelopment of the Bund is such an example. In the pre-socialist era, the Bund was Shanghai's CBD. Many international banks were located in the area. After the communist stepped into power, the Bund was gradually converted into an area of governmental and administrative uses. The Shanghai Municipal Government attempted to redevelop the Bund into the CBD of Shanghai. The government promulgated a new regulation to control land use and set up a specific development company to relocate public offices and to redevelop the area for international insurance companies, commercial banks, and other international services companies. Among the list of prestigious buildings is the Shanghai and Hong Kong Bank Building, which was used for the Shanghai Municipal Government. Under the government's promotion, the Bund is being redeveloped into an area concentrated with financial institutions. Since 1992 the number of financial institutions has doubled to 2,700.


MAYORAL OFFICE AND DEVELOPMENT COORDINATION
    The emergence of new urban governance characterized by strong civic leadership and the establishment of effective local partnerships between public, private, and voluntary sectors has attracted wide research attention (Alden, Stephen, & Beigulenko, 1998). Shanghai presents an interesting case for observing this phenomenon. The new generation of Chinese leadership originated from or has connections with Shanghai. President Jiang Zemin and Premier Zhu Rongji are both Shanghai's former leaders. The mayor of Shanghai, Xu Kuangdi, has important contacts with new leadership in the central government. As a major political and economic center, Shanghai continues to occupy a strategic position in China's power structure. The connection of Shanghai mayors with the political elite in the central government continues to strengthen the city's status in the new phase of development. The central government is determined to develop the city as a financial and trading center of the Asian Pacific region. The pro-development tradition of city government and the pragmatism of Shanghai culture cultivated an open attitude towards international investors.
    In land acquisition, the mayoral office and various district government offices play an important role in site clearance. The regulation of land acquisition enables the local government to relocate residents according to a specified range of compensation. Residents affected by urban redevelopment are usually compensated but may not receive the market price. For key development projects, specific administrative offices are set up that are directly responsible to the mayor. The offices coordinate development and can by-pass the red tape through resorting to mayoral decisions. Such leadership is very effective in dealing with a complicated web of interests in land development. For example, in the key project, the Chengdu Elevation Road, the development office sped up the construction process by providing critical support to household relocation. The project aimed to ease northsouth traffic congestion by linking the Chengdu Road to the inner ring road system. The 8.45 km long project cut through four major urban districts (Huangpu, Jinan, Luwan, and Zhabei) and relocated about 180,000 households and thousands of state enterprises (Wang & Li, 1997). With the support of the development office and its branches in the four districts, the site was promptly cleared and the project was successfully completed within two years.


PUBLIC INVESTMENT IN INFRASTRUCTURE
    The role of city government has changed from direct control of municipal enterprises to the promotion of local growth through infrastructure provision. Infrastructure investment had been regarded as unproductive before economic reform. The purpose of central planning was to constrain wasteful investment and to concentrate limited capital on production. Investment in infrastructure was wasteful from the viewpoint of localities because the state-owned enterprises turned over the profit to their supervisory government departments. Local governments obtained investment through a centrally allocated budget and thus were unwilling to invest in infrastructure. Because the fiscal reform allowed local governments to retain the revenue collected from locally managed projects, the incentive for infrastructure investment has been greatly enhanced. The new mode of urban development means the city government takes a major responsibility for infrastructure provision. Investment in infrastructure not only generates land-related benefits but also expands the tax basis. Infrastructure investment in Shanghai jumped from RMB 0.446 billion in 1978 to 37.88 billion in 1996 (Shanghai Statistical Bureau, 1998). In the Eighth Five-Year Plan, 10 key infrastructure projects were proposed. Since then infrastructure investment has increased at an unprecedented pace. While it is difficult to trace the source of investment, it is evident that the premium from land leasing is important.


GLOBALIZATION AND CHANGING URBAN DYNAMICS
    While place promotion reflects the change in tactics of urban management, globalization changes the basic mechanism or dynamic of urban development. In this section I examine the profound changes in accumulation strategy and urban development.


STATE SOCIALISM: ECONOMIZING URBANIZATION AND THE PRODUCTIONIST CITY
    Under state socialism, economic development was equivalent to industrialization. To speed up industrialization, the state deliberately adopted a series of policies to constrain the cost of production factors such as labor, raw materials, and land. This was referred to as the strategy to economize the cost of urbanization (Chan, 1992). Through planned allocation of resources, reduction the prices of raw materials, free use of urban land, and low living standards, the state enabled manufacturing industries to accumulate capital and expand their production capacities. In other words, the relatively large production capacity was built upon the constrained cost of production factors. Because the costs of labor and raw materials were constrained, the economy had few incentives to update its composition of production factors and to change itself from a manufacturing to a service economy. The organization of the economy was mainly achieved through the administration system. The path to the post-industrial or service economy was blocked. The state effectively prevented the capital gained from manufacturing activities from being transferred into the built environment, or more precisely into unproductive urban infrastructure and housing development. As the economy pursued a particular style of growth, it was important to distinguish whether investment was directly relevant to industrial production or to the creation of infrastructure. Industrial cities like Shanghai both suffered and benefited from such a development strategy. The negative side of this strategy is that it delayed infrastructure investment and urban development; but the positive side is that Shanghai obtained cheap materials and a low labor cost. The profit derived from the biased socialist price system (the inflated price of industrial products and the depressed price of raw materials and agricultural products) was turned over to the central state. The central state then used the capital to expand new production capcity and to subsidize the production of raw materials and provide urban residents with low-price food and housing. The prevention of capital inflow into the sphere of consumption, especially the built environment, was the pillar of the socialist capital accumulation and its division of labor. The socialist accumulation dynamics meant that Shanghai relied on distorted prices of production factors. The division of labor between Shanghai and other Chinese cities was based on the planned mechanism. Hence, despite being a major national economic base, the city did not evolve into a post-industrial city because manufacturing activities were profitable and production services were meaningless.
    The redistributive policies both at a regional scale and between urban and rural areas were misread as the socialist ideology--the balance of regional economies, egalitarianism, and anti-urban development. In fact, behind these policies are the imperatives of socialist capital accumulation and its internal division of labor. Before the economic reform the state had successfully prevented limited capital from being wasted in unproductive areas such as infrastructure, services, housing, and other consumption areas. As part of a deliberate policy of preventing the sinking of capital in the built environment, the price of labor and urban space in Shanghai was maintained at levels almost as low as those in inner regions. Because consumer demand was constrained, the driving force of industrialization could not rely on mass consumption. Instead, it relied mainly on the expansion of heavy industries. As the rise of production costs was blocked, developed cities such as Shanghai lacked the drive to update their technologies. Because of the stable cost of labor, these cities did not experience industrial restructuring or the transfer of manufacturing activities to less developed areas. At the same time, the less developed areas were not able to survive only by the production of raw materials and thus had to rely on external fiscal subsidies.


SOCIALIST MARKET ECONOMY: GATEWAY TO THE GLOBAL ECONOMY AND FRONTIER OF GLOBALIZATION
    The economic reform adopted in 1978 was characterized by two key changes--the establishment of a socialist market economy and the opening of the door to the world. This suggests that external and internal factors are together responsible for socioeconomic changes. The role of the central state in direct resource allocation is diminishing, more or less due to indigenous reform. But globalization has introduced major changes into to the dynamics of capital accumulation. Developed along separated trajectories, production factors and capital accumulation in socialist and capitalist capital economies have been priced at different levels and according to different principles. This is particularly apparent in Shanghai--the frontier of a rigorously planned economy to encounter the world market. The connection between subsidized production factors and the production capacity is broken. To a lesser extent, it was argued in the late 1980s that coastal cities should rely on the planned mechanism for cheap inputs. A policy encouraging export-oriented development and the use of foreign capital and materials was proposed to emphasize the participation in grand international circulation (Fan, 1997). The policy produced an immediate impact on southern China, especially the Pearl River Delta where the combination of foreign investment (mainly from Hong Kong) and cheap labor has led to rapid growth in the export processing and manufacturing sectors (Lin, 1997). The emergence of manufacturing towns, the loss of agricultural land, the degradation of the environment (Yeh & Li, 1999), dispersed urbanization patterns (Sit & Yang, 1997), and the flooding of migrant workers into manufacturing sites are features of the urban dynamics driven by foreign investment. To a lesser extent, the growth of export-oriented activities means the confrontation of two different dynamics (foreign capital and migant workers). Both dynamics have origins outside the region (Eng, 1997) and are not directly related to socialist capital accumulation.
    Until 1990 Shanghai did not benefit from significant foreign investment until 1990 when the State Council designated Pudong as a new development zone. Shanghai's strong economic base, its strategic location in the Yangtse River Valley, a relatively better-trained labor force, and good infrastructure have attracted foreign investment from all over the world. Joint ventures in Shanghai are characterized by their multinational origins and high levels of technology. They are also characterized by complex administrative structures including the headquarters, representative offices, management offices, sales offices and service centers of firms that have manufacturing activities located in suburban Shanghai or neighboring provinces. Administrative complexities also entail the presence of operational offices of service and financial sector firms as well as manufacturing factories (Rose, 1997). To a certain extent, Shanghai's utilization of foreign investment reflects stronger international influences than in the Pearl River Delta. The under-priced production factors in Shanghai are attractive. For example, the government subsidies of food and housing enables low wages for workers. Moreover, investment in Shanghai represents more than the simple utilization of cheap labor. Shanghai as a major manufacturing center established a network of product distribution before foreign investment came to the city. This is reflected in its strategic location in the economic geography of the Yangtze River. It was perceived by developers as having the potential for office development, which consequently led to a rise in property prices.
    As a legacy of previous urban dynamics, the price of land is lower than it could be given the intensity of its use and the production capacity it sustains. This is a very attractive feature, which facilitates a huge potential for price increases. Developers can, therefore, capture under-developed and under-valued urban land and make a profit from land development. Since the mid-1990s, Shanghai experienced a period of real estate growth. The increasing cost of production factors has driven many state-owned enterprises, especially in the manufacturing sector, into a difficult situation. On one hand, they are facing competition from joint ventures; while on the other, state-owned enterprises still undertake many social responsibilities such as housing provision. The wide loss of state enterprises may indicate the end of socialist capital accumulation. In turn, the driving force of urban development has shifted from industrial surplus to property-led development.


GLOBAL AND LOCAL INTERACTION: MARKET SIGNAL AND SPECULATIVE INVESTMENT
    As mentioned earlier, Shanghai is the frontier where two different types of development mechanisms coexist. The previous mechanism will continue to affect urban development until the total collapse of subsidized industrialization. While foreign investment triggered the increase in land prices, this market signal induced domestic capital to flood into speculative land development. Because local government and various de facto landowners can benefit from land development, they have an enormous stake in promoting land development. The promotion of places through infrastructure investment is merely a less obvious stimulus to land speculation. The change in urban dynamics is reflected in increasing foreign direct investment in real estate. In 1996, over a quarter of foreign investment in Shanghai was in the real estate sector. The realized foreign direct investment in the real estate sector amounted to $1.053 billion. The government stipulated a range of preferential treatment for real estate investment, e.g., exemption from investment adjustment tax (a tax levied to adjust the investment direction to specified priorities). In 1997, the nationwide figure shows that the number of foreign-invested real estate companies increased to 1,200 and that the number of real estate companies invested from Hong Kong, Taiwan, and Macao was 3,800. These overseas real estate companies occupied about 20% of the total. In Shanghai, foreign invested real-estate firms accounted for RMB 15.67 billion in the total net value of RMB 55.4 billion (China Real Estate Market, 1996). The rise in property prices in 1993 and 1994 was significant and further induced industrial restructuring. State manufacturing industries are facing increases in production costs and competition from multinationals. The result is a transition from the socialist capital accumulation through constraining production costs to a new dynamic similar to that of a market economy. Inner city manufacturing industries are faced with relocation. The change of land use from the predominant manufacturing to tertiary industry occurred. This is consistent with the development strategy that promotes production services, finance, and trade rather than manufacturing activities.
    So far, there have been various types of hidden subsidies to labor cost such as highly subsidized provision of housing from state-owned enterprises. Some employees working in the private sector can rely on their family or partners for accommodation. Nevertheless, along with the diminishing role of welfare housing, more and more households have to purchase housing from real estate markets. The state-owned enterprises rapidly exhausted their funds available for housing investment. The high rate of housing investment in the 1990s, therefore, cannot be sustained. The rising cost of living will eventually be counted as a production cost and thus render some manufacturing activities no longer profitable. The process is very similar to what happened in advanced market economies but over a shorter cycle. Nevertheless, the price of high quality office accommodations in Shanghai is comparable to the most expensive in the world. Although many multinationals have opened branches and offices in Shanghai, the city is still at the bottom of the world urban hierarchy. Analysis has suggested that the rapid rise in property prices is a result of the combined forces of speculative investment and the promotional strategies of the government.


CONCLUSION
    From the detailed investigation of capital investment in Shanghai, it has been shown that the role of foreign investment does not lie in its contribution to capital formation per se but rather in its demonstrable effect on the profitability of using urban space as a commodity. Foreign investment led to the catalytic remodeling of the price system, which in turn induced a change in the accumulation strategy. The rapid urban growth and transformation of Shanghai is not a simple result of imposed globalization from the outside. This is not to deny the importance of the global force in directing local development. But rather, the effect of global forces is conditioned by and filtered through local structures. As a result, the impact of globalization on urban development is enlarged in some aspects and diminished in others. This suggests that there is no abstract globalization process that exists outside the political economy of place. Cities have been the nodes of realizing a particular accumulation strategy, in both developed and developing worlds. Therefore, their response to globalization varies as each attempts to maximize the benefits of globalization in its own manner according to the change in accumulation strategies. As a result, there is a great diversity among globalizing cities (Kim, Douglass, Choe, & Ho, 1997; Lo & Yeung, 1998; Marcuse & van Kempen, 2000; Yeung, 1998). In the Asian Pacific, under the umbrella of so-called development states, there are varying strategies and tactics to meet the challenge of globalization (Castells, 1999). For example, Douglass (1997) compared the different ways of accommodating multinationals in Taiwan, Hong Kong, and Singapore. The global imperative does not mean that local forces can only respond in one way. On the contrary, globalizing cities are actively promoted by their local agents, especially growth-oriented governments at both national and local levels. The production of new urban space through mega-urban projects is used as a strategy to anchor the economy to the world market (Olds, 1997). As a political discourse, globalization can be used symbolically or selectively in urban politics as clearly shown in the globalization of Tokyo (Machimura, 1998).
    It is not a new idea that local conditions determine the trajectory of urban development. Culture, for example, contributes to the distinctiveness of the cities in East Asia (Kim et al., 1997). The local factor of urban development is, of course, important. However, the dynamic interaction between the global and the local becomes apparent and is qualitatively different from the classical notion of local conditions that heavily emphasizes physical and static features. Localities can modify or even create new conditions to exploit the opportunities brought by globalization. In Shanghai as well as in many other Chinese cities, the grand picture of a global city is often employed as a symbolic function to legitimize a local promotional strategy. Shanghai is strategically restructured as a critical space to re-integrate China into the world economy. However, the story of Shanghai shows more complicated interactions between the global and the local. The simple logic of increasing mobility of capital, inter-city competition and place promotion as a local response cannot capture the complexity of urban development in Shanghai. The influence of globalization is built upon the political economy of place--the right to control land benefits and land revenue in the case of Shanghai. This vested interest in land forms a material condition of the new development strategy. It is undeniable that urban managers can somehow feel competition from other cities. But explaining urban development as solely based on the notion of inter-city competition may exaggerate the capacity of macro management in routine bureaucratic activities. What drives aggressive promotion place images and enthusiastic investment in infrastructures at the more local scale (urban districts, neighborhood offices, and real estate companies) is an embedded political economy of place, which allows the new actors to capture the benefits of inflated land prices.
    The inflow of foreign investment and the place promotion strategy triggered the real estate boom in Shanghai in 1993 to 1994. Tracing capital inflows can restore the missing link between globalization and urban transformation. For a large metropolis like Shanghai, foreign investment alone is unlikely to constitute the major source of capital formation. Nevertheless, foreign investment directly contributed to the establishment of the land leasing system, as it is a genuine customer for a piece of state land. This is very important at the beginning of land reform as it establishes the profitability of land development. The sale of urban land to external developers uncovered the fact that land is a valuable and irreplaceable factor in production and consumption. The burgeoning price of the leased land exceeds the price of the land allocated through non-market methods (e.g., administrative allocation). This gap between market price and nominal price, due to the absence of land markets, began to fuel the engine of urban growth. Because urban land development can generate a profit, capital has withdrawn from the production circuit where competition reduces the monopoly profit of state-owned enterprises and has been redirected to the built environment. The reallocation of resources, however, is far too complex to be generalized as the transition to a free market (as if there were absolutely free markets). The fundamental assumption of the economic man in neoclassical urban economics is invalid here, because the actors involved in the game of landed property production have various stakes and incentives (Wu, 1999) and cannot always act rationally according to the market principle. For example, state-owned enterprises in a regime of flexible budget constraint can divert the profit retained from production to real estate business. As a landowner, local government is willing to invest in infrastructure to boost the price of land. Overseas Chinese developers established a wide social network with local governments to capitalize on cultural affinity and kinship (Hsing, 1996). In many circumstances, giant players do not simply follow market trends but are able to manipulate the market to create favorable conditions. The competition of interests in urban land has driven the development of urban land to its maximum intensity, similar to the classical example of the growth machine documented by Logan and Molotch (1987). The game of development that harnesses local politics to increase land values and to create a consensus towards growth is being played in Chinese cities. The redirection of investment from production to real estate further heated the property market until the state finally stepped in to tighten the macroeconomic policy in mid 1994. Foreign investment, though not the only source of financing the real estate boom, contributed to an overwhelmingly optimistic atmosphere for property speculation.
    Globalization mobilizes a new mode of urban governance. For example, landed interests now attempt to justify the relaxation of development controls in the name of local development and the adoption of liberalism in urban management. One important insight drawn from this research is that Shanghai witnessed the shift in its accumulation strategy away from the productionist view of economizing urbanization to enhancement of services provision (gateway of China) and urbanism (image creation and city beautification). Future studies should examine the change in urban governance, in particular, how globalization interacts with the legacy of socialist development and how a range of local institutions such as the system of land use, the administrative system, fiscal relationships, and urban politics are remolded under globalization.
ADDED MATERIAL
    FULONG WU
    University of Southampton
    * Direct correspondence to: Fulong Wu, Department of Geography, University of Southampton, Southampton, SO17 1BJ, United Kingdom. E-mail: F.Wu@soton.ac.uk
    ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: This research project was funded by a Chinese Studies Grant from the British Council. The comments of anonymous referees have been helpful in revision. Any remaining error is solely the responsibility of the author.
    TABLE 1 The Growth of Economic Indicators in Shanghai


                                                                   Total Export
                 Infrastructure     Investment       Foreign         Value of
Year    GDP       Investment       Fixed Assets    Investment    Foreign Trade
1990    100.0        100.0             100.0          100.0            100.0
1991    118.2        130.0             113.7          111.0            107.9
1992    147.3        178.6             157.4          286.9            123.2
1993    199.8        355.7             287.9          407.1            138.8
1994    260.7        504.4             494.6          499.4            170.6
1995    325.5        579.8             705.3          679.2            217.6
1996    383.7        802.2             859.6          962.8            248.8
1997    444.2        874.3             870.8          813.5            276.8
    Source. Shanghai Statistics Bureau, 1998.
    TABLE 2 Ratio of Foreign Investment to Investment in Fixed Assets and Infrastructure Investment in Shanghai


        Foreign Investments to    Foreign Investments to
Year        Fixed Assets               Infrastructure
1985            4.99                       25.55
1986            9.32                       55.22
1987           18.04                      102.94
1988           28.02                      185.39
1989           31.02                      184.65
1990           20.61                       99.11
1991           21.46                       90.30
1992           42.58                      180.42
1993           34.96                      136.12
1994           26.35                      124.29
1995           26.46                      154.81
1996           31.90                      164.60
1997           26.60                      127.60
    Note. Foreign investment is converted from US$ to Yuan to be comparable with investment in fixed assets and infrastructure investment, using the actual exchange rate of the year.
    Source. Shanghai Statistics Bureau, 1998.
    TABLE 3 Change in Relationship of Foreign Related Activities to GDP in Shanghai


        Foreign investment as       Export Value as
Year     Percentage of GDP        Percentage of GDP
1985            0.01                   0.23
1986            0.02                   0.271
1987            0.05                   0.284
1988            0.08                   0.264
1989            0.08                   0.34
1990            0.05                   0.367
1991            0.05                   0.349
1992            0.12                   0.338
1993            0.12                   0.283
1994            0.17                   0.389
1995            0.19                   0.415
1996            0.21                   0.379
1997            0.16                   0.364
    Note. Foreign investment and export value are converted from US$ to Yuan to be comparable with GDP that is measured in Yuan, using the actual exchange rate of the year.
    Source. Shanghai Statistics Bureau, 1998.
FIGURE 1 The Growth of Foreign Investment, 1985 to 1996


REFERENCES
    Alden, J., Stephen, C., & Beigulenko, Y. (1998). Moscow: Planning for a world capital city towards 2000. Cities, 15, 361-374.
    Amin, A., & Thrift, N. (1994). Globalization, institutions, and regional development in Europe. Oxford University Press: Oxford.
    Andrusz, G., Harloe, M., & Szeleny, I. (Eds.). (1996). Cities after socialism: Urban and regional change and conflict in post-socialist societies. Blackwell Publishers: Oxford.
    Ashworth, G. J., & Voogd, H. (1990). Selling the city: Marketing approaches in public sector urban planning. Belhaven Press: London.
    Bian, Y., & Logan, J. R. (1996). Market transition and the persistence of power: The changing stratification system in urban China. American Sociological Review, 61, 739-758.
    Bullard, N., Bello, W., & Mallhotra, K. (1998). Taming the tigers: The IMF and the Asian crisis. Third World Quarterly, 19, 505-555.
    Castells, M. (1999). End of millennium. Blackwell: Oxford.
    Chan, K-W. (1992). Economic growth strategy and urbanization policies in China, 1949-82. International Journal of Urban and Regional Research, 16, 275-305.
    Chan, R. C. K. (1996). Urban development and redevelopment. In Y. M. Yeung & Y. W. Sung (Eds.), Shanghai: Transformation and modernization under China's open door policy (pp. 300-320). The Chinese University Press: Hong Kong.
    Chen, C. (1999). The impact of FDI and trade. In Y. Wu (Ed.), Foreign direct investment and economic growth in China (pp. 71-99). Edward Elgar: Cheltenham.
    Chevrant-Breton, M. (1997). Selling the world city: A comparison of promotional strategies in Paris and London. European Planning Studies, 5, 137-192.
    Editors of China Real Estate Market. (Eds.). (1996). China Real Estate Market 1996. Qiyue Guanli Press: Beijing.
    Church, A., & Reid, P. (1996). Urban power, international networks and competition: The example of cross-border cooperation. Urban Studies, 33, 1297-1319.
    Clarke, S., & Gaile, G. (1998). The work of cities. University of Minnesota Press: Minneapolis, MI.
    Cochrane, A., Peck, J., & Tickell, A. (1996). Manchester plays games: Exploring the local politics of globalization. Urban Studies, 33, 1319-1336.
    Cox, K. R., & Mair, A. (1991). From localised social structures to localities as agents. Environment and Planning A, 23, 197-214.
    Dick, H. W., & Rimmer, P. J. (1998). Beyond the third world city: The new urban geography of South-east Asia. Urban Studies, 35, 2303-2321.
    Douglass, C. M. (1997). Urbanization and social transformation in East Asia. In W. B. Kim, C. M. Douglass, S-C. Choe, & K. C. Ho (Eds.), Culture and the city in east Asia (pp. 17-40). Oxford University Press: Oxford.
    Dowall, D. E. (1994). Urban residential redevelopment in the People's Republic of China. Urban Studies, 31, 1497-1516.
    Eade, J. (Ed.). (1997). Living the global city: Globalization as local process. Routledge: London.
    Eng, I. (1997). The rise of manufacturing towns: Externally driven industrialization and urban development in the Pearl River Delta of China. International Journal of Urban and Regional Research, 21, 554-568.
    Ettlinger, N. (1999). Local trajectories in the global economy. Progress in Human Geography, 23, 335-357.
    Fainstein, S. S. (1990). The changing world economy and urban restructuring. In D. Judd & M. Parkinson (Eds.), Leadership and urban regeneration (pp. 170-186). Sage Publications: London.
    Fainstein, S. S. (1994). The city builders: Property, politics, and planning in London and New York. Blackwell: Oxford.
    Fan, C. C. (1997). Uneven development and beyond: Regional development theory in post-Mao China. International Journal of Urban and Regional Research, 21, 620-639.
    Friedmann, J. (1995). Where we stand: A decade of world city research. In P. L. Knox & P. J. Taylor (Eds.), World cities in a world system (pp. 21-47). Cambridge University Press: New York.
    Friedmann, J., & Wolff, G. (1982). World city formation: An agenda for research and action. International Journal of Urban and Regional Research, 6, 309-344.
    Fry, C. (2000). Far Eastern promise. Geographical, 72, 28-33.
    Hall, T., & Hubbard, P. (1996). The entrepreneurial city: New urban politics, new urban geographies? Progress in Human Geography, 20, 153-174.
    Hall, T., & Hubbard, P. (1998). The entrepreneurial city. John Wiley: Chichester.
    Harvey, D. (1989). From managerialism to entrepreneurialism: The transformation in urban governance in later capitalism. Geografiska Annaler B, 71, 13-27.
    Hsing, Y. (1996). Blood, thicker than water: Interpersonal relations and Taiwanese investment in southern China. Environment and Planning A, 28, 2241-2261.
    Jessop, B. (1998). The narrative of enterprise and the enterprise of narrative: Place marketing and the entrepreneurial city. In T. Hall & P. Hubbard (Eds.), The entrepreneurial city: Geographies of politics, regime and representation (pp. 77-99). John Wiley and Sons: Chichester.
    Jessop, B. (1999). Reflections on globalisation and its (il)logic(s). In K. Olds, P. Dicken, P. F. Kelly, L. Kong, & H. Yeung (Eds.), Globalization and the Asia-Pacific: Contested territories (pp. 19-38). Routledge: London.
    Jiang, D., Chen J. J., & Issac, D. (1998). The effect of foreign investment on the real estate industry in China. Urban Studies, 35, 2101-2110.
    Kim, W. B., Douglass, C. M., Choe, S-C., & Ho, K. C. (Eds.). (1997). Culture and the city in East Asia. Oxford University Press: Oxford.
    King, A. D. (1993). Identity and difference: The internationalization of capital and the globalization of culture. In P. Knox (Ed.), The restless urban landscape (pp. 83-110). Prentice Hall: Englewood.
    Knox, P. L., & Taylor, P. J. (Eds.). (1995). World cities in a world system. Cambridge University Press: New York.
    Lardy, N. R. (1992). Foreign trade and economic reform in China 1978-1990. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
    Lardy, N. R. (1996). The role of foreign trade and investment in China's economic transformation. In A. G. Walder (Ed.), China's transitional economy (pp. 103-120). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
    Lardy, N. R. (1998). China and the Asian contagion. Foreign Affairs, 77, 78-88.
    Lever, W. F. (1997). Delinking urban economies: The European experience. Journal of Urban Affairs, 19, 227-238.
    Lin, G. C. S. (1997). Red capitalism in South China: Growth and development of the Pearl River Delta. Vancouver: UBC press.
    Lo, F-C., & Yeung, Y-M. (Eds.). (1998). Globalization and the world of large cities. Tokyo: United Nations University Press.
    Logan, J. R., & Molotch, H. (1987). Urban fortunes: The political economy of place. Berkeley: University of California Press.
    Machimura, T. (1994). The urban restructuring process in Tokyo in the 1980s: Transforming Tokyo into a world city. International Journal of Urban and Regional Research, 16, 114-128.
    Machimura, T. (1998). Symbolic use of globalization in urban politics in Tokyo. International Journal of Urban and Regional Research, 22, 183-194.
    MacLeod, G., & Goodwin, M. (1999). Space, scale and state strategy: Rethinking urban and regional governance. Progress in Human Geography, 23, 503-527.
    Marcuse, P. (1997). Glossy globalization: Unpacking a loaded discourse. In P. Droege (Ed.), Intelligent environments: Spatial aspects of the information revolution (pp. 29-48). Amsterdam: Elsevier.
    Marcuse, P., & van Kempen, R. (2000). Globalizing cities: a new spatial order? Oxford: Blackwell.
    McNeill, D. (2001). Barcelona as imagined community: Pasqual Maragall's spaces of engagement. Transactions of the Institute of British Geographers, 26, 340-352.
    Nan, X. M., & Xiao, Z. Y. (1992). The legal system of real estate in Peoples' Republic of China. Beijing: China Law Publisher.
    Oi, J. (1995). The role of the local state in China's transitional economy. The China Quarterly, 144, 1132-49.
    Olds, K. (1997). Globalizing Shanghai: The global intelligence corps and the building of Pudong. Cities, 14, 109-123.
    Olds, K. (2001). Globalization and urban change: Capital, culture, and Pacific Rim mega-projects. Oxford University Press: Oxford.
    Olds, K., Dicken, P., Kelly, P. F., Kong, L., & Yeung, H. (Eds.). (1999). Globalization and the Asia-Pacific: Contested territories. Routledge: London.
    Paddison, R. (1993). City marketing, image reconstruction and urban regeneration. Urban Studies, 30, 339-350.
    Peng, F. C. (1998, July 9). Late-starter gains on southern rivals. South China Morning Post, p. 5.
    Ramo, J. C. (1998). The Shanghai bubble. Foreign Policy, Summer, 64-75.
    Rose, F. (1997, August). Shanghai: Exception or rule? Consideration of urban development paths and processes in China since 1978. Paper presented at the 5th Asian Urbanization Conference, London.
    Rydin, Y. (1998). The enabling local state and urban development: Resources, rhetoric and planning in East London. Urban Studies, 35, 175-192.
    Sassen, S. (1991). The global city: New York, London, Tokyo. Princeton University Press: Princeton.
    Sassen, S. (1994). Cities in a world economy. Pine Forge Press: Thousand Oaks.
    Shanghai Statistical Bureau. (1995). Shanghai real estate market 1994. China Statistical Press: Beijing.
    Shanghai Statistical Bureau. (1997). Shanghai Statistical Yearbook 1997. China Statistical Press: Beijing.
    Shanghai Statistical Bureau. (1998). Shanghai Statistical Yearbook 1998. China Statistical Press: Beijing.
    Short, J. R., Benton, M., Luce, W. B., & Walton, J. (1993). Reconstructing the image of an industrial city. Annals of the Association of American Geography, 83, 207-224.
    Short, J. R., & Kim, Y-H. (1999). Globalization and the city. Addison Wesley Longman: Essex.
    Sit, V. F. S., & Yang, C. (1997). Foreign-investment-induced exo-urbanisation in the Pearl River Delta, China. Urban Studies, 34, 647-677.
    Song, F., & Timberlake, M. (1996). Chinese urbanization, state policy, and the world economy. Journal of Urban Affairs, 18, 285-307.
    State Statistical Bureau. (1997). China Statistical Yearbook 1997. China Statistical Press: Beijing.
    Sykora, L. (1994). Local urban restructuring as a mirror of globalization process: Prague in the 1990s. Urban Studies, 31, 1149-1166.
    Walder, A. G. (1986). Communist neo-traditionalism: Work and authority in Chinese industry. University of California Press: Berkeley.
    Walder, A. G. (1992). Property rights and stratification in socialist redistributive economies. American Sociological Review, 57, 524-539.
    Wang, H. K., & Li, C. J. (1997, August). Shanghai's land development: A view from the transformation of mainland China's administrative systems since 1978. Paper presented at the 5th Asian Urbanization Conference, London.
    Wang, Y. P., & Murie, A. (1996). The process of commercialization of urban housing in China. Urban Studies, 33, 971-989.
    Wang, Y. P., & Murie, A. (1999). Commercial housing development in urban China. Urban Studies, 36, 1475-1494.
    Whyte, M. K., & Parish, W. L. (1984). Urban life in contemporary China. University of Chicago Press: Chicago.
    Wu, F. (1999). The 'game' of landed-property production and capital circulation in China's transitional economy, with reference to Shanghai. Environment and Planning A, 31, 1757-1771.
    Wu, W. (1999). City profile: Shanghai. Cities, 16, 207-216.
    Yatsko, P. (1996, July). Field of dreams: can Shanghai re-emerge as a key financial centre? Far Eastern Economic Review, 69-70.
    Yeh, A. G. O., & Li, X. (1999). Economic development and agricultural land loss in the Pearl River Delta, China. Habitat International, 23, 373-390.
    Yeh, A. G. O., & Wu, F. (1996). The new land development process and urban development in Chinese cities. International Journal of Urban and Regional Research, 20, 330-353.
    Yeung, H. W. C. (1998). Capital, state and space: Contesting the borderless world. Transaction of Institute of British Geographers, 23, 291-309.
    Yeung, Y-M. (1999). The promise and peril of globalization. Progress in Human Geography, 22, 475-477.
    Yeung, Y-M., & Sung, Y. W. (Eds.). (1996). Shanghai: Transformation and modernization under China's open door policy. The Chinese University Press: Hong Kong.
    Zhou, M., & Logan, J. R. (1996). Market transition and the commodification of housing in urban China. International Journal of Urban and Regional Research, 20, 400-421.
    Zhu, J. (1999). Local growth coalition: The context and implications of China's gradualist urban land reforms. International Journal of Urban and Regional Research, 23, 534-548.
    Zou, D. Z. (1998). Chinese cities towards the 21st century. City Planning Review, 22, 7-9.

使用道具 举报

Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16

声望
53
寄托币
31146
注册时间
2001-10-7
精华
284
帖子
171

Sagittarius射手座 荣誉版主

9
发表于 2004-4-1 23:38:04 |只看该作者

AUTHOR: Bruno Dallago

AUTHOR:  Bruno Dallago
TITLE:  The Organizational Effect of the Economic System
SOURCE:  Journal of Economic Issues 36 no4 953-79 D 2002

The magazine publisher is the copyright holder of this article and it is reproduced with permission. Further reproduction of this article in violation of the copyright is prohibited. To contact the publisher: http://www.orgs.bucknell.edu/afee/



WHY DO COUNTRIES SHOW CONSISTENTLY DIFFERENT ORGANIZATIONS OF INDUSTRY?
    A peculiar mix of firms of different type and size and characteristic configurations of economic actors are distinctive attributes of the organizational structure of modern economies. One important reason for such diversity lies in the variety of such environmental features(FN1) as topography, international geo-political situation, endowment with natural resources, level of development, and demography that distinguish the countries of the world. Yet, organizational variety is a remarkable feature even in economies that are similar from many perspectives--such as the level of development, endowment with technology, or demand features--that may even show converging economic performance (e.g., in terms of growth rates) that cooperate and are integrated in many ways. This observation holds even in the case of countries that are progressively integrating their economies, such as those of the European Union.(FN2)
    If economies at comparable levels of development(FN3) are competitive and open--as is increasingly true in developed market economies in a time of globalization--there should be no significant interfirm differences in factors remuneration and access to factors pools, including technology. If we suppose that costs, technology, or segmentation explain the organizational structure of comparable economies, we should observe increasing uniformity. Yet we can observe that intercountry differences persist and do not decrease appreciably in importance, although they evolve.
    In light of the above observations, there must be at least another factor--along with and beyond costs, technology, and market segmentation, and given environmental and individual differences--that explains the variety of organizational structures within each economy and their persistence in an age of globalization. My hypothesis is that this factor is the economic system.
    An economic system is a coordinated set of formal and informal institutions. Among the former are such variables as
    * Economically important laws and codified rights and duties and their enforcement (e.g., company laws, bankruptcy laws, disclosure and auditing rules, property rights, contracts).
    * The type and features of economic actors that exist, prevail, or are allowed to exist in a given context (e.g., firms, banks, and other financial intermediaries) and their internal structure (e.g., the features, composition, and duties of boards).
    * Normal relations among the suppliers of resources (e.g., between labor and capital or shareholders and managers).
    * Codified practices and provisions (e.g., competition practices, takeovers).
    * The nature, role, instruments, and goals of government (e.g., the nature of policies, planning and regulation, the central bank).
    Economically important informal institutions are, for example, the role of the family as provider of capital and entrepreneurship, work and payment habits, consumption habits, tax morale and ethical standards, the role of ideology, and religion and beliefs--except in dictatorship and confessional societies, in which these latter variables are formal institutions.
    The importance of the economic system lies in the fact that it is a set of humanly devised devices that form the framework within which the actors' economic activity takes place. The system is the network of "rules of the game" that structure the interaction of economic actors with other actors and with the environment. Although this framework is not necessarily perfectly consistent--in the sense that the institutions that form the framework are perfectly and fully coordinated--successful economies are all characterized by an efficacious economic system. This may develop spontaneously, by design, or by imposition, following respectively the interest of dispersed actors, the action of a political authority, or the will of one particular powerful actor--a powerful social class, a dictator, an ideology, a religion, or a foreign occupant.
    Like institutions, the economic system bounds economic actors, directs their efforts, and constrains their expectations with respect to economic interaction. Compared with institutions, the economic system adds coordination that strengthens the impact of institutions upon the activity of economic actors, gives stability to social interaction, and reduces costs and problems that could derive from contradictory institutions. Therefore, the economic system supports the individual members of a society in coordinating their knowledge, choices, production, and transactions. In this way, the economic system transforms dispersed and possibly diverging individual functions into a socially coordinated and shared economic function and supports its implementation.
    Economic activity without the economic system is certainly possible but economically not advantageous. Individual actors have an interest in operating within an economic system, because this reduces their costs of economic interaction and allows them to capture externalities and take advantage of complementarities of coordination. In exchange for these advantages, economic actors must be able to afford the learning, adaptation, and compliance costs of operating within the system. These variables influence the actors' behavior and choices.
    The existence of the system, therefore, descends from the complexity of the economic activity based on the division of labor. Once production is divided in parts, each one being implemented by a specialized actor, interaction among actors becomes necessary. This requires common rules and compatible individual goals. In the simple economy of a small local society, direct personal interaction, tradition, or ad hoc orders by a powerful individual may be sufficient to solve the problem. Beyond a certain level of complexity a more complex and general solution must be found to avoid rapidly increasing interaction costs and prevent the failure of interaction. This is a historical process. However, in an open, competitive world economy and given environmental and individual features and the cost of change, the outcome (the economic system) can survive only if it grants actors an efficacious coordination compared with other systems in different economies. This opens the opportunity for fruitful comparative static analysis, not only comparative dynamic ones.
    Five points need some clarification. First, coordination and interaction among actors require a certain degree of coherence within the system. If actors internalize norms of conduct and rules of the game--institutions--that are mutually compatible and possibly coherent, the costs of interaction will be lower and interaction will be more effective in promoting adaptation to environmental variability and change. This is why the system promotes selection of institutions through entry and exit: institutions that do not effectively support actors in their economic interaction will be progressively abandoned or, if supported by law or imposition, they will become ineffective. Although this never produces monolithic constructions--at least because of environmental variety and variability--through time these processes give the economic system a well-defined structure that makes the system easily distinguishable from other systems. This is true for both general economic systems (e.g., Anglo-Saxon capitalism) and for country-specific economic systems (e.g., the US economic system).
    Second, although the system does not necessarily need a government, the latter is certainly a major player. As said above, the government as an institution is part of the economic system. This means that the features and role of the government must be in line with the features of the economic system. For instance, in a competitive market economy based on private enterprises the possibility for the government to intervene directly in the economic domain is limited. A particular government of a particular country (the government as an organization), however, always has the possibility of departing from this kind of behavior. This may be so for political or other reasons, but it is so when the government wants to reform the economic system. Reform is always a complex and delicate undertaking: the host of unforeseen and unwanted consequences of reform processes is testimony not only of ignorance of reformers and resistance of interest groups. It is also the outcome of the resilience of the economic system that derives from its coordinating nature. Changing one part of the system has important consequences for the whole. The economic system, through the action of actors, tries to keep the compatibilities and coherence that make economic interaction cheaper, easier, and more effective.
    Third, in a competitive and open economy, technological change is particularly rapid and may require fast systemic adaptation. In any given point in time, technology is part of the environment. However, and particularly in a longer perspective, technology is largely endogenous. Technology as part of the environment means that technological change promotes systemic evolution. Endogenous technology means that the features of the economic system contribute to select the technology that is most proper in that particular system.
    Fourth, an economic system, although evolving, tends to be stable through time because of path dependence and costs. This means that its general features (e.g., the dominance of capital over labor, the pursuit of shareholder value in corporate governance, the prevailing nature of investment financing) remain rather stable, although the particular form they take evolves. Stability derives from the fact that within an economic system institutions do not come randomly but are bundled in an orderly interaction. Since the latter features externalities, complementarities, and lock-ins--and consequently path dependence--each institution is and must be in a particular relation with other institutions of a particular brand. Consequently, the features of a particular institution cannot easily change unless the features of (nearly) all other institutions change at the same time. However, this would increase the cost of economic interaction.
    Finally, economic systems may be very different from each other. For instance, in some systems tradition is the dominant feature. In others it is a particular ideology. The economic systems that I consider in this article--the economic systems of highly developed countries in a globalizing world economy--must answer to a different logic if they are to survive and grant economic success. This does not mean that they are purely efficiency driven, and path dependence has an important role in explaining their features. Globalization means that--among all the possible path-dependent outcomes of systemic evolution--successful systems must choose solutions that allow the pursuit of efficiency. Since there is no unique way of doing so, as I will show, different economic systems may continue to operate successfully in a global environment. Globalization requires unique or compatible general principles that govern the interaction among heterogeneous realities.
    Globalization and the organization of the economy are continuously evolving processes. A full understanding of the way in which different economic systems and different economies adapt to such environmental transformations requires a dynamic analysis. However, a comparative static analysis is valuable in two fields. The first is the comparison of the suitability of particular economic systems in a global environment. Here a comparative static approach helps to understand the "gap" between the actual existing economic system and the features which that particular economic system should have to operate in a most efficacious way in a global environment. In a sense, this is infra-systemic comparison that may help in devising reforms to fill that gap. This comparison is also useful in an intersystemic perspective in the sense that it may give valuable hints on the crucial question: Is there a "best" economic system in a global environment? This system would be the one that is the best suited to operate in that environment, with lowest costs, granting most powerful incentives to economic actors and pushing innovation in the most flexible and strongest way.
    Indeed, this is what is behind the convergence hypothesis that I will discuss at length in this paper. According to the convergence hypothesis, there is only one efficient economic system. Different economic systems are more or less efficient depending on their proximity to this ideal (theoretical) system model. Therefore, the analysis based on this hypothesis is static and implicitly comparative. It is important to see whether this hypothesis stands the comparative static test. If it does not, as I will show, even less can it withstand dynamic tests. This is the second field where a comparative static analysis is useful.
    In the first part of this paper, I use a comparative static approach to assess whether the convergence hypothesis can explain the organizational structure of a particular economy. The convergence hypothesis is comparative also in an intertemporal sense, and I will follow this perspective. By the organizational structure I mean the type and size of firms and configurations of economic actors. The latter includes the relations among firms of the same or different type and size and among actors performing distinct economic functions. Examples of a configuration are industrial and financial groups, transnational companies, industrial districts, and the like. I consider only economically developed market economies in order to limit the effect of environmental features on the organizational structure as much as possible. The basic operational hypothesis that I will develop in the second part of the paper is that the economic system defines the relative advantages and disadvantages (which include costs, incentives, and access to markets) and network externalities, complementarities, and lock-ins, and hence the efficacy of particular organizational structures in any context.
    The paper is organized as follows. The next section stresses that different developed economies have markedly different organizational structures. In the third section I deal with the consequences of globalization and competition as crucial forces behind the alleged convergence of economic systems, and in the fourth section with convergence of institutions and organizational structures. In the fifth section I consider two reasons for missing systemic convergence: the features of globalization and the microstructure of the economic system. The sixth section explains how the economic system determines comparative efficacy of different organizational structures. The final section considers the variables that are at the origin of such effect and concludes with the economic strength of a world of variety.


A WORLD OF VARIETY
    Organizational structures vary according to two dimensions: (1) firm size and type and (2) configurations of economic actors. As to size, countries as different as Italy and Japan display a striking presence of small and medium size enterprises (SME). Vice versa, in countries as different as Germany and the United States their presence is relatively unimportant. As to the type of these firms, I mean the nature of relations among the components of the firm (owners and stakeholders), the legal nature of firms, and its organizational consequences. The organizational structure of an individual country features basic coherence and permanence in time, together with evolution.
    The second dimension includes configurations of actors. In the real world, different actors rarely come as isolated entities. They are usually in stable relations with other actors that supply similar or complementary functions (e.g., goods vs. services or capital). Some of these configurations are loosely defined; others are clearly structured and identifiable. Examples of the former are the subcontracting and outsourcing relations that many firms have with other firms, usually smaller, or financial relations they have with financial institutions such as banks.
    Many Italian SMEs that form horizontal networks such as industrial districts are good examples of better-structured configurations. These are modern networks of SMEs that are competitive in the domestic and international market without any role for large firms. As to Japan, the bulk of her SME sector is made up of firms that depend upon large firms and that are vertically integrated with these. Other examples in these two countries are keiretsu in Japan and pyramidal groups of family capitalism in Italy.(FN4) Similar features can be easily identified in other countries and include, for example, transnational companies in the United States and other countries and hausbank relations in Germany.
    Differences along the two dimensions are also reflected in the internal structure of governance. The degree of concentration of ownership varies remarkably across different countries, as much as the nature of owners does.(FN5) Similar conclusions hold in the case of control. According to Frederic L. Pryor some 70-80 percent of large firms in the United States, Great Britain, and Australia are controlled by managers.(FN6) In other countries--particularly in continental Europe and Japan--that share is much lower. A noticeable recent development in Western Europe is the expansion and growth of employees' property rights. These mostly assume the form of co-determination and profit sharing.(FN7)
    Remaining with the case of developed market economies, there is no clear-cut relation between systemic features and economic performance,(FN8) in particular if we take a long-run perspective. This observation could suggest that the economic system and institutions are irrelevant for economic performance. However, a more convincing explanation is that different economic systems can be comparably efficacious in promoting economic performance, at least in the long run. Necessary conditions for this are that they provide actors with proper incentives, keep coordination costs low, and evolve over time following environmental change. That is, their efficacy is not absolute but relative to the environment where they operate and to the features of individual actors. An efficacious economic system, then, is one that fosters the use of the particular environmental and individual features(FN9) of a given country to pursue a socially shared set of goals in a way that cannot be improved by adopting a different economic system. If only one of these elements shows variability, variety, or variance in different countries, multiple systemic equilibria follow.(FN10) I will come back to this question later.
    The above differences persist in spite of the evolution of these economies and in spite of the fact that these are open and integrated economies that make use of largely the same or similar technological devices and that exchange production factors, information, knowledge, and even skills. However, different economies display different features in the utilization of those devices and production factors. This may produce patterns of convergence and divergence of economic performance without necessarily causing systemic convergence.
    In contrast, it is often maintained that globalization and integration together with competition stimulate economies to pursue the most efficient organizational solution. From this, systemic convergence should follow. The first question to answer, therefore, is whether such convergence to the most efficient solution exists.


THE EXPLANATORY AND FORECASTING INCONCLUSIVENESS OF THE CONVERGENCE HYPOTHESIS AND THE ECONOMIC SYSTEM
    Scholars in distinct fields of social sciences have periodically tried to prove that different economic, social, and political systems converge.(FN11) Among economists, the first such attempts date back to World War II. However, it was Jan Tinbergen who proposed the best-known and most influential version of the hypothesis in the early 1960s.(FN12) According to this author, economic and organizational structures in the East and the West of Europe were converging to an optimal mixed system. This system was supposed to have intermediate features between the two previous systems. This was possible because efficient economic solutions are unique. Increasing openness and economic and non-economic interrelations of the two groups of economies considered, together with technology and other factors, played a prominent role in pushing rational actors pursuing efficiency to implement those solutions. Such organizational and structural convergence would finally produce systemic convergence.
    Tinbergen's convergence, however, was theoretically and practically quite different from the one envisaged by the globalization-caused convergence that I want to discuss here. This latter argument can be summarized in the following way. Open markets and increasing mobility of resources create growing pressure for short-run efficiency. Competition drives both firms and economies to adopt the most efficient solutions, in spite of national, cultural, or individual differences. Globalized product and capital markets, increased labor migration, disappearing trade barriers, and growing infra-industry trade strengthen this pressure. In a globalized economy, technology, information, and knowledge flow freely through firms and countries at reasonably low costs and are increasingly standardized. Prestigious and powerful international organizations exist that help firms and countries to identify and adopt such best practices. If there is a technically best solution or practice to core functions, then competition drives firms and economies to adopt it. Those who fail doing so fall behind. The price they pay in terms of lost markets and falling growth rates or increasing debt push them to converge to the best solutions or disappear. Transnational corporations and foreign direct investment support such convergence: these are crucial actors in a globalized economy, are increasingly important, and help to spread standardized and converging organizational structures and related knowledge. Political globalization, pressure to democratize, and the role of mass media support these processes by diffusing standardized preferences, choices, and behavior.
    We can summarize the convergence argument in its strong form with the following three propositions:(FN13)
    * Proposition 1: Given economic actors as perfectly rational utility maximizers, there is only one efficient economic system based on the fundamental role of the free competitive market. In this system, the state is limited to the supply of public goods, prices embody all economically relevant information, allocation is reversible, resources flow freely to the most efficient use, and this use is unique. The fact that economic systems are embedded in the (economic, social, political) environment is irrelevant, due to the action of perfectly rational actors. Any "exogenous" (political or social) obstacle, if it exists (e.g., due to the action of interest groups), can be removed either spontaneously or by policies. Hence economic systems converge toward the unique best system under the pressure of globalization and competition and the supportive action of governments pursuing the society's welfare.
    * Proposition 2: When different countries adopt the same economic system (or when countries re-contract around different but trivial variants), formal institutions converge toward institutions that are the most efficient for firms and economies. Informal institutions and any local variation are trivial.
    * Proposition 3: When economies adopt the same (formal) institutions (or when players--such as firms--can re-contract around different but trivial rules), then even if they started with different ownership, governance, and organizational structures, they rapidly end up with the same structures. The convergence of economic systems and institutions determines the convergence of organizational structures.
    Proposition 1 implies that the environment does not influence the economic system and its efficacy and that the features of economic actors are unique and uniform. Path dependence does not exist or is irrelevant. The most efficient economic system is the set of optimal (free competitive market) institutions and is unique.
    To assess the tenability of this proposition one has therefore to assess the role of the environment and of individual features. In reality, the environment includes many variables that may differ even in countries that have similar development levels and technology. These variables are resources (including natural resources, the initial capital stock, and the initial population and its features), external factors (including the features of the rest of the world, geo-political position, and technology available from other economies), and the impact of random events on each of these.(FN14)
    As to individual features, the variety and variance of capabilities and personality is reflected in such constructions as culture, social relations, ideology, politics, and preferences. Although these features are the outcome of historical development, and although they change continuously, they are given in any moment and particular context. If individual features are different in distinct countries, they produce different economic systems that may be equivalent in their economic efficacy. When different environments and individual features change, economic systems also change along their own characteristic paths. This fact, by the way, illustrates that path dependence is not an irrational outcome and not even an undesirable one but is based in the deepest features of the economic system.
    The inconclusiveness of proposition 1 also derives from its disregard of externalities and complementarities engendered by institutions and of the investment required to sustain and upgrade institutions. Indeed, the most important feature of an economic system is the coordination it provides among different institutions, and following from this is the selection among hypothetical alternative institutions. Coordination is in fact the necessary condition to govern interaction among individual actors, and among them and the environment, in the many fields of economic activity and with mutual advantage. Investment in institutions, externalities, and complementarities produces lock-ins and irreversibility. These features have an appropriable economic value and give rise to multiple systemic equilibria and path dependence.
    A further consequence follows from these qualities of economic systems: since economic actors invest resources to operate in the given system and internalize the coordination among different institutions (and consequently take advantage of externalities and complementarities), economic actors in different economic systems develop different capabilities and personalities and have different cost structures. Hence efficacious organizational structures are different, even if one follows the convergence hypothesis in adopting the restrictive supposition that systems are efficiency driven. Their efficacy is determined by cost minimization of decision making and production, incentives effectiveness, and the allocation of individual features to their best possible use. Obviously, this outcome is more pronounced when economic systems pursue different goals. It follows that different although comparably efficacious economic systems produce permanently different organizational structures. I will return to this point and its implications in the following sections of this paper.
    There are not many examples that support this confutation of proposition 1, and the EU experiment is far from being conclusive in this regard. In fact, most cases are attempts at partial reform of particular institutions and pertain to proposition 2. In a sense, this is the best proof of the untenability of proposition 1. Each attempt depicts a failure of transformations based on the convergence hypothesis, although transformation profoundly changes the economic system. However, such transformation, when successful, takes place mostly around the basic features of the old system and may be better described as a deep restructuring of that system necessary to adapt to environmental change, pursue new goals, or respond to different political will or social preferences. The alternative is systemic disruption, which inevitably causes economic disruption.(FN15)
    Obviously, the best examples are those offered by the attempts at radically changing an economic system by imitating successful foreign systems. For example, in Japan the first historically registered attempt was the Taikwa reform. This was a general reform of the Japanese social, political, administrative, and economic system along the lines of the then much more developed Chinese system, implemented by imperial edict as early as AD 646. It had disappointing results to say the least, contrary to the successful Yoritomo reform in early Kamakura era at the end of the twelfth century and the beginning of the thirteenth century.(FN16) However, the best known attempts were the Meiji restoration in the nineteenth century and the Supreme Commander of the Allied Powers attempts to radically reform the Japanese economic system at the end of World War II.(FN17)
    More recently, Central and Eastern European countries offer an experiment in systemic change on a grand scale. This was preceded by repeated attempts at reforming the Soviet-type system, attempts that mostly failed. Although transformation in these countries is different from the case we are discussing here, which concerns developed market economies, it is worth mentioning it because it puts processes under a microscope. Transformation was, at least at the beginning, an attempt to implement a unique blueprint(FN18) without any appreciable consideration for the existing features of the environment and individual actors. The time elapsed since then has provided plenty of evidence of the futility and the negative consequences of such attempts. It also has shown that the larger the difference between existing preconditions (environment, individual features, institutions, co-ordination) and those implicit in the model, the greater the failure.


INSTITUTIONS AND THE ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE
    In spite of the above and for the sake of argument, let us suppose now that proposition 1 holds. Also in this favorable case there are different reasons why proposition 2 is likely to be false. In this case, (formal) institutions may not converge because (a) the variant forms may affect efficiency only weakly and (b) individuals and (interest) groups can resist institutional change that would jeopardize the benefits they earn in the present situation. In case (a), variant forms may persist for four reasons:
    1. Neither has an edge over the other, since the two are perfect substitutes.
    2. One might have a modest edge (they are only partial substitutes), but the inferior one may persist if the costs of transformation exceed the benefit.
    3. One form may be more efficient in one economy than in another because of different aspects of the country's economy or regulatory structure (different from the economic system) or the lack of relevant capabilities.
    4. Although one form may be more efficacious in a laboratory context, complementarities and positive externalities are lost when replacing variants. This makes replacing the variants economically inefficient if the value of lost complementarities and externalities is greater than the superior theoretical efficacy of the new variants. Consequently, local variants are not trivial and they may persist, path dependence apart.
    To illustrate the above confutation of proposition 2 let us consider two different countries, both with open, competitive economies. Country A has great mobility of labor, since its inhabitants prefer to change jobs and locations much more frequently than inhabitants of country B. In country A individual workers will not invest much in mastering firm and location culture and in acquiring specific capabilities, since they will change job and location soon. They will invest instead in tradable skills and in being informed about better opportunities elsewhere. Any improvement in the firm's or the location's (absolute or relative) "performance" will depend on the firm's and location's short-run ability to attract the "best" individuals by offering them better rewards and/or opportunities.
    In country B individuals prefer to work in the same firm and live in the same place longer. Therefore, individuals are more interested in investing resources to improve their firm or location-specific reputation, their capabilities, and the environment where they live. Employers are also interested in investing in training, since they will not lose that investment due to the mobility of opportunistic workers. Consequently, relative costs and capabilities in country A and B differ, and this requires a different organizational structure. Also, it is not possible to push the system of country B to converge to that of country A by, say, increasing remuneration to workers who want to migrate. In fact, these may not be the best (best-skilled) workers but the most opportunistic ones. They may have features that are different from those required in the new firm or location. Moreover, their employment (settlement) within a firm (location) where the majority of workers (inhabitants) is of "type B" is likely to cause conflicts, which probably would nullify the advantage of employing (attracting) those more mobile workers (inhabitants) and would reduce the incentives for the latter due to the costs of conflict.
    As an example, let us suppose that there are two different institutional sets that govern the capital market (table 1). Set A corresponds to the features of a transparent and competitive capital market and includes extensive, well-specified, and well-enforced accounting and auditing rules, specialized global market operators, strict laws against insider trading, effective prohibition of market manipulation, prohibition of universal banking, and support of public information. Set B corresponds to the features of a relational capital market and includes relational capital relations among stable partners, locally based market operators, and a crucial role of social capital, including trust and reputation. Let us suppose that set A provides stronger incentives to external (minority) investors and grants them better formal protection of their investment. This gives firms the opportunity to obtain credit at lower cost. However, in this case formal contracts, which can be costly to draw, control, and enforce, are necessary. Since set B provides capital from a more limited market, credit is probably costlier to firms. However, social capital may provide sizeable advantages (network externalities) in terms of relational contracts. These are cheaper than formal contracts--provided that social capital offers a credible protection against opportunism--and simpler and cheaper in terms of institutions governing the capital market. In turn, relational contracts give stability to networks, and stability offers better insurance against environmental variability. To this one can add shift costs (including re-organization, learning, and adaptation costs) from one institutional set to another.
    The attempt to replace one single component of set B with one of set A (e.g., accounting and auditing rules) is likely to reduce incentives to investment by dominating insiders without any appreciable advantage on the side of external investors. Hence, it will be resisted and will increase the costs of running other institutions. In this case, a better policy would be to improve accounting and auditing rules, so to give incentives to collective external investors (such as investment funds or banks) to broaden the collection of savings and offer them in the capital market as stable quasi-insider investors. This would dramatically enlarge the capital market also in the country endowed with set B institutions without causing unbearable costs and disruption.(FN19) The problems would be magnified when the attempt concerned the entire set B.
    Institutional set A and set B produce equally efficient results. Although set B is internally less efficient, it is externally (socially) as efficient as set A. Consequently, it is stable in a competitive environment. Even if it would be externally less efficient, it could be equally stable due to shift costs.
    According to proposition 3, when different economies adopt the same (formal) institutions, they rapidly end up with the same structures. Let us suppose that institutional liberalization produces institutional convergence and that all countries now share the same economic institutions (e.g., prohibition of universal banking, accounting rules, regulation of insider trading, labor mobility, and a competitive labor market). Even in this case, there could be no convergence of organizational structures due to four factors:
    1. If there are shift costs from one structure to the other one.
    2. If incumbents with positional advantage inside firms impede transformation.
    3. If sunk costs make change costly.
    4. If there are complementarities and positive externalities among different structures that would be lost.
    For example, let us suppose that there are two technically feasible organizations of an industry (table 2). Organization A is based on the exploitation of scale and scope economies and consists of one large firm that is efficient. Organization B consists of many small firms that are horizontally integrated and strictly cooperate with local governments and other kinds of intermediate organizations. In this way they form a network such as a local productive system or an industrial district. Let us also suppose that organization A is characterized by lower unit costs of production, while organization B is better able to take advantage of social capital, network externalities, and incentives to employees and entrepreneurs. Let us also suppose that there are shift costs from B to A in terms of re-organization and claim settlement costs. Finally, let us suppose that there is a need to invest in maintaining and upgrading social capital (e.g., investment in social networks, trust, and reputation) but that we can disregard this investment since it would exist anyway in a particular society.
    Organization A and organization B are equally efficient. Although organization B is internally less efficient, it is externally as efficient as organization A, since it takes greater advantage of different economic and non-economic factors (network externalities, social capital, and incentives in the example of table 2). Consequently, it is stable in a competitive environment. Even if it would be externally less efficient, it could be equally stable, since there are shift costs.
    To conclude, even based on a comparative static approach there can be different efficacious economic systems, depending on the environment and the individuals' features. There can also be different efficacious institutions and organizational structures, depending on the economic system. Economic systems, institutions, and structures are each embedded in a wider context--including the environment and individual features--that influences the capabilities they have and the use they make of the overall costs that actors have to pay and the return they obtain. This explains why the existence of variety can be an efficacious adaptation to variety, variance, and variability of different environments and the individuals' features.
    All this is not to say that organizations A and B do not evolve or "learn" from each other. A typical example of organization B is Italian industrial districts. Their transformation is continuous along three main lines:(FN20)
    1. The acquisition of enterprises that are part of a district by external (Italian or foreign) investors, so that these enterprises lessen their integration in the district and strengthen their relation with other enterprises and markets.
    2. The development of groups or inter-firm agreements implemented through the initiative of district enterprises that act as leaders, the process aiming at creating greater organizational dimensions through the external growth of the district.
    3. The reintegration within the district enterprises of functions or productive stages that were previously externalized. This is usually made possible by new technological developments and is rendered convenient by the high costs of quality and time controls over third parties or the increased prices of externalized functions. A different reaction to these problems is the location outside the district of certain productive stages or supplies, which opens up the district by decreasing internal integration. A more recent evolution is the formation of district groups based on cross-ownership.(FN21)
    Another important example of evolution is offered by transnational companies (TNC).(FN22) Although this is certainly the organizational form that apparently best supports the convergence hypothesis, the internal organization of TNC reflects the features of the mother country and adaptation to those of the host country.
    Neither example shows the inevitability of convergence. Both show evolution to adapt to the change of environmental and individual features and to exploit new opportunities. However, such evolution takes place along distinct trends in different economies, although possibly parallel, in the sense that they answer common problems and pursue similar goals such as efficiency, competitiveness, and adaptation.


GLOBALIZATION AND THE ECONOMIC SYSTEM
    In the previous sections I showed that convergence is not inevitable and is not probable even based on comparative static considerations. Now I turn to the question of whether there are positive factors motivating, justifying, or requiring systemic variety. In this case both the questions to be answered and the methodological approach change.
    Globalization is a dynamic and highly complex process that is actually transforming economies. Thus, the crucial question to be answered is not how economic systems and economies converge but how they react to, adapt to, and interact with a globalizing environment. Another crucial question is what type of changes take place within economic systems and economies following their adaptation to globalization. Since the nature of the problem is different and the true questions are typically dynamic, the methodological approach also must be dynamic to capture the complexities of change.
    In what follows I proceed in two steps. In this section I explain why globalization does not represent such a dramatic and permanent environmental change pushing economic systems to converge even if one supposes that systems are efficiency driven. Clearly, it is less so if one considers the role of path dependence. In the next section I will consider the organizational consequences of non-converging economic systems.
    Globalization does not cause convergence for at least two sets of reasons: the features of globalization and the microstructure of economic systems. Let us consider the first set. Globalization covers an important but limited part of world economic activity.(FN23) Although both the number of sectors involved and the forms globalization assumes have increased, competition in globalized markets has not destroyed national and local characteristics and specialization. There is no evidence of a general trend toward convergence in trade specialization across countries, nor are foreign direct investments an engine of convergence.(FN24) There also is evidence of national patterns of innovation and national forms of business organization.(FN25) Therefore, globalization does not diminish the need for global actors, such as transnational companies, to adapt to local conditions.(FN26)
    Far from needing convergence and uniformity, globalization lives on differences: different unit costs, different national market sizes, different tastes and preferences, different resource endowment, different levels of development, and, of course, different local institutions and different economic systems. This means that global actors such as foreign traders, multinational corporations, commercial banks, international subcon-tractors, and so on must adapt to local conditions, as much as they attempt to adapt local conditions to their cost and management requirements. From this interaction between global actors and local conditions results a permanent renewal of differences between costs, market sizes, and preferences in various national economies and economic environments, and thus between different economic systems.(FN27)
    Globalization, then, does not eliminate environmental variety and variance and may even cause divergence.(FN28) Along with this, globalization depicts a direction of change and interaction among economies but does not eliminate environmental variability. If the environment changes through time, sometimes in an unpredictable manner as it does, systemic, institutional, and organizational variety is an economically efficacious answer. This is particularly so if the environment changes in opposite directions: for example, if a period of adaptation follows accelerated technological innovations, if the consolidation of new markets ensues after the abrupt opening up of those markets, if stability follows periods of dramatic change of relative prices, or if stagnation follows the rapid expansion of capital markets. Environmental variability in the presence of different economic systems is revealed by lack of synchronization of economic performance among countries that continues to persist, even in the case of returns in financial and capital markets.(FN29)
    To this one should add persistent intercountry variance of individual features. Although some standardization of consumption and job patterns has taken place, this is far from convergence. Moreover, standardized solutions often have quite different meanings and consequences in different societies (e.g., labor mobility, job rights, McDonald's). Under these conditions, no particular economic system has time and the opportunity to replace other systems, even if this were technically and politically feasible. Indeed, each system shows relative advantages and disadvantages whose balance changes following environmental variability and that are linked to the variance of individual features. Globalization, then, gives rise to systemic evolution (evolution of institutions and the coordination framework) along nonconvergent paths.
    To conclude, globalization requires governance devices of the world economy, including the following:
    * Compatible general frameworks (e.g., coordinated monetary and financial policies and regulation/deregulation, decreasing trade barriers and barriers to the mobility of factors, protection of foreign investment, contracting standards, standardized and compatible technology, flow of standardized information, and shared knowledge important in the domain of globalization).
    * International organizations (e.g., WTO, IMF, the World Bank, ILO, UNIDO, UNDP, and other UN agencies) to coordinate such frameworks and policies.
    Globalization also increases the interaction among national economies. However, this implies neither systemic nor institutional and organizational convergence but only compatibility of goals and frameworks.
    Let us now turn to the second set of reasons for the lack of convergence: the microstructure of economic systems. The economic system includes microeconomic factors that produce persistence--histeresis--and path dependence even when powerful political forces(FN30) or structural change(FN31) promote systemic change. Microeconomic factors are the legacy that individual actors bring to the process of change.(FN32) In any given economic system, actors have to invest in system-specific assets, that is, in the opportunity set defined by the system. It is the features of the system--via the structure of incentives typical to it--that define the features of this investment. Investment in system-specific assets gives rise to individual systemic capital, which in turn influences the actors' choices and in the long run their individual features. Therefore, systemic capital creates an interest in the conservation of the system. The asymmetric distribution of systemic capital creates asymmetries in bargaining power, knowledge, and information. Consequently, individual choices are based on individual models derived from system-specific capital that are nonconvergent and engender nonconvergent actions, well beyond the influence of interest groups. Different distributions of systemic capital in different countries are additional factors preventing convergence.
    Since existing individual capabilities were formed in the old system, when the system changes all actors have to bear great costs to adapt their individual features. All this diminishes the possibility of capturing potential social gains from systemic change, and individual (personal) gain depends largely on redistributive actions. Systemic capital, asymmetries, and transformation costs(FN33) cause path dependence of systemic change as a rational behavior to economize on transformation costs and keep the value of old systemic capital. As a consequence, different economic systems evolve along distinct paths. If path dependence does not mean systemic conservatism but rather evolution to adapt the system to a changing environment and individual features, lower investment in systemic reform is needed (compared with the case of systemic transformation) and there are few(er) chances to pursue quasi-rents.
    However, globalization does transform the environment and modify individual features, although the latter continue to show variance and variability. If different economic systems continue to be viable in the new context, they need to evolve in order to capture the opportunities that globalization offers and to survive the challenge that global competition introduces. But all these changes are motives for the evolution of economic systems along their particular path, in the direction of solving problems that are (partially) common or similar to other systems and by providing the conditions necessary to support the international flow of resources, not for convergence.


THE ECONOMIC SYSTEM AS DETERMINANT OF COMPARATIVE EFFICACY
    In the previous section I concluded that even under the influence of globalization there is no unique best solution--a particular economic system and consequently organizational structure--to the problems that different economies are called upon to solve. Consequently, the superiority of a particular economic system and organizational structure is relative.(FN34)
    In what follows, I concentrate on two related topics that together form the organizational structure of an economy: the size structure of firms (organizational forms) and the existence of configurations of firms and other actors that are characterized by durable cooperation and interaction patterns (organizational configurations). The latter can also include labor division, cross shareholding and other kinds of enduring ownership and control, subcontracting and outsourcing, joint commercial functions, and the like. These features are distinct in different countries, although those economies can be competitive in the global economy. My contention here is that these regularities are in large part the product of the economic system. This means that different, often alternative, organizational structures can be efficacious even in a time of globalization, depending on the economic system.
    The classical question in institutional and organizational economics is, Why do firms exist?(FN35) If firms exist to economize on transaction costs and because they offer the most effective governance structure, why do firms and other economic actors operating in one industry assume different features and size and enter different configurations in distinct economies? Why do these different firms and configurations survive and flourish in a competitive and interactive environment, such as the one that globalization produces? Clearly there must be something else besides or beyond the factors that explain the existence of the firm. One possible explanation is technology; however, if those economies are competitive, in a global economy technology should flow through different countries to assure efficiency. Hence technology as such can hardly explain these differences. What distinguishes different economies is their ability to utilize the existing technology in the most efficient and effective way and to adapt effectively to technological innovation. The same holds for the utilization of resources and the ability to adapt to external factors and react to random events. However, this capability depends precisely upon the features of the economic system, the actors it is based on, the interaction and coordination it provides, the incentives it furnishes, and the costs, risk, and uncertainty it imposes upon actors, individuals' features aside.
    Labor division among firms and among countries can certainly explain respectively why different types of firms co-exist within the same country and why different countries display different organizational structures. Yet that labor division is not simply the outcome of different levels of labor productivity or different factor endowments. It is also the outcome of different economic systems. These explain, directly, the preference for certain organizational solutions and, indirectly, the incentive to develop and use existing resources or implement technical progress. In fact, each particular economic system generates, due to its coordinating and selecting effect, characteristic and consistent patterns of transaction and compliance costs and governance requirements that make stable organizational forms and configurations convenient. Let us see how this influence works.
    Individual actors who enter the economic process present potentially great variance in both capabilities and personality. In efficiency-driven systems, these features may find a solution by means of organizations in the form, respectively, of specialization and governance.(FN36) However, organizations may be insufficient and ineffective in dealing with all the implications of variance and variability through time, in particular under conditions of imperfect or missing knowledge and information and excessive individuals' variance. In such a case, it is impossible to specify inter- and infra-organizational implicit and explicit contracts, routines do not adjust, opportunism is not restrained, and trust and reputation would be jeopardized. In fact, both spontaneous devices and third party enforcement, although certainly possible and useful, are not only imperfect and incomplete but they are also very costly if the threat overcomes a certain threshold.
    To avoid all this and keep variance and variability of individual features within limits that are manageable to organizations, the coordinating, knowledge standardizing, and disciplining effect of the economic system is necessary. This is so because of the cognitive, informational, and disciplining effect of coordination and the advantages this creates via externalities and complementarities. It is so also because deviant actors find it more costly and difficult to pursue their goals by establishing new organizations based on principles in contrast with the dominant features of the economic system (e.g., a capitalist firm in a centrally planned economic system or a nonprofit organization in a purely capitalist economic system). In this sense the economic system structures individual features along systemic dimensions.
    In a world of uncertainty, limits to individual capabilities, opportunism, various kinds of asymmetry, missing and imperfect knowledge, non-coinciding goals of economic actors, and other forms of variety, variance, and variability, distinct economic actors must sustain different transaction and compliance costs and difficulties in order to coordinate their decisions and activity. The following are the most important of such costs and disadvantages:
    * Allocation and governance costs (including the costs of defining, implementing, and controlling effective contracts, incentives, agency relations, trust, and reputation).
    * Coordination costs to streamline divergent interests and goals and to manage externalities and complementarities, and the incompatibilities and lock-ins that these create.
    * The costs of and barriers to information collection, elaboration, and transmission and knowledge production and diffusion.
    These costs and disadvantages are pervasive in any context. In a world like the one assumed here these costs may jeopardize economic activity. However, there are devices that can help control and reduce them. The most important such device is to operate within an economic system. In fact, individual features in the long run take form under the coordinating effect of the economic (and social and political) system, so that they form "shared mental models."(FN37) Such a shared mental (and behavioral) model produces predictability and complementary or coordinated goals. It thus helps the coordination of decision making and economic activity. Such a model includes the following:
    * A typical way of producing and diffusing information and knowledge.
    * Consistent arrangements of resource allocation (in particular, the features of the labor and capital markets).
    * A pattern for dealing with property rights (e.g., actual protection and contract enforcement) and of governance (including the market for ownership and management, protection of investors, a role for stakeholders, and the like).
    * A consistent budget constraint and organizational and financial discipline of economic actors.
    * Specific routines.
    This model creates transaction and compliance costs that have a typical level and structure. However, such costs are reduced in size and simpler in structure, and knowledge and information are more circumscribed but more detailed and of ready use compared with what they would be without the economic system (in a world of uncertainty, etc.). Finally, the economic system creates complementarities between actors and actions that can further reduce costs and disadvantages and strengthen incentives. Even supposing that historical development fails to produce an economic system, rational actors operating in an efficiency-driven economy should act in that sense.
    The operative importance of the economic system, then, lies in the fact that it helps to define--by coordinating and selecting economic institutions--the benefits and gains and the disadvantages and costs of economic activity. Consequently, the economic system contributes to an explanation of the existence of different organizational forms and configurations and to determination of the actual allocation of resources among particular organizational structures.(FN38) This is so for two sets of different reasons: the effect on individual actors and the consequences for the actors' interaction.
    As to the former, the economic system produces the coordination and consistency that attenuate cognitive and capability limits and decrease the impact of opportunism by making learning processes simpler and the choices and behavior of actors self-constrained, hence more stable and predictable. This reduces uncertainty and coordination costs and stimulates and supports the specialization of actors, their capabilities, and the production and diffusion of knowledge and information. In a competitive environment, such specialization produces superior and appropriable results at the cost of foregone opportunities in other directions and the cost of investment in system-specific assets.
    Concerning the consequences for the interaction of actors, this interaction takes place through rights and duties within specialized structures. The coordinated set of institutions that form the economic system defines rights and duties that govern the interaction among actors. Property rights are of outstanding importance among these. The economic system defines which property rights are admitted, the different forms they can have, how they are protected and enforced, the limits they are subject to, and the relation among property rights of different type. It is rights and duties and the gains and costs to which they give rise which define incentives to economic activity and to interaction with other actors. Each economic system needs specialized structures to manage and govern the economy. These governance structures may have jurisdiction over the entire economy, parts of it, or particular organizations. Examples are universal and specialized banks; stock and commodity exchanges; labor offices; plan offices; administrative offices; supervisory boards; boards of directors; codetermination, coparticipation, and self-management councils; and shareholder meetings. It is these governance structures that define transaction costs. A particular level and composition of transaction costs is typical of each economic system, because the latter is characterized by a consistent pattern of governance structures.
    In an efficacious economic system, advantages and gains offset the disadvantages, costs, and limitations that actors sustain in order to operate in an economic system (e.g., learning costs, the costs borne to internalize and conform with rules and to set up appropriate structures). Therefore, individual actors are able to take advantage of the net residual, albeit possibly in an asymmetric way. However, due to environmental and individual features, consistency and coordination are different in different economic systems. This gives rise to different organizational outcomes.


CONCLUSION
    In this paper I have explained that the co-existence of different efficacious economic systems derives from the variety, variance, and variability of the environment wherein the economic system is embedded and the features of individuals, including the goals that they pursue via economic activity. Under these conditions, and provided that the systems considered are reasonably efficacious, there are no economic reasons why different economic systems should converge to a unique economic system, even under the influence of globalization. The same applies, consequently, to organizational structures. Simply, such a supposedly superior economic system does not exist, and systemic efficacy is relative to the features of the environment and the individual actors.
    What are the implications of this conclusion for the theory of economic systems, for economic policies, and for organizational structures? The general implication is that there should not be a unique, global model of reference valid for any economy. Accordingly, the comparative study of different economic systems and research on the nature and logic of economic systems should have an important role in defining what are the environmental and individual elements that determine the particular nature and shape of the economic system and how they act. Moreover, it is important to understand how the economic system moulds individual features and how it helps to transform the environment. Since the economic system coordinates and selects institutions, it is important to explain theoretically and operationally how different institutions influence each other. Addressing such a critically important question helps to clarify the consequences that interaction among institutions has on policy choice and policy outcome.
    This is important for explanation of the extent to which a government can intervene in the economy, the methods and instruments it can use, and the goals it can pursue. Disregarding such interaction is at the roots of the many failures and the high costs of reform policies inspired by the desire to imitate successful economic systems and countries, but giving rise to so many unforeseen and unwanted consequences. Obviously, learning from successful cases is a crucial factor of progress. However, this should be done by adapting to existing conditions for the reasons cited above, the teachings of centuries of history apart. It is this, along with the necessary investment in reform, that makes reform policies sustainable and fruitful. Since systemic convergence could only derive from the disruption of systemic coordination and selection, and since this would be enormously costly, it would be better to abandon the idea of convergence and replace it with the study of the conditions that promote adaptation to globalization and the fruitful cooperation of countries endowed with different economic systems.
    As to organizations, their variety should be seen in most cases as richness and as insurance against the variability of the environment and individual features. This is so in at least two main senses. First, organizational variety is an efficacious companion of systemic variety, as seen above, and can support the performance of the economy. Second, organizational variety can be an economically efficient cradle of adaptation to environmental and individual change and systemic evolution, as Italian industrial districts and many other examples show.(FN39)
    Since different actors' features and environments generate distinct economic systems, they may produce alternative specialization patterns of economies and different investment strategies and time horizon of economic agents as dominant features of economies endowed with distinct economic systems. The comparison of different economic systems offers support to these conclusions. This is true both in the case of the comparison of alternative systems--such as the capitalist and the Soviet type or the Islamic systems(FN40)--and in that of variants of the same general system, such as the Anglo-American and Continental European or Japanese capitalisms.
    The lack of such a diversified systemic theory has been traditionally replaced with two different answers and approaches. First, pragmatism and some experimentation have been traditionally used in policies, particularly under the influence of politics. Outcomes have often been good, but such an answer is theoretically weak because it discounts the influence of many often contradictory and conflicting forces and goals. Second, single country models are important in both a positive and normative sense and have produced a great deal of valuable literature and policy outcomes.
    However, both these answers prevent the proper comparison of different experiences and deeper knowledge of the features and working of the economic system. In fact, they hamper the exchange of systemic- or country-specific knowledge and the assessment of the general validity of findings. In this way they may indirectly help to perpetuate consistent errors that derive from the utilization of unique positive and normative models, although they may be a sound basis upon which to revise the old paradigm.(FN41)
ADDED MATERIAL
    The author is in the Department of Economics, University of Trento. The research on which this paper is based has been financially sponsored by the Italian Ministry for University and Scientific-Technological Research (MURST). The author is grateful to Wladimir Andreff (Sorbonne University), James Angresano (Albertson College of Idaho), Gregory Grossman (University of California at Berkeley), the participants in the panel in the ASSA Annual Meeting (New Orleans, Louisiana, USA, January 5-7, 2001), and two anonymous referees for helpful comments on an earlier version of this paper. However, any responsibility for errors and weakness of analysis remains solely with the author.
    Table 1. The Relative Advantages of Alternative Capital Market Constructions


                                                      Set A     Set B
Basic costs of credit (+)                               80       100
Contracts (+)                                           20         0
Shift costs from set B to set A (+)                      0        10
Overall unit production cost                           100       100
Set B: Return from/costs of shifting to set A          100       110
    Table 2. The Relative Advantages of Alternative Organizations of Industry


                                                                Organization A    Organization B
Unit production costs (+)                                             80                 100
Social capital, network externalities (-)                              0                 -20
Shift costs from org. B to org. A(+)                                   0                  10
Overall unit production cost                                          80                  80
Org. B: Return from/costs of shifting to org. A                       80                  90
FOOTNOTES


REFERENCES
    Andreff, Wladimir. Les Multinationales Globales. Paris: Ed. La Découverte, 1996.
    Andreff, Wladimir. "Multi-Faceted East-West Economic Convergence in Europe." Economic Systems 23, no. 2 (June 1998): 130-135.
    Andreff, Wladimir. "Globalization of Uneven Development through Foreign Direct Investment in Transition Economies." Paper presented at the 3rd International Meeting of Economists on Globalization and Development Problems, Havana, Cuba. January 29-February 2, 2001.
    Angresano, James. Comparative Economics. 2d ed. Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1996.
    Aoki, Masahiko. "Toward an Economic Model of the Japanese Firm." Journal of Economic Literature 28, no. 1 (1990): 1-27.
    Barca, Fabrizio, Katsuhito Iwai, Ugo Pagano, and Sandro Trento. "The Divergence of the Italian and Japanese Corporate Governance Models: The Role of Institutional Shocks." Economic Systems 23, no. 1 (March 1999): 35-59.
    Baumol, William J. Entrepreneurship, Management, and the Structure of Payoffs. Cambridge, Mass.: The MIT Press, 1993.
    Beasley, William G. The Rise of Modern Japan. New York, N.Y.: St. Martin's Press, 2000.
    Bebchuk, Lucian, and Mark J. Roe. "A Theory of Path Dependence in Corporate Ownership and Governance." In Corporate Governance Today, The Sloan Project on Corporate Governance at Columbia Law School, 575-599. New York, N.Y.: Columbia Law School Press, May 1998.
    Bell, John. Single or Joint Venturing? A Comprehensive Approach to Foreign Entry Mode Choice. Aldershot: Avebury Publishers, 1996.
    Brioschi, Francesco, Maria Sole Brioschi, and Giulio Cainelli. "Dal distretto industriale al gruppo industriale. Alcune evidenze empiriche sull'evoluzione del capitalismo locale in Italia" (From Industrial District to District Group. Some Empirical Evidence on the Evolution of Local Capitalism in Italy). Paper prepared for the meeting of the MURST Research Project on Infrastrutture, Competitività, Livelli di Governo:dall'Economia Italiana all'Economia Europea, Lecce, Italy, January 19-20, 2001.
    Dallago, Bruno. "Convergence, Evolution, and Disruption of Economic Systems." In Convergence and System Change: The Convergence Hypothesis in the Light of Transition in Eastern Europe, edited by Bruno Dallago, Horst Brezinski, and Wladimir Andreff, 123-148. Aldershot: Dartmouth Publishers, 1992.
    Dallago, Bruno. Sistemi Economici Comparati (Comparative Economic Systems). Rome: La Nuova Italia Scientifica, 1993.
    Dallago, Bruno. "Investment, Systemic Efficiency, and Distribution." Kyklos 49, no.4 (1996): 615-641.
    Dallago, Bruno. "Small and Medium Size Enterprises and Local Productive Systems: The Italian Experience and Hungary." The Institute of Economic Research, Discussion Paper Series A, no. 384. Tokyo: Hitotsubashi University, December 1999.
    Dallago, Bruno, Horst Brezinski, and Wladimir Andreff, eds. Convergence and System Change: The Convergence Hypothesis in the Light of Transition in Eastern Europe. Aldershot: Dartmouth Publishers, 1992.
    Denzau, Arthur T., and Douglass. C. North. "Shared Mental Models: Ideologies and Institutions." Kyklos 47, no. 1 (1994): 3-31.
    Dietl, Helmut M. Capital Markets and Corporate Governance in Japan, Germany, and the United States. Organizational Response to Market Inefficiencies. London: Routledge, 1998.
    Dore, Ronald. Taking Japan Seriously. A Confucian Perspective on Leading Economic Issues. London: The Athlone Press, 1987.
    "Firm and its Boundaries, The." Journal of Economic Perspectives 12, no. 4, (fall 1998): 73-150.
    Flath, David. The Japanese Economy. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2000.
    Groenewegen, John. "Institutions of Capitalisms: American, European, and Japanese Systems Compared." Journal of Economic Issues 31, no. 2 (June 1997): 333-47.
    Guerrieri, Paolo. "Globalisation and the National Specialization Patterns." Economic Systems 23, no. 2 (June 1998): 136-142.
    Guerrieri, Paolo, and Stefano Manzocchi. "Patterns of Trade and Foreign Direct Investment in European Manufacturing: Convergence or Polarization?" Rivista italiana degli economisti I, no. 2 (August 1996): 213-231.
    Kaplan, Steven N. "Corporate Governance and Corporate Performance: A Comparison of Germany, Japan, and the U.S." In Comparative Corporate Governance: Essays and Materials, edited by Klaus J. Hopt and Eddy Wymeersch, 195-210. Berlin and New York, N.Y.: Walter de Gruyter, 1997. Also in Studies in International Corporate Finance and Governance Systems: A Comparison of the U.S., Japan, and Europe, edited by Donald H. Chew, 251-258. Oxford and New York, N.Y.: Oxford University Press, 1997.
    Kester, Carl W. "Governance, Contracting, and Investment Horizon: A Look at Japan and Germany." Journal of Applied and Corporate Finance 5, no.2 (1992): 83-98.
    Koopmans, Tjalling C., and John Michael Montias. "On the Description and Comparison of Economic Systems." In Comparison of Economic Systems, edited by Alexander Eckstein, 27-78. Berkeley, Calif.: University of California Press, 1971.
    Kornai, János. "What the Change of System Does and Does Not Mean." Economic Systems 23, no. 2 (June 1998): 160-166.
    La Porta, Rafael, Florencio Lopez-de-Silanes, and Andrei Shleifer. "Corporate Ownership around the World." Journal of Finance 54 (1999): 471-517.
    Maddison, Angus. Dynamic Forces in Capitalist Development. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1991.
    Maddison, Angus. Monitoring the World Economy 1820-1992. Paris: OECD, 1995.
    Nobes, Christopher W. Accounting Harmonisation in Europe. London: Financial Times Management Report, 1995.
    Pryor, Frederic. Property and Industrial Organization in Communist and Capitalist Nations. Bloomington, Ind.: Indiana University Press, 1973.
    Rodrik, Dani. "Globalization in Perspective." The Journal of Economic Perspectives 2, no. 4 (fall 1998): 3-72.
    Rosser, J. Barkley Jr., and Marina V. Rosser. Comparative Economics in a Transforming World Economy. Chicago, Ill.: Irwin Publishing, 1996.
    Sansom, George B. Japan: A Short Cultural History. 1946. Reprint, Tokyo: Charles E. Tuttle Company, 1973.
    Stiglitz, Joseph E. "More Instruments and Broader Goals: Moving toward the Post-Washington Consensus." WIDER Annual Lectures 2, Helsinki: UNU/WIDER, January 1998.
    Stuart, Robert C. "Comparative Economic Systems and Economics: Contemporary Perspectives." Paper presented at the ASSA annual meeting, New Orleans, La., January 5-7, 2001.
    Tinbergen, Jan. "Do Communist and Free Economies Show Converging Patterns?" Soviet Studies 12 (1961): 333-341.
    Tsuru, Shigeto. Japan's Capitalism: Creative Defeat and Beyond. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1993.
    Uvalic, Milica. The PEPPER Report. Brussels: Commission of European Communities, 1991.
    Whitley, Richard D. "Eastern Asian Enterprise Structures and the Comparative Analysis of Forms of Business Organization." Organization Studies 11, no. 1 (1990): 47-74.
    Williamson, Oliver E. "Human Actors and Economic Organization." University of California, Berkeley, 1999. Photocopy.
    Yunus, Muhammad. Vers un Mond san Pauvreté. Paris: &Eacute;ditions Jean-Claude Lattès, 1997.

使用道具 举报

Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16

声望
53
寄托币
31146
注册时间
2001-10-7
精华
284
帖子
171

Sagittarius射手座 荣誉版主

10
发表于 2004-4-1 23:38:30 |只看该作者

TITLE: Crony capitalism goes global: Bush Sr. and others open doors for th

TITLE:  Crony capitalism goes global: Bush Sr. and others open doors for the Carlyle Group
SOURCE:  The Nation 274 no12 11-16 Ap 1 2002

(C) Reprinted with permission from The Nation magazine. For subscription information please contact 1-800-333-8536. Web site: www.TheNation.com

    William Conway, managing director and co-founder of the Carlyle Group, was talking recently about the media coverage of his bank and the cast of ex-Presidents and former officials, including George H.W. Bush, James Baker III and Frank Carlucci, on its payroll. "One of the words that has recently cropped up as an adjective around us--and I love this adjective--is the 'secretive' Carlyle Group," he said in an interview in his offices overlooking Pennsylvania Avenue in downtown Washington. "What's the secret? I don't think we have many secrets. The reality is, we're a group of businessmen who have made an enormous amount of money for our investors by making good investments over the past fifteen years."
    To give Conway his due, Carlyle has done exceedingly well for the 435 pension funds, banks and investment funds--40 percent from overseas--that have entrusted their money to one of the world's largest private equity funds. Under the leadership of Carlucci, a former CIA deputy director who was Defense Secretary in the Reagan Administration, Carlyle has become the nation's eleventh-largest defense contractor, a major arms exporter to Saudi Arabia and Turkey, one of the biggest foreign investors in South Korea and Taiwan, and a key player in global telecommunications, wireless, real estate and healthcare markets. Since 1987 it has invested $6.4 billion in 233 transactions, with a rate of return of 36 percent on its completed investments. Carlyle currently has $12.5 billion invested.
    "Their basic nature is not to be a long-term investor but buy low and sell high," said Philip Finnegan, an analyst with the Teal Group, a Beltway company that tracks the aerospace industry. "They always look for an exit strategy in whatever they buy. They have a sense of the stability of the business because of the accumulated expertise they have."
    That's where Carlyle's global network of statesmen and former officials comes in. Bush is Carlyle's senior adviser on Asia and makes his money by giving speeches at Carlyle's investment conferences. Baker, who was Bush's Secretary of State, is Carlyle's senior counselor and a member of the firm's Asia, Europe and Japan advisory boards. John Major, the former British prime minister, was named chairman of Carlyle Europe last year. Carlyle's advisory boards are peppered with corporate executives from Boeing, BMW, Toshiba and other big multinationals, and men of influence like former Bundesbank president Karl Otto Pohl, former Thai prime minister Anand Panyarachun and former US ambassador to Japan (and former Speaker of the House) Thomas Foley. Carlyle's new asset management group is run by Afsaneh Beschloss, the former treasurer and chief investment officer of the World Bank.
    By hiring enough former officials to fill a permanent shadow cabinet, Carlyle has brought political influence to a new level and created a twenty-first-century version of capitalism that blurs any line between politics and business. In a sense, Carlyle may be the ultimate in privatization: the use of a private company to nurture public policy--and then reap its benefits in the form of profit. Although the fund claims to operate like any other investment bank, it's undeniable that its stable of statesmen-entrepreneurs have the ability to tap into networks in government and commerce, both at home and abroad, for advance intelligence about companies about to be sold and spun off, or government budgets and policies about to be implemented, and then transform that knowledge into investment strategies that dovetail nicely with US military foreign and domestic policy.


HOW THE CARLYLE SYSTEM WORKS
    A good analogy to the Carlyle system is a Japanese tradition known as amakudari (literally, "descent from heaven"). Under this system, senior officials from Japanese ministries retire, only to be instantly hired as senior advisers by the companies and industry groups they were paid to regulate. "What we're really talking about is a systematic merging of the private and public sectors to the point where the distinctions get lost," said Chalmers Johnson, president of the Japan Policy Research Institute and author of two acclaimed books on the Japanese system of governance. "The Carlyle Group is a perfect example. It's the use of former government officials for their access to government bureaucracies to determine contractual relations. It's inside knowledge--knowing where the government is going to spend money and then investing in it."
    In turn, Carlyle executives influence policy--sometimes profoundly. On March 12 Carlucci, who is chairman of the US-Taiwan Business Council, a coalition of US multinationals doing business in Taiwan, invited Tang Yao-Ming, Taiwan's Defense Minister, to attend a closed-door summit of US and Taiwanese defense officials sponsored by the council and key US military contractors, including Carlyle's United Defense Industries. Tang's visit, which was capped by a meeting with US Deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, marked the highest-level defense contacts between Taipei and Washington since diplomatic relations were severed in 1979--and paralleled President Bush's push to expand arms sales to Taiwan, where Carlyle has significant investments. Carlyle people also testify frequently before government panels: senior adviser Arthur Levitt, the former chairman of the Securities and Exchange Commission, has been ubiquitous before Congressional hearings on Enron.
    Carlyle's investment philosophy, as described in its brochures, is to focus "on industries we know and in which we have a competitive advantage," in particular "federally regulated or impacted industries such as aerospace/defense." Its capital is siphoned into fourteen funds, seven focused on US industries and real estate, four on Europe and three on Asia. The $1.3 billion Carlyle Partner II fund is the majority owner of United Defense, maker of the Bradley Fighting Vehicle and other weapons systems, and owns Vought Aircraft, the world's largest supplier of commercial and military airline parts. Carlyle's largest acquisition took place two years ago in South Korea, when its $750 million Asia Buyout Fund invested $145 million to buy a controlling stake in KorAm Bank. Through United Defense, Carlyle owns Bofors Defense, a Swedish manufacturer of naval guns and other weapons. In its latest deal, finalized March 13, Carlyle is investing $50 million in Conexant Systems, a spinoff from defense giant Rockwell International, to manufacture silicon wafers for wireless communications and Internet supply markets around the world.
    The Conexant deal illustrates the extraordinary mix of business acumen and contacts that makes Carlyle tick. Carlyle's entry into wireless is being led by William Kennard, who regulated the wireless industry as chairman of the Federal Communications Commission before being hired as managing director of Carlyle's global telecommunications group. Carlyle's investment will help Conexant expand its already sizable market in China, where its wireless division recently won approval to supply a key cell-phone technology to state-owned China Unicom, the second-largest telecom provider in the world's largest wireless market. In a convenient twist, China Unicom's national network is operated by Canada's Nortel Networks under a contract signed during a visit to Beijing by Carlucci, who was Nortel's chairman from 2000 to 2001.
    A classic example of how Carlyle's political connections work was the Pentagon's decision last year to develop United Defense's Crusader mobile artillery system. The decision to fund the Crusader, which could eventually cost $11 billion, came after years of strenuous objections from senior military planners, who said it was outdated, too heavy and of little use in contemporary warfare. But United Defense's modifications to the system--and a lobbying campaign by a handful of lawmakers who received a total of $300,000 in donations from a United Defense political action committee--apparently made the difference.
    Then came September 11 and its aftermath. With the Crusader contract in hand and President Bush's war in Afghanistan well under way, Carlyle decided the time was ripe to sell some of its United Defense holdings on the stock market. The initial public offering on December 14 raised $237 million for Carlyle. In January United Defense, whose board of directors includes Carlucci and John Shalikashvili, former chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, said its fourth-quarter profits had risen 62 percent, due in large part to sales of the Crusader, which received $472 million in the Pentagon's latest budget.
    Those events raised a few eyebrows, particularly at a time when the media were dishing out daily revelations about Enron's political influence in Washington. Columnist Paul Krugman described the Pentagon's policy switch on the Crusader as a "very nice gift" from Rumsfeld to Carlucci, whom Rumsfeld brought into government, and an example of "crony capitalism," the Asian model of capitalism scorned by US economists and the International Monetary Fund [for more on Carlucci, see "Company Man" at www.thenation.com]. Conway, who is chairman of United Defense, scoffed at the speculation. "Frank [Carlucci] is not going to lobby somebody in the Defense Department about a program for Carlyle," he said. As for the timing of the IPO, which was organized after the hijack attacks, "no one wants to be a beneficiary of September 11," he said.


FRIENDS IN HIGH PLACES
    Bush Sr., who chairs the annual meeting of Carlyle's Asian Advisory Board, has not hesitated to communicate with his son regarding policies that could affect Carlyle and other US investors in the region--particularly South Korea, where Carlyle could soon have an investment stake of more than $2 billion. Last spring, after President Bush stuck a knife in Kim Dae Jung's sunshine policies by saying North Korea couldn't be trusted, Bush Sr. sent the President a memo written by Donald Gregg, his former National Security Adviser who once served as CIA station chief in Seoul, urging the new Administration to ease its hard-line policies.
    A few weeks later, in a decision the New York Times described as "the first concrete evidence of the elder Bush's hand in a specific policy arena," George W. said he was willing to talk to the North "anytime, anyplace." But the President's "axis of evil" speech on January 29, which North Korea took to be a near-declaration of war, ended any hopes of rapprochement and led Pyongyang to cancel a February visit by Gregg and several other former diplomats. Bush Jr. tried to soften his rhetoric during his late February visit to Seoul but was met instead by the largest anti-American demonstrations of his career. Conway, however, was sanguine about the investment climate in Korea. Bush's axis speech "doesn't add to my level of concern," he said.
    In Europe, Carlyle's strategy is to invest in companies seeking to become Europewide and global players. Conway, who attends the annual meetings of the European board, which are chaired by Britain's Major, described the advisory boards as an expansive process where advisers strategize about how to create and nurture companies with a global reach. At the last meeting of the European board, the consensus was that "all these companies that have been more single-country companies are going to have to expand onto the European stage and ultimately a global stage," he said. "Frankly, if they don't, they'll have a tough time competing with the Americans and the Asians." To implement the strategy, Carlyle acquired and combined three companies, from Italy, Germany and the United States; in another case, it combined two German and Canadian auto firms.
    In buying Bofors, Carlyle and United Defense crossed into an extremely sensitive policy area. To smooth the process, a member of Carlyle's European board "helped us on that even though it was an acquisition by a US company of a Swedish company," said Conway. "Most people, when you talk about defense assets, tend to get a little bit sensitive, just as we do in this country."
    Sensitivity is one lesson Carlyle has learned the hard way. Last September, less than three weeks after the attacks on the twin towers and the Pentagon, the Wall Street Journal disclosed that the bin Laden family of Saudi Arabia had committed at least $2 million to one of Carlyle's funds. Carlyle quickly returned the money. Conway, in the bank's first public comments on the incident, said the decision to part ways with the bin Ladens was made at the senior partnership level. "Anything that had the word bin Laden in it, you just didn't want to be associated with it," he said. "Its not that the people we were dealing with had done anything wrong." But in the end, "we said, 'Gee whiz, we'll buy you out at fair market value and get on with our life.'"


CARLYLE'S STRUCTURE
    The Carlyle Group is owned by forty-nine managing partners, who hold 94.5 percent of Carlyle's private stock. (They include Baker and Major, whose Carlyle holdings are worth at least $200 million if the stock is equally divided.) The remaining 5.5 percent is held by the California Public Employees Retirement System [see "CalPERS and Carlyle," page 15]. The investors in Carlyle's various funds include US investment banks Goldman Sachs and Salomon Smith Barney; investment authorities in Abu Dhabi, Kuwait and Brunei; giant insurers like American International Group and the labor-oriented Union Labor Life; public pension funds in Ohio, Florida, Michigan and New York; and the corporate pension funds of American Airlines, Boeing, BP Amoco, GM and the World Bank.
    Carlyle has distinguished itself from competitors like Kohlberg Kravis Roberts and Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette by branding its name on its fourteen investment funds, as Fidelity does with mutual funds. David Snow, editor of PrivateEquityCentral. net, an industry newsletter that recently named Carlyle its "deal team of the year," said the innovation was the inspiration of David Rubenstein, the lone Democrat among Carlyle's founding partners. "They've taken the name they built in defense and are stamping it on funds with different expertise," he said. "That's the direction the private equity industry is moving in." Carlyle's practice of hiring influential statesmen and politicians has also inspired imitation. Al Gore, for example, was recently hired by Metropolitan West Financial of California to start a private equity practice, and Forstmann Little, a fund co-managed by Erskine Bowles, President Clinton's former Chief of Staff, lists Newt Gingrich and Henry Kissinger among its advisers.
    Carlyle doesn't provide investment figures by industry. But its focus on military and government-regulated industries is illustrated by the breakdown of Carlyle's Partner II fund, its primary vehicle for US manufacturing, which has 24 percent of its capital in defense-related companies, 23 percent in commercial aerospace and 24 percent in telecommunications and energy. Similarly in its Asia fund, 52 percent of Carlyle's investments are in financial services, where governments are deeply involved in restructuring the region's banks; 17 percent are in telecommunications; and 31 percent are in cable TV, industries that are being privatized and are under strict government supervision.
    Carlucci, the mastermind of the bank's defense investments, came on board in 1989 after serving in the Reagan Administration. Carlyle says that Carlucci has never lobbied the government. He does, however, get invited to government events of great use to Carlyle simply because he is Frank Carlucci. According to recently declassified documents from the Office of the Secretary of Defense, Carlucci met with Rumsfeld twice last year--not as a representative of Carlyle but as a former Defense Secretary and National Security Adviser. The meetings, on February 9 and October 19, were organized by Rumsfeld to discuss defense issues and the war on terrorism, and included other luminaries from the national security establishment, including Kissinger and Caspar Weinberger (Shalikashvili was there too).
    Rumsfeld's correspondence and Carlucci's subsequent comments underscore the utility of such meetings to Carlyle. After the February event, Carlucci and Rumsfeld agreed to follow up with discussions on how "to cut the cost of defense infrastructure and reinvest the savings in modernization and other priority programs"--key issues for United Defense. Ten days after the October 19 session, which included Wolfowitz, Carlucci offered an assessment of the situation in Afghanistan that exactly reflects the Bush Administration's endless-war scenario. "We as Americans have to recognize that [terrorism] is more or less a permanent position," Carlucci told a New York audience of business executives and labor leaders that included AFL-CIO president John Sweeney. "We're going to have to live with this kind of phenomenon for the rest of our lives."


LOOKING EAST
    Where Carlucci has led Carlyle's foray into defense, Bush Sr. and Baker have helped the bank forge deep ties with the Middle East. Just after his son was sworn into office, Bush was invited by Saudi ambassador Prince Bandar bin Sultan bin Abdulaziz to speak to potential US investors in Saudi Arabia at a two-day conference in Houston. Bandar, who is close to the Bush family, was not relying purely on friendship, however: The Washington Post recently disclosed that Bandar has invested in Carlyle, along with his father, Prince Sultan, the Saudi defense minister. (Bush Jr. also has a Carlyle connection: In the early 1990s he was on the board of Caterair, a Carlyle company that provided in-flight food services to airlines but never made a profit.)
    Through a 51 percent joint venture with the Saudi government, Carlyle's United Defense provides tactical training and maintenance for the thousands of Bradley Fighting Vehicles purchased by the Royal Saudi Land Forces after the Gulf War. Carlyle had a long relationship with Saudi Arabia through BDM Corporation and Vinnell Corporation, which train the Saudi National Guard and were sold to TRW in 1998. In the early 1990s Carlyle advised Al-Waleed bin Talal--the Saudi prince whose $10 million donation to the World Trade Center victims' fund was rejected by Rudy Giuliani--on his US investments, including a $600 million bailout of Citicorp, now Citigroup.
    Last April, Bush Sr. led a Carlyle delegation to Turkey, where Rubenstein negotiated a joint venture with the Koc Group, Turkey's largest conglomerate, which has holdings in energy, telecommunications and defense. During a dinner with Turkish business executives, Bush reminded the audience of Turkey's support during the Gulf War and promised to "help Turkey as we did in the past." FNSS, a joint venture between United Defense and the Nurol Group, is Turkey's largest manufacturer of armored vehicles and exports to Malaysia and other nations.
    Over the past three years, in addition to visiting Turkey, Bush has been to South Korea, Saudi Arabia, Australia, France, Thailand and Hong Kong on Carlyle's behalf. In his speeches to investment conferences, said Conway, Bush "talks about the world, what he sees, what he thinks. Period." Carlyle's newly hired spokesperson, Chris Ullman, would not discuss Bush's compensation or his schedule, but added that Bush "does not and has never represented Carlyle before other governments or government officials. He has made no business deals for Carlyle."
    Investors, however, recognize that the Bush name--and the many contacts Bush developed as President, CIA director and ambassador to the UN--carry tremendous weight as he travels around the world on behalf of Carlyle. "Nothing beats the ability to have George Bush call up some contact he's known for the last twenty years to comment on the worthiness of a particular deal," said Pat Macht, a spokesperson for CalPERS, after consulting with investment managers about Bush's role in Carlyle. That is particularly true in Asia, where personal relationships are key to business deals and Bush chairs the annual meeting of Carlyle's Asian Advisory Board.
    Carlyle started its $750 million Asia fund three years ago to invest in countries trying to recover from the Asian financial crisis. Under pressure from the IMF and the US Treasury, the structure of Asian capitalism has been changing from family-controlled conglomerates, such as the Korean chaebols Daewoo and Hyundai, to leaner companies run by professional managers, hired in many cases by foreign owners. Governments, meanwhile, have abandoned social policies that once guaranteed a portion of the work force lifetime jobs and made it difficult to fire workers. That's even true in Korea, where militant unions have given the country a bad reputation in the eyes of foreign investors.
    "Contrary to popular belief, major layoffs are being done in Korea," Jonathan Colby, a former aide to Kissinger who is one of Carlyle's managing directors for Asia, told a recent Asian investors conference in New York. With Asian banks holding billions of dollars in bad loans, "being able to tap private equity is crucial to long-term growth in Asia," Ray Hood, director of Asian investments for State Street Bank, said at the same event. For companies like Carlyle, Asia "is where the rewards will be in the next few years. Investment returns will be a complete steal."
    In Japan, Carlyle is positioning itself alongside Goldman Sachs, Newbridge Capital, the Ripplewood Group and other US investment banks in buying up nonperforming loans and distressed assets, which are valued at more than $1 trillion. "Just as in Korea you can make some investments by taking a piece of the chaebols, I think the same thing is true in Japan, where you have these overleveraged, underperforming companies," said Conway.
    These investment strategies mesh with policies of financial deregulation, structural reform and privatization, which have been publicly endorsed by President Bush, whose Administration is deeply concerned that a collapse of Japan's financial system could imperil the US-Japan security alliance. Last July, when Japanese Prime Minister Junichiro Koizumi visited Bush to seek his help in resolving Japan's financial woes, Japanese reporters blinked in astonishment as George W. explained at some length the importance of restructuring bad loans and banks from his experience as an oil executive and Texas governor during the S&L disaster.
    So far, Carlyle's Asia fund has made four acquisitions: KorAm Bank, whose value has almost doubled since it was purchased in 2000; Taiwan Broadband, that country's fourth-largest cable company, in which Carlyle has invested $187 million; Mercury Communications, a telecom manufacturer recently spun off from the bankrupt Daewoo Group, for $49 million; and Pacific Department Stores, a joint venture with a Taiwan group that operates a chain of retail stores in mainland China, for $43 million.
    Carlyle's Japan fund recently agreed to make its first acquisition, a 90 percent stake, worth $28 million, in the security trucking subsidiary of the bankrupt Daiei Group, Japan's largest retailer. Carlyle Asia is about to close its third acquisition in Korea, where Carlyle and J.P. Morgan have reportedly offered $1.2 billion to buy Kumho Industrial, the world's tenth-largest tire maker and a major exporter to the United States and China. China, in fact, may be where Carlyle is heading in the long term. "We are very focused on South Korea today, but China is our priority market of tomorrow," Michael Kim, Carlyle's managing director in Seoul, told the Daily Deal in January.
    All of this is good news for Carlyle's family of investors, who seem nonplussed by the questions swirling around the firm. "I don't see what the issue is with Carlyle, except that there are some people who just don't like President Bush," said Michael Flaherman, chairman of the CalPERS investment committee. But as America has learned from the Enron fiasco, the mix of big business and politics can lead to disastrous investments, poor public policy and further erosion of the democratic process. The Carlyle system, where former Presidents, prime ministers, diplomats and industry regulators capitalize on their careers to make money for themselves and their clients, may be perfectly legal. Yet as Japan's experience over the past decade shows, even the most vaunted economies can sink--and sink fast--when the line between public interest and private profit disappears. Outside of the conservative Judicial Watch and the muckraking Center for Public Integrity, there has been little public interest in the Carlyle system of capitalism and where it is going. Congress, meanwhile, is too busy seeking Carlyle's advice even to ask the question. The people who run Carlyle may hate the word secrecy, but their words and actions make it impossible to know where the policy-making ends and the money-making begins.
ADDED MATERIAL
    Tim Shorrock (tshorrock51@hotmail.com) has been reporting about Asia, globalization and finance for more than twenty years, for many publications at home and abroad. Research support was provided by the Investigative Fund of the Nation Institute.
    DIGITAL VISION

使用道具 举报

Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16

声望
53
寄托币
31146
注册时间
2001-10-7
精华
284
帖子
171

Sagittarius射手座 荣誉版主

11
发表于 2004-4-1 23:38:54 |只看该作者

AUTHOR: BRINK LINDSEY

AUTHOR:  BRINK LINDSEY
TITLE:  THE LONG GOODBYE: THE DREAM OF CENTRAL CONTROL DIES HARD
SOURCE:  The American Spectator 35 no2 44-51 Mr/Ap 2002

The magazine publisher is the copyright holder of this article and it is reproduced with permission. Further reproduction of this article in violation of the copyright is prohibited. To contact the publisher: http://www.spectator.org/

    Near Gorky Park, on the banks of the Moskva River, lies the Graveyard of Fallen Monuments. It is located on the grounds of the New Tretyakov Gallery--a lifeless, white hulk of a building that houses the premier collection of paintings from the school of Soviet Socialist Realism. Stroll the museum's uncrowded exhibits and you will see such forgotten masterpieces as Yefim Cheptsov's "Meeting of the Village Communist Cell," Arkady Platsov's "Tractor Drivers' Supper" and Pyotor Kotov's "Building the Kuznetsk Metal Works Blast Furnace." Walk outside, turn left and you enter the graveyard.
    Scattered over a few acres are the toppled icons of the Soviet faith. The star of the collection is the towering statue of Felix Dzerzhinsky, founder of the Soviet secret police, which stood in Lubyanka Square in front of KGB headquarters until it was hauled down after the failed coup of 1991. Statues and busts of Lenin can be found aplenty, and there is even a red marble statue of Stalin--his face partially shattered, staring impassively over a gruesome jumble of stone heads penned in concrete-and-barbed-wire cages.
    When I visited it in 1999, toward the end of a warm July afternoon, the graveyard hosted a thin crowd of visitors. Little groups walked quietly along its concrete paths, in and out of small groves of trees; couples sat on park benches in the overgrown, unmowed grass. There was a refreshment stand in one corner, near the museum. A few people sat at umbrella tables; canned gin and tonic was their drink of choice.
    In the Graveyard of Fallen Monuments, the soaring ambitions and ruthless power of the Soviet era have been reduced to kitsch. But the mocking spirit of the place wrestles with a deep and heavy sense of gloom. In the hushed stillness and lengthening shadows, the cruel gazes of the fallen leaders still cast a pall--still chill the soul with their inhuman, all-too-human arrogance. The past, though dead, still haunts.
    And so it is throughout all of Moscow. The smirk of disillusionment is everywhere in evidence. You can buy McLenin T-shirts in the Arbat, or Prime Nostalgia cigarettes in any train station (your choice of Lenin or Stalin on the pack); you can sit in a karaoke bar on Tverskaya and listen to young people singing revolutionary anthems as a comedy routine; you can gaze out at the Kremlin wall over a burger and potato skins from the T.G. I. Friday's just outside Red Square. And yet Lenin still lies in his tomb; the great Stalinist Gothic towers loom on the skyline; a large statue of Marx glowers in Revolutionary Square; and the metro escalators plunge into weird phantasmagorias of socialist triumphalism. Moscow itself is one large Graveyard of Fallen Monuments.
    The grip of the failed past is palpable in the former world capital of the Communist revolution, but it can be felt to a greater or lesser extent in every corner of the planet. For Soviet-style communism was but an extreme manifestation of a much broader vision that animated much of the history of the 20th century: the dream of centralized, top-down control over the course of economic development. That dream has now expired in universal failure. It died in the United States and Western Europe during the stagflation of the 1970s. It died in China when Deng Xiaoping declared: "It doesn't matter if the cat is black or white, so long as it catches mice." It died in Latin America during the debt crisis and lost decade of the 1980s. It died in the Soviet Empire with the collapse of the Berlin Wall. And it died in East Asia with the bursting of the Japanese bubble and the financial crisis of 1997-98.
    The death of that misbegotten dream, more than any other single factor, has been responsible for the process conveniently summarized by the catchword "globalization." After all, there was really no possibility of anything like a truly global economy as long as large parts of the globe explicitly renounced participation in a worldwide division of labor. But over the past couple of decades, barriers to the free movement of goods, services and capital have teetered and fallen and companies, investors and consumers have rushed to fill the breach. As a result, a larger share of world economic activity is now exposed to foreign participation and competition than at any other time in human history.
    The liberalization of international transactions is only one aspect of a larger pattern of reform. As faith in government controls has dissipated, markets have been given wider play, not only in shaping economic relations between nations, but in shaping them within nations as well. The willingness to subject domestic economic actors to foreign competition has gone hand in hand with the willingness to embrace competition at home. Trade and investment liberalization are thus of a piece with a broad array of market-oriented policies: in particular, the privatization of state-owned industries; commitment to a monetary policy of price stability; elimination of price and entry controls that sustained domestic monopolies and oligopolies; the resurrection of labor markets; the reform of punitive tax systems; and the overhaul of financial institutions to make the allocation of capital more responsive to market returns.
    But the rolling worldwide disenchantment with centralized control has not left market forces with a clear field on which to operate--far from it. The move toward more liberal policies has occurred amidst the ruins of the old order and so has had to contend with grossly deformed conditions. The transition, as a consequence, has been wrenching and often brutally painful. And the transition is far from complete. The world economy is littered still with the wreckage of discredited systems; everywhere that wreckage constrains the present and obscures the future.
    Contrary to the conventional wisdom, the present era of globalization does not represent the unchecked ascendancy of market forces. Rather, we live today in the midst of an ongoing and uncertain struggle between the revitalization of markets and the dead hand of the collectivist past. Call it the invisible hand versus the dead hand.
    It is October 15, 2000, and Boston, like other American cities, is abuzz with the annual Muster Day festivities. Throughout the city, 45-year-old veterans and 21-year-old inductees, accompanied by friends and family, head to industrial army offices for the formal ceremonies. Meanwhile, thousands throng the broad, tree-lined avenues of downtown to view the great parade, while the city's sprawling, wooded parks are scenes of picnics and concerts and speeches and rallies.
    Out in the suburbs, smaller celebrations can be found in nearly every public square. In one typical get-together, several families have gathered in their neighborhood green for games and a cookout. The guests of honor include one neighborhood man who was mustered out today and two young women from down the block who were just inducted. The veteran's breast pocket is adorned not only with his gold industrial insignia, but also with all the medals and ribbons earned during his years of service; the two inductees proudly sport their simple iron badges of third-grade rank.
    As the late afternoon sun breaks momentarily through the clouds, the modest beauty of this simple patriotic ritual hits home. The reds, yellows and oranges of the peaking autumn foliage ignite to their full, fleeting perfection, while the splashing arcs of the square's central fountain shimmer and sparkle. Framing the square, the stately columned facades of the dining hall, laundry and distribution center cast bold, sharp shadows. And off in the distance, the great domes and pinnacles of downtown, visible through a break in the trees, take on a golden glow.
    As afternoon turns to evening, people begin to head home and a gentle rain starts to fall. The sidewalk covering unfurls automatically and everyone stays dry and comfortable. An older man, holding the hand of his young grandson, explains that a long time ago people carried personal rain screens called umbrellas, which then dripped water on everyone around them. "Do you think there's a lesson to this story?" the grandfather asks. "Yes," the little boy replies quickly, as if he has heard similar questions many times before, "in the age of individualism everybody had to fend for himself, but now in the modern age we all take care of each other."
    This strange Boston is obviously not the one of contemporary reality. It is instead a city of unfulfilled prophecy. The previous vignette attempts to capture the Boston imagined over a century ago by Edward Bellamy, author of the bestselling Looking Backward: 2000-1887. The book tells the story of one Julian West, who falls into a hypnotic trance in 1887 and lies in a state of suspended animation until a chance discovery leads to his reawakening in 2000.
    West is reborn in a world reborn--where total centralization of economic decision-making in the hands of the state has created an earthly paradise. Gone are the roiling labor troubles, the business crashes and the dark forebodings of social collapse. Gone are the scourges of hunger and want. This radical change has occurred, not through violent revolution, but as a natural outgrowth of the consolidation of economic decision-making by big business.
    Under the new system, the national economy is organized as one great industrial army, at the pinnacle of which the president of the United States serves as general-in-chief. Service in the army is compulsory for all ablebodied men and women between the ages of 21 and 45 (although doctors, teachers and artists serve outside the army). The demand for particular jobs is matched to the available supply by adjustments in the daily working hours (more arduous, less attractive jobs have shorter hours); there is, however, no distinction between jobs as to wages and, indeed, no system of wages at all. Rather, every citizen of the country, regardless of age or occupation, receives the same income. In place of pecuniary incentives, workers are motivated to do their best, not by higher wages, but by the social status that attends higher rank and other awards and prizes presented in recognition of special merit and achievement.
    Aside from its beneficent social consequences--namely, the elimination of poverty, class conflict, lawyers, politicians and virtually all crime--the nationalization of economic life has ushered in a general prosperity unimaginable in the bygone "age of individualism." And the fountainhead of this plenty is the vastly superior productivity of central planning as compared to private enterprise. Nationalization eliminates the "four great wastes" that were endemic to the old market system: "first, the waste by mistaken undertakings; second, the waste from the competition and mutual hostility of those engaged in industry; third, the waste by periodical gluts and crises, with the consequent interruptions of industry; fourth, the waste from idle capital and labor, at all times."
    Although now largely forgotten, Edward Bellamy's vision of a future collectivist utopia caused a sensation in its day. Published in 1888, Looking Backward quickly sold hundreds of thousands of copies--a publishing phenomenon unrivaled in the United States since Uncle Tom's Cabin. Hundreds of "Bellamy clubs" sprang up around the country; the burgeoning Populist movement absorbed much of Bellamy's vision. Years later, Progressive icons John Dewey and Charles Beard, independently rating the most influential books since 1885, both put Looking Backward in second place, trailing only Karl Marx's Das Kapital.
    Bellamy's book made such an impact because it crystallized and dramatized a powerful new idea that, in one form or another, was taking hold of the world and remaking it in its image. That idea, reduced to its bare essence, was that the economic revolution of industrialization both enabled and required a revolution in social organization--namely, the eclipse, whether partial or total, of markets and competition by centralized, top-down control.
    The intellectual and political movements spawned by this idea emerged in the last quarter of the 19th century and utterly dominated the first three-quarters of the 20th. This hundred-year historical episode, though composed of diverse and widely varying elements, possesses enough coherence to merit a name. The one I suggest is the Industrial Counterrevolution.
    The Industrial Counterrevolution was protean and in its many guises captured minds of almost every persuasion. It transcended the conventional left-right political spectrum: Both progressives who welcomed the social transformations wrought by industrialization and the conservatives who feared them were united in their calls for a larger state with expanded powers. The Industrial Counterrevolution swept up reformers and revolutionaries, the religious and the anticlerical, social activists and big businessmen, workers and capitalists. The political forms that bore its imprint were many and varied: the welfare and regulatory state; the mixed economy of social democracy; the business-led associative state; Keynesian fine-tuning; the Galbraithean new industrial state; the developmental states of the Third World; and the totalitarian states, whether communist, fascist or Nazi.
    The name "Industrial Counterrevolution" is fitting on two levels. First, as a matter of historical development, the movements grouped together under this common heading were both inspired by and reacting against the economic and social transformations effected by industrialization. In the United States and Europe, the centralizing impulse first began to register during the 1870s, just as modern technological society was bursting onto the scene; in later-developing countries, the ideologies of centralization almost invariably supplied the matrix for modernization. And second, in analytical terms, the common intellectual thread that runs through all of these movements--namely, the rejection or demotion of market competition in favor of top-down control--represents a direct assault on the principles of social order that gave rise to industrialization and that are truest to its full promise.
    The Industrial Revolution represented a quantum leap in the complexity of economic life. A bewildering variety of new industries and occupations arose. Production techniques became vastly more complicated as mechanization developed and spread. Mass distribution and marketing spun sprawling, intricate webs that connected producers and customers. Countless organizational innovations were devised to manage successfully the high-volume, high-speed flows of inputs and goods through the proliferating new production and distribution systems. In short, industrialization entailed a dramatic elaboration of the division of labor, the result of which was to expand the horizons of achievable prosperity beyond all prior imaginings.
    This dramatic increase in complexity was an outgrowth of market competition. Decentralized experimentation by private entrepreneurs, guided by the feedback of profit and loss, had created a wealth-creating capacity of unprecedented fecundity. And the market system was but the economic expression of a bold new form of social order: the liberal order that institutionalized experimentation in science, politics and culture as well as economics. In its embrace of unrestrained scientific inquiry, representative democracy, cultural dynamism and entrepreneurial innovation, liberalism enshrined open-ended discovery as a fundamental organizing principle of social life.
    The Industrial Counterrevolution pushed in precisely the opposite direction. It reordered society in drastically simplified fashion, substituting crude, top-down command structures for the coordinated and mutually adjusting creativity, know-how and on-the-spot judgments of millions of human beings. Its tragic effect, consequently, was to retard the spreading division of intellectual labor that the new economy encouraged. And all too often, it combined the centralization of economic decision-making with a tyrannical centralization of political power.
    In all their varied attempts at social engineering, the leaders of the Industrial Counterrevolution simply assumed that centralized control was a panacea. Here their confusion was fundamental. From the facts that centralization had a growing role within the market order (in the form of large business enterprises) and that centralization was needed to assemble the institutional framework of the market order (as well as supplement that order by promoting particular noncommercial public values), collectivists leaped to the utterly unwarranted conclusion that centralization should, in whole or in part, supplant the market order itself.
    Consequently, the partisans of the Industrial Counterrevolution led a campaign to unloose centralization from its proper limits and make it, rather than competition, the basic template for economic life. Centralization would no longer undergird or supplement competition, but would supplant it.
    It was a disastrous course of action. The hypertrophy of centralization tortured the logic of industrialization and deranged economic development. In particular--and of particular relevance for understanding globalization today--it undermined and ultimately destroyed the booming global economy that arose in the wake of the Industrial Revolution. What we call globalization today is in large part really just the process of recovery from that awful collapse.
    In 1932, in the depths of the Great Depression, 20-year-old John Scott dropped out of the University of Wisconsin and headed off to the Soviet Union. "Something seemed to be wrong with America," he wrote in his memoirs. "I decided to go to Russia to work, study and to lend a hand in the construction of a society which seemed to be at least one step ahead of the American."
    Scott worked for the next five years in the giant new steel mill at Magnitogorsk--one of the great symbols of the Soviets' breakneck industrialization drive. "In Magnitogorsk I was precipitated into a battle," Scott wrote. "I was deployed on the iron and steel front." Begun in 1929, Magnitogorsk was modeled after U.S. Steel's Gary works, the largest and most advanced steel mill in the world. Despite appalling conditions, it arose from the remote Ural steppe in just a few short years--a testament to the audacity and brutal determination of a new social order. "Money was spent like water, men froze, hungered and suffered," Scott recounted, "but the construction work went on with a disregard for individuals and a mass heroism seldom paralleled in history." The payoff came in World War II, when half the tanks of the Soviet Red Army were made from Magnitogorsk steel.
    Today, the romance of blast furnaces and five-year plans is long dead. The Soviet Union, the country into whose service John Scott enlisted, has ceased to exist. But Magnitogorsk is still there, still making steel. The vision of a socialist workers' paradise has been abandoned, but the dead hand of its continuing influence still holds Magnitogorsk in its grip.
    Magnitogorsk today is an assault on the senses. When you stand on the west bank of the Ural River, at the foot of a colossal statue of two brawny, sword-wielding socialist heroes, the immense sprawl of the mill on the other side of the river extends across your entire field of vision. Belching out of the smokestacks in the morning are plumes of orange, black and blue-gray smoke; by late afternoon the wind has swirled them into a monochrome smear of brown. Driving around the huge, hulking works, past dingy and decrepit worker housing and out to the old iron ore deposit, your eyes and throat quickly begin burning from exposure to the fouled air. And yet things used to be much worse. In recent years a number of the original, filthy open hearths have been replaced with more modern, cleaner furnaces. "In the old days," Yelena Sherbakova, a retired mill worker, told me during my visit there, "the snow used to be black when it fell."
    The mill has struggled to make its way in the new, postcommunist world. As domestic demand for steel collapsed during the 1990s, Magnitogorsk had to turn to foreign markets to survive. Built, though, to be far away from potential invaders, it is equally remote from potential customers: The nearest port is 1,200 miles away, so transportation costs are a major problem. Meanwhile, economic slowdowns in export markets and protectionism in the European Union and the United States have posed further obstacles.
    The mill has been officially privatized, but its ownership structure and finances remain murky. In November 2001, a deputy in the state Duma was stripped of his legislative immunity and charged with skimming off a personal fortune during the mill's privatization a decade ago. Surely other, similar tales remain to be told. My own experience testifies to the lack of transparency at Magnitogorsk: The firm's management refused to talk to my brother-in-law--then the Moscow correspondent for Cox newspapers--and me on the ground that we might be "spies."
    Magnitogorsk's awkward straddle of its Stalinist past and the globalized present typifies the predicament of postcommunist and developing economies. In particular, the industrial sectors of those economies remain grotesquely distorted by the legacy of command and control. The transition to truly market-based industry is far from complete.
    Most obviously, government ownership of commercial enterprises is still widespread. The privatization movement of the past couple of decades, although truly impressive, has been broader than it has been deep. Consider the findings of the Economic Freedom of the World project, a rigorous and thoughtful attempt to track and quantify global trends in economic policy. The role of state-owned enterprises, or SOEs, is one of the criteria by which the project evaluates countries' overall fidelity to market-economy principles. On this particular criterion, a country is assigned a maximum score of 10 when only a few SOEs remain. At the other end of the spectrum, a score of 4 indicates "a substantial number of SOEs operated in many sectors, including manufacturing;" a score of 2 is given when "numerous SOEs operated in many sectors, including retail sales;" the bottom score of 0 means that "the economy was dominated by SOEs."
    The 2000 Economic Freedom of the World report found that as of 1996-97, 24 countries out of 123 surveyed earned the lowest possible score of 0, another 23 countries received a score of 2 and 27 countries earned a 4. Thus, in a total of 74 countries, accounting for 67 percent of the world's population, state-owned enterprises continue to play a leading role in economic life. And it should be noted that some of the world's most regimented economies--including Cuba, North Korea, Vietnam, Cambodia, Laos, Libya, Iraq, Yugoslavia and a number of the former Soviet republics--were not even included in the survey for lack of reliable data.
    Privatization alone, however, is no guarantee that real market-oriented restructuring will occur. The experience of Russia is sad testimony to that fact. Between 1992 and 1996, Russia sold off or gave away over 100,000 state-owned enterprises; the private sector now accounts for roughly 90 percent of industrial production. Yet continuing control by Soviet-era managers, combined with a "soft budget constraint" in the form of massive government subsidies, has robbed privatization of its anticipated benefits. Consultants at McKinsey studied 10 major Russian industries in 1999 and found that their average labor productivity was a shockingly low 18 percent of U.S. levels. They concluded that some 25 percent of Russia's Soviet-era industrial assets are obsolete and should be scrapped.
    Other forms of heavy-handed government control remain widespread as well. Take, for example, price controls, perhaps the most blatant form of government interference with the transmission of market signals. On this item, as well as the previous one, the Economic Freedom of the World report grades countries on a 0 to 10 rating scale. Countries that have no price controls or marketing boards earn a perfect score of 10. On the illiberal side of the scale, countries receive a rating of 4 "when price controls were levied on energy, agriculture and many other stable products that are widely purchased by households"; countries garner a score of 2 "when price controls applied to a significant number of products in both agriculture and manufacturing"; and the lowest score of 0 means that "there was widespread use of price controls throughout various sectors of the economy." The report found that as of 1997, nine countries scored a 0, 15 countries received a 2 and 30 countries earned a 4. Those 54 countries contain 39 percent of the world's population. Once again, the same caveat applies: Many of the world's most illiberal regimes were not included in the analysis.
    The dead hand of the past continues to hold sway, not just over the production of goods and services, but over the allocation of capital as well. Outside of the United States and United Kingdom, decentralized access to capital through bond and equity markets remains pitifully underdeveloped in most countries--not only because of direct regulatory inhibitions, but also because of inadequate legal protection of investors. In the United States, total equity market capitalization equaled 114 percent of GDP in 1996; by comparison, the corresponding figure was 35 percent in India; in Brazil, 29 percent; in Thailand, 28 percent; in Korea, 25 percent; in Argentina, 16 percent; in Pakistan, a miserable 10 percent.
    And relative size is only the most obvious yardstick of comparison. More important than the size of financial markets is how open and liquid they are. Most stock markets around the world are dominated by insiders and experience relatively little turnover. There are a few bright spots: In Hong Kong, Singapore, Taiwan and Chile, for example, equity markets are relatively large and liquid. Apart from these happy exceptions, though, now that the "emerging markets" craze of the early 1990s has fizzled unceremoniously, it is clear that most of the world's stock markets are turbid, stagnant backwaters. Too often, they are just another racket for insiders to maintain their control, not the liberating tool for democratizing finance that they could and should be.
    With capital markets stunted, banks generally play the leading role in allocating capital--a role that remains heavily politicized, with uniformly dolorous consequences. The grim fact is that banking systems are more or less dysfunctional virtually everywhere in the world. A dangerous mix of regulatory restrictions and special subsidies renders banks chronically vulnerable to meltdowns of mass insolvency. And in countries where banking crises have occurred, crushing burdens of unresolved bad loans can paralyze financial institutions--and the larger economies that depend on them--for years at a stretch.
    The catastrophic breakdown of national banking industries is a dismal commonplace under current conditions. According to a recent World Bank analysis, 34 countries on five continents experienced major banking crises over the past two decades: Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada, Chile, Colombia, Denmark, Ecuador, Egypt, El Salvador, Finland, Ghana, Hong Kong, India, Indonesia, Italy, Japan, Korea, Madagascar, Malaysia, Mexico, Nigeria, Norway, Peru, Philippines, Sri Lanka, Sweden, Tanzania, Thailand, Turkey, United States, Uruguay, Venezuela and Zimbabwe. Banking crises are a plague that afflicts rich and poor countries alike. For some countries, they are a recurrent plague: Thirteen of those listed suffered multiple breakdowns of their banking systems during the period in question. And note that this roll call of misery understates significantly the extent of the suffering: It excludes all the former members of the Communist bloc, most of whose banking systems are severely distressed.
    Banking systems aren't just crisis-prone; they're also stunted by what economists call "financial repression"--a cocktail of policies whose combined effect is to discourage financial intermediation. Especially damaging is the tandem of inflationary monetary policies and interest rate controls, which frequently results in negative real (that is, inflation-adjusted) interest rates and thus causes savers to shun the banking system. Another key element of financial repression is the requirement that banks maintain large reserves with the central bank. These interest-free loans to the government tie up resources that otherwise could be financing private productive activity. Finally, governments repress the financial sector through compulsory allocations of credit to particular sectors--whether through lending by state-owned banks, controls on private banks or credit subsidies.
    Economists have turned against financial repression, but its political temptations are abiding. According to the 2000 Economic Freedom of the World report, state-owned banks remain widespread: In 40 countries containing 57 percent of the world's population, state-owned banks held a clear majority of total deposits during 1997-98. The same report shows that 40 countries accounting for 35 percent of the world's population still maintained significant regulation of interest rates during the period 1995-97. In 19 of those countries real interest rates were frequently or persistently negative.
    Even for countries that have made serious attempts to open up their financial systems, the legacy of the past continues to frustrate economic progress. In Latin America, the depth of the financial sector remains badly underdeveloped. In Argentina, for example, bank lending to the private sector amounted to a mere 23.7 percent of GDP in 1998; in Brazil, the corresponding figure was 28.5 percent. In Mexico, where a recent banking crisis has aggravated an already poor situation, bank lending to the private sector had dropped to 17.8 percent of GDP in 1998, down from 28.9 percent in 1993. By contrast, in East Asia, where financial repression was pursued much less vigorously, the banking industry is much larger and better developed. In Malaysia and Thailand, for instance, countries with no shortage of banking system woes, bank loans to the private sector exceed 100 percent of GDP.
    The struggle between the dead hand and the invisible hand cannot be reduced to a conflict between government per se and markets. Governments are not merely doing too much; they are simultaneously doing too much and too little. At the root of so many problems in developing and transition economies is the failure of governments to provide reliable security for property and contract rights. That failure must be acknowledged as one of the bitter legacies of the collectivist era.
    Among the economic distortions caused by today's prevailing rule of lawlessness, few are more severe than one I saw in rural northern India. There, economic life is so grossly dysfunctional that one of the great advances of the Industrial Revolution--the mass production of automobiles--has been reversed. Once again, as it was before 1913 when Henry Ford invented the assembly line, people are making cars by hand.
    To find this strange anachronism, I set out with a colleague and a driver one morning to brave India's infamous rural roads. Leaving Delhi still murky with wood and dung smoke from the previous night's home fires, we headed south down the Delhi-Agra highway and weaved our way through a chaos of cars, trucks, buses, motorcycles, three-wheeled "Vikrams," tractors, ox-carts and camel carts. I even saw a man walking alongside the road with a bear on a leash--a traveling entertainer who worked his way from village to village. My colleague told me that this highway was actually a showpiece by Indian standards--at least it had a median strip. As we ventured onto smaller roads I quickly understood what he meant. With traffic on the two-lane roads undulating back and forth across both lanes to pass slow-moving tractors and camels or avoid potholes the size of bomb craters, dodging the oncoming traffic was like a video game come to life.
    All along the way vehicles were overflowing with passengers--people sitting on top of a jeep-like "Mahindra," or standing on the floorboard of a van with the back door swinging open or crammed into the back of a truck or camel cart. With a billion people, India has only around 40 million motor vehicles--two-, three- and four-wheeled combined. It is a desperately poor country, to be sure, but in this particular respect the poverty is a matter of explicit policy. Vehicle prices are grossly inflated by punishingly high taxes: Total duties on used cars, for instance, are 180 percent. Although American, Japanese and Korean auto companies now assemble vehicles in India, their products are well out of financial reach for most Indians.
    With admirable ingenuity and initiative, rural Indians have decided to take matters into their own hands: They are now building their own automobiles. Known alternately as a "jugaad," a "maruta" or a "boogi," the vehicle offers basic, bare-bones transportation for Indian farmers. It has no roof, the 10 to 14 horsepower engine must be hand-cranked and maxes out around 15 miles per hour and the driver sits on a wooden bench. But the rear compartment--a plywood bed with wood-panel sides--has plenty of room for passengers or cargo. And with a price tag of only around $1,000, it is an unbeatable bargain.
    We found boogi manufacturers in the remote village of Toda Bhim in eastern Rajasthan. There were no assembly lines, no factories at all--just three small mechanic's garages spaced out along the semi-paved road that runs through the village. The mechanics buy minivan spare parts--wheels, axles, transmissions, gear boxes and steering--from markets in Delhi; they get their engines, made to power water pumps, from Agra; and they pick up steel for the chassis and wood for the framing from Jaipur. They cut and fit the framing and weld the chassis themselves and then assemble the rest; According to the mechanic we spoke with, one shop can turn out four or five finished vehicles a month.
    Technically, boogis are illegal under India's Motor Vehicles Act. They are not officially registered, they have no license plates and they are supposedly subject to seizure by the highway patrol whenever they are found. But the law is roundly ignored. In addition to the mechanics in Toda Bhim who actually make the cars, we spoke with a dealer in the nearby town of Mahwa and several satisfied customers and none reported any problems with the police. We even saw boogis puttering along the main Delhi-Agra highway, 60 miles from the capital city.
    The production of boogis is part of India's enormous "informal sector"--unsanctioned economic activity that is nonetheless tolerated by the authorities. The informal sector dominates India's economic life. Only around 30 million people or 9 percent of the labor force, work in the official, "organized" economy; everybody else, the other 91 percent, works informally. It is a breathtaking statistic: 91 percent of Indian workers operate off the books and outside the law. Those 91 percent don't have the proper permits and licenses, most don't pay taxes and few show up at all in the official economic statistics. At the same time, many are subject to incessant extortion by corrupt officials, few have any access to the courts for legal redress and virtually none are eligible for bank loans or any other type of formal financing.
    India's informal sector is only an especially egregious example of a global phenomenon. In Latin America, for example, the sprawling favelas of Brazil are perhaps the most familiar face of a pervasive shadow economy. In Brazil, as well as Costa Rica, Honduras, Panama and Venezuela, 40 percent or more of total employment is informal; in Bolivia and Paraguay the figure tops 50 percent, while roughly 65 percent of Guatemalans work outside the organized economy. Meanwhile, in Southeast Asia, over 70 percent of workers in heavily rural Thailand and Indonesia operate in the informal sector. Even in urban areas, roughly half of Thai workers are informal.
    The existence of large informal sectors is only one symptom of a broader institutional failure. In a continuum from bad to worse--from corrupt officials and inadequate courts, to laws so misguided that many or most people are chased into the informal sector, to the arbitrary confiscations of kleptocratic misrule, to the chaos of Hobbesian anarchy--the poorer countries are all plagued by the insufficient protection of property and contract rights. Under these conditions, most economic activity is confined to what the late economist Mancur Olson called "spontaneous" or "self-enforcing" markets--markets based on personal relationships or face-to-face contact. But those markets, however resilient and durable, cannot produce the division of labor upon which affluence depends. They are a dead end or at best a holding pattern.
    The dead hand's malignant influence is not confined to the remote locales of the postcommunist and developing worlds. Wealthy and sophisticated Japan now enters its second decade of stagnation because of monetary mismanagement and the refusal to allow failed businesses to die. Western Europe's enervating welfare state and labor policies result in the chronic underemployment of its people--a profligate waste of human talent that squanders most severely the abilities of people at the beginning and end of their working lives.
    And here in the United States, where promarket opinion is on firmer footing than just about anywhere else, the habits of top-down control die hard. Even here, many relatively straightforward proposals for market-based reforms continue to be marginalized as "extreme" and "out of the mainstream"--for example, the substitution of taxes and tradable permits for command-and-control environmental regulations, the replacement of Medicare with private health insurance vouchers, the repeal of compulsory labor union membership, the phase-out of federal deposit insurance for banks and the elimination of the antidumping law, which penalizes imports that are deemed too inexpensive. Other reform ideas now receive serious attention, but remain bitterly controversial--including privatization of Social Security, educational voucher or tax credit programs and defunding of the IMF, to name a few.
    Meanwhile, recent years have witnessed the flare-up of radical anti-market sentiment in the rich countries of the industrialized world--in the form of the anti-globalization protest movement. A traveling carnival of street theater and vandalism opened in Seattle in November 1999 and has since made stops in Washington, D.C., London, Prague, Quebec, Gothenberg, Genoa, New York and elsewhere. There is little coherence in the protesters' many agendas, but their common bond is a thirst for something higher than mere materialism and a belief that it can be found in political action.
    A century ago, utopian longings similar to those of today's protesters helped to launch the great historical cataclysm I have called the Industrial Counterrevolution. Could such things happen again? Are the present expressions of radical discontent the first stirrings of a new cataclysm?
    Fortunately, the answer is almost certainly "no." The anti-globalization protesters fancy themselves the vanguard of some new political movement, but they are really just the straggling rearguard of an old and failed one. For all the media attention they have received and all their Internet-based organizational savvy, their quest to reawaken the grand utopian passions of the past is virtually hopeless.
    The difference between now and then is a century's worth of bitter, disillusioning experience. The popular appeal of the various failed alternatives to the liberal path of markets and competition rested crucially on the presumption that collectivism was "progressive," that it was "the wave of the future"--specifically, that it would give the masses a better life. And so Bismarck offered to lift up the workers; the Bolsheviks promised land and bread for the peasants; the Nazis put the jobless back to work; Mussolini made the trains run on time; and the various statist leaders of the Third World held out the prospect of industrialization and modernization and accelerated development.
    But in the past couple of decades, collectivism's failure to live up to its promises finally became undeniable. In short, it didn't deliver the goods. The now-crumbling institutions of the collectivist era still have their defenders, but they are on the defensive. The weight of opinion is against them when they argue that theirs is the true path to material abundance. They have lost the mantle of the future and have become the shrill, bitter voices of reaction.
    Hence my characterization of the anti-market forces today as the "dead hand" of the past. They no longer represent a living and vital interpretation of modernity; they no longer offer a plausibly workable vision of the future to guide the reform or overhaul of current policies and institutions. And so anti-market forces today are consigned to clinging to the past: not proposing their own changes, but merely opposing and resisting liberal change. They are still formidable, but they are sterile.
    There is at present only one viable vision of economic development: the liberal model of markets and competition. It is neither widely loved nor widely understood, but it is all there is. And so when existing institutions break down so badly that changes become unavoidable, leaders in search of a template for constructive action now turn to the liberal model by default. In this way the dead hand yields, bit by bit, to the invisible hand of the market.
ADDED MATERIAL
    Brink Lindsey is a senior fellow at the Cato Institute and director of its Center for Trade Policy Studies. This article is adapted from his book Against the Dead Hand: The Uncertain Struggle for Global Capitalism (John Wiley & Sons, 2002).
A former Soviet general's grave stone at Moscow's Novodevichy Cemetery. From Soviets: Pictures from the End of the USSR, by Shepard Sherbell, published by Yale University Press.
Lenin, half completed, at the Uzbek State Monument Works.

使用道具 举报

Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16

声望
53
寄托币
31146
注册时间
2001-10-7
精华
284
帖子
171

Sagittarius射手座 荣誉版主

12
发表于 2004-4-1 23:39:19 |只看该作者

AUTHOR: Robert A. Senser

AUTHOR:  Robert A. Senser
TITLE:  EVERYBODY'S BUSINESS
SOURCE:  Commonweal 129 no4 11 F 22 2002

The magazine publisher is the copyright holder of this article and it is reproduced with permission. Further reproduction of this article in violation of the copyright is prohibited. To contact he publisher: http://www.commonweal-foundation.org/

    The prestigious World Economic Forum welcomed a special group of VIPs to its 2002 annual meeting, held from January 31 to February 4 in New York City, rather than in its usual site, the Alpine resort of Davos, Switzerland. Thirty union leaders, representing every major component of the world labor movement, joined more than three thousand top corporate executives and other members of the world's elite at Manhattan's Waldorf-Astoria Hotel. What on earth were the union leaders doing there?
    In a joint statement titled "Globalizing Social Justice," they explained: "In order to be relevant to our members, we must be willing to engage in dialogue with employers for which workers toil, just as we are ready to negotiate with them...to advance and defend the interests of workers." The platform of the New York forum wasn't the only place unions pursued that goal early this month. Outside the Waldorf-Astoria, thousands from U.S. and foreign unions and human-rights groups protested peacefully against sweatshops and other global ills. AFL-CIO President John Sweeney and labor colleagues from the forum showed their solidarity by marching with these protesters and addressing them on several occasions. Simultaneously, in P&ocirc;rto Alegre, Brazil, forty thousand people from around the world, including the United States, attended the World Social Forum, a colorful counterpoint to the World Economic Forum in New York. By satellite, Sweeney sent warm greetings to the P&ocirc;rto Alegre gathering.
    These various activities throw light on a multifaceted campaign by organized labor to have a say in the global economic arena. It's an uphill struggle. Of the thirty international labor leaders at this year's forum in Manhattan, many have positions of influence in their own countries. Those from Europe, for example, have seats at the table in the policy structure of the European Union. But that's not so at the level of the global economy. In sharp contrast to the influence that organized business exerts--directly or, more often, through national governments--they remain outsiders in the intergovernmental organizations that increasingly govern globalization.
    In explaining why global institutions need a broader range of input from labor, union chiefs point to the flaws and failures of globalization, much the way certain Nobel Prize winners and bishops do. None of them attacks globalization as such, just its current version and how it excludes the people who ought to be heard. Still, labor and its allies continue to get stigmatized as "antiglobalizers."
    If the labor movement were actually opposed to globalization, it would reject invitations from the World Economic Forum. It would fight the United Nations "Global Compact" on human rights, worker rights, and environmental standards now signed by leaders of 200 multinational corporations. It would campaign to close down powerful agencies such as the World Bank, instead of seeking their reform.
    Unfortunately, the mindless application of the negative "antiglobalization" label has gone far to inhibit much-needed open discussion of global issues that are everybody's business. In this context, the greater openness shown by the New York forum is a plus. As a private international organization, the World Economic Forum should serve as an example for intergovernmental organizations, particularly the World Trade Organization.
    Despite the key role the WTO plays in global governance and its ambitions to expand that role, it resists openness. It has remained resolutely distant to a sister international organization and neighbor in Geneva--the UN's International Labor Organization--which, alone among UN bodies, includes representatives from labor, employment, and government. After discussions with labor leaders at the New York forum, however, WTO Director General Mike Moore did announce that official contacts with the ILO are to begin soon. Not headline-grabbing news, perhaps, but a small step toward overcoming some bureaucratic inertia.
    Cynics are not alone in wondering about the real progress achieved from meeting with corporate bigwigs at the economic forum. And since there are no shortcuts, unions are taking many other initiatives at the global level, including reaching global agreements directly with individual multinational corporations. Still, the key test is what difference these efforts make in the lives of ordinary people, millions and millions of them, especially women and children, who share very little of the global economy's benefits. The results are not yet in.
    Peter Wasserman, a European journalist who covered the World Social Forum in Brazil, differentiates two basic union approaches to labor's international struggle for improving the lives of workers. At one pole are those he describes as the "fixers"; at the other, the "nixers." Wasserman claims that the nixers--leaders and activists pushing certain causes, such as shutting down the World Bank instead of reforming it--are gaining ground in radicalizing some unions and allied organizations, especially in Latin America. Wasserman, out of his own leftist sympathies, is probably exaggerating.
    Still, there are an unknown number of dedicated nixers around the world and their cross-border network could easily grow to dangerous proportions in uncertain times, particularly if international policy leaders fail to heed the concerns expressed by the fixers.
ADDED MATERIAL
    Robert A. Senser, a former labor attaché in the U.S. Foreign Service, edits Human Rights for Workers (www.senser.com).

使用道具 举报

Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16

声望
53
寄托币
31146
注册时间
2001-10-7
精华
284
帖子
171

Sagittarius射手座 荣誉版主

13
发表于 2004-4-1 23:40:09 |只看该作者

AUTHOR: Rolf Banz and Sarah Clough

AUTHOR:  Rolf Banz and Sarah Clough
TITLE:  Globalization Reshaping World's Financial Markets
SOURCE:  Journal of Financial Planning 15 no4 72-4, 76-8, 80 Ap 2002

The magazine publisher is the copyright holder of this article and it is reproduced with permission. Further reproduction of this article in violation of the copyright is prohibited. To contact the publisher: http://www.journalfp.net/



ABSTRACT
Globalization is clearly a growing influence on financial markets. Pension plans are already moving toward greater exposure to international equities and we can expect this trend to further intensify, particularly as many of the most influential consultants are fervently advocating a global approach. The risks involved with holding a significant proportion of assets in domestic equities are becoming more of a concern. There are also a number of obstacles--such as inadequate disclosure of economic and financial data and poor corporate governance--that we need to overcome to achieve a truly global financial market. Nonetheless, the integration of the global marketplace is a powerful theme for both businesses and investors.
    "Let goods be homespun whenever it is reasonably and conveniently possible; and, above all, let finance be primarily national," wrote John Maynard Keynes in his 1933 essay, "National Self-Sufficiency." We've come a long way since then. Experience has repeatedly shown self-sufficiency to be a sure route to impoverishment. Open economies have grown faster than closed ones and are widely recognized as a precondition for sustainable economic growth. Governments throughout the developed world, and much of the developing regions, have accepted globalization as not only inevitable but also desirable. In particular, they have recognized the crucial role of financial markets in achieving sustainable economic growth. The integration of the world's financial markets has become a powerful theme that is creating new opportunities for businesses and investors worldwide.


HISTORY REPEATING ITSELF
    Globalization certainly is not a new phenomenon. Over a century ago, the world's economies were highly integrated, on a scale certainly equal to what we see today and arguably even more advanced.
    The beginnings of global commerce date back to the 15th and 16th centuries, but it was the industrial revolution that would prove the great "enabler" of globalization. During the late 19th century, the world was highly integrated--goods, capital and people moved freely among countries and continents, and restrictions to trade barely existed. Although there were increasing demands for controls and protective tariffs from as early as the 1870s, it wasn't until the collapse of the world economy in the 1930s that economic liberalism gave way to a spirit of protectionism. Between the mid-1930s and late 1940s, tariffs and capital controls abounded and central banks intervened more actively to manage capital flows.
    As the Second World War came to a close, efforts to rebuild war-weary economies became increasingly focused on a spirit of mutual cooperation. This was happening at both a global and a European level, and set the ball rolling for a remarkable half-century of economic liberalization and global integration. Since the early 1950s, the rate of world trade growth has been consistently twice as high as the pace of global output growth.
    What have been the key drivers of this process? The dismantling of barriers to trade has had a huge influence. Over the last 50 years, a myriad of multilateral and regional agreements have provided an enormous impetus to global trade. During the 1990s, privatization was a key driver of globalization, creating more intense competition in domestic markets, which inevitably drove local industries to look beyond their national boundaries for new export markets and lower-cost materials.
    Today we are experiencing a new dimension of globalization. New information and communication technologies are having a huge impact on market integration. Internet-related technologies are boosting efficiency and growth by increasing the availability of information and improving access to markets. The steam engine was the catalyst for the industrialization of today's developed world. Today's technologies will provide the catalyst for a more rapid industrialization of the developing regions. What took the world's leading economies 50 or 100 years to achieve could quite reasonably take a developing country five years or even less, given the phenomenal potential of technology today.
    Globalization has far-reaching ramifications for the world's financial markets. Again, capital market integration is not new. Markets were highly integrated in the late 19th century, before the return of capital controls in the 1930s. Though the United States and Western Europe began to liberalize capital flows in the late 1940s, it wasn't until the fall of communism that liberalization became more widespread. In Europe and North America, capital controls are now largely a thing of the past.


HOW INTEGRATED ARE TODAY'S FINANCIAL MARKETS?
    Financial markets are feeling the influence of globalization in a variety of ways. In an age of increasing global trade and global production, a greater integration of financial markets has become a logical goal for governments and institutions worldwide. Recent years have seen a greater internationalization of investment, though this trend is still at a relatively early stage in its development. In Europe, although cross-border investment within the euro-zone has generally increased since the introduction of the euro, investors continue to exhibit a clear preference for domestic assets.
    The indirect influence of globalization on financial markets is also worth considering. As industries become an increasingly global affair, companies have focused their attention on achieving critical mass, and merger-and-acquisition activity has soared. A series of cross-border mergers has produced a new generation of multinationals that derive the majority of their revenues from sales outside their local market.
    Pension fund markets continue to exhibit a strong home bias. If international exposure provides some indication of the extent to which financial markets are integrated, then we clearly have some way to go before we can speak of a truly global marketplace.
    The diversification benefits of investing in foreign assets have long been acknowledged. It is generally believed that a portfolio with an international bias will provide a better risk-return trade-off over the longer term than a portfolio with a strong domestic bias.
    What is surprising, then, is that although allocation to international equities has gradually increased over the last decade, pension fund portfolios in major markets continue to exhibit a heavy domestic bias (see Table 1 and Table 2). This is true even in sophisticated markets like the United States and United Kingdom, where restrictions on overseas investment have been virtually non-existent. The average U.S. funds' allocation to international equities has increased over the last decade but remains relatively low at between 10 and 15 percent of total assets. This is in stark contrast to Hong Kong, which leads the way with an average 70 percent outside its home market.
    Why have investors shown such a marked preference for domestic equities over the past decade? One of the main reasons has been the strong performance of domestic markets. Domestic equities have performed extremely well over the last ten years in many developed countries and particularly in the United States. It is not difficult to see why U.S. investors had little inclination to look beyond their domestic market when it was performing so much better than overseas markets. Another factor has been the assumption that domestic equities in some way provide a better link to pension liabilities than their global counterparts.


WHY HAS FINANCIAL MARKET INTEGRATION BECOME SUCH A PRIORITY?
    Though markets clearly have not gone as far down the "global" path as many might assume, there are unquestionably some powerful catalysts for integration at work. What is different today is that the benefits of financial market integration are now widely advocated. Financial market integration has become a very powerful theme for governments and institutions worldwide--the European Commission has made European financial market integration one of its key priorities. Even the world's poorer countries have come to realize that the benefits of integration into the global economy far outweigh the costs.
    But why all the interest?
    Connecting mechanism. The extraordinary economic expansion in the United States over the past decade certainly has been a key influence--the U.S. experience has demonstrated how crucial the development of capital markets can be to creating a strong economy.
    Financial markets are the vital connecting mechanism for the whole economy in that they bring those looking for capital in touch with those looking for investment. In a world of perfectly integrated financial markets, capital would flow to those areas where capital was most scarce, costs would be lower and risk more effectively pooled. With risks more suitably spread, financial stability will increase. Households and companies in different countries would have access to a similar range of financial products, including mortgages, insurance products and savings instruments.
    Improved access to capital. One of the most widely recognized benefits of financial market integration is access to a larger and more diversified pool of capital. This is particularly key for many developing economies, where scarcity of capital severely limits prospects for growth. Local markets frequently suffer greatly from poor liquidity and tepid foreign investment. Many of the developing world's better companies have disappeared from local markets either by launching American Depository Receipts or having been taken over by a multinational. Stemming the flow of business to the United States and encouraging foreign investment have become major challenges for many governments in the developed world. In Europe, cross-border capital-raising has played a substantial role in the development of the small-cap market.


KEY DRIVERS OF FINANCIAL MARKET INTEGRATION
    Deregulation/privatization. Since the late 1980s, privatization has been a key feature of the global economic landscape. It has certainly been one of the most influential developments in recent economic history and its impact on financial markets has been dramatic. Between 1990 and 1999, $850 billion of state assets were transferred to the private sector, according to OECD (Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development) figures. In developing countries, particularly in Latin America, privatization is estimated to have generated some $100 billion in revenues. Efforts to privatize state-owned companies also have been a high priority for the governments of Eastern Europe, particularly with accession to the European Union in the cards. Progress has been considerable. Since the fall of communism, state ownership in Hungary, for example, has fallen from 85 percent of the economy to just under 15 percent. And the process shows no sign of abating just yet. With a multitude of privatization projects in the pipeline, in continental Europe and many emerging markets, the pace of privatizations seems unlikely to slacken.
    Growing demand for equities. The development of an equity culture is another important conduit for globalization. Demographic pressures and the need for private pension provision are creating enormous growth in demand for portfolio investments. Initially this meant a move away from traditional savings vehicles of cash and fixed-income investment products. But with falling yields on government bonds, investors are becoming increasingly sophisticated, and recent years have seen a phenomenal growth in equity investing.
    As shown in Figure 1, Europe has seen significant flows into mutual funds as the inadequacies of state-funded pension systems have come under the spotlight, and individuals increasingly take responsibility for their own retirement provision.
    Until now this growth in demand has been largely restricted to domestic markets; now, interest in cross-border investment is on the increase.
    The European paradigm. In Europe, the adoption of the euro has been a major catalyst for integration of financial markets by enhancing price transparency and reducing market fragmentation.
    The Financial Services Action Plan, adopted in May 1999, sets out an extensive plan of action to eliminate all existing barriers to the integration of European financial markets. True, it's a tall order with an ambitious deadline in 2005, but it will provide an important catalyst to the integration process.
    New technology. Technology long has been an important catalyst for globalization. For over two centuries, new technologies have brought a steady stream of radical change to transport and communications. Today, Internet related technologies are boosting global convergence as information flows become ever more timely. New information and communication technologies are having a phenomenal impact on financial markets by eroding national barriers in the provision of financial services and opening up the market to international competition.
    Growth of supra-national financial organizations. Particularly intense global expansion efforts in the financial services sector have provided further impetus to cross-border investment. The growth of supra-national organizations, particularly accounting firms, investment banks and investment management consultants, are providing another significant catalyst to the globalization of financial services.
    Pension fund reform. Another likely driver of an increasing internationalization of investment over the next decade is pension fund reform. Two domains of reform are likely to have the greatest impact on integration. The first relates to investment freedom and the elimination of barriers to cross-border investment by occupational pension funds. If they can be managed more freely, pension funds will grow in size and this will have a huge impact on capital mobility. Investment restrictions vary widely among countries, even within the European Union. The European Commission hopes to harmonize the way pension funds are managed and encourage a freer flow of capital with a proposal that would allow pension funds to invest at least 70 percent of their assets in equities or corporate bonds, and at least 30 percent in foreign assets.
    We've seen how, in recent years, most reluctance to increase international allocations has stemmed from a strong "home bias" rather than any regulatory restrictions--those countries enjoying the greatest investment freedom have not necessarily been those where foreign allocations are highest. But this will not necessarily be the case in the future. Pension funds are already showing clear signs of a growing interest in the benefits of international investing, a trend that will almost certainly continue to develop over the next ten years.
    The second area of reform relates to initiatives, which pave the way for cross-border pension schemes, the benefits of which are considerable--according to European Commission estimates, a large multinational could save up to 40 million euros each year by pooling its pension schemes into one fund. In Europe, efforts to establish truly pan-European pensions finally got under way last October when the European Commission issued a draft directive on supplementary pensions. As part of the EU's Financial Services Action Plan, the principal aim of the directive is to achieve mutual recognition of member states' regulatory regimes.


OBSTACLES
    Though we may be experiencing what is arguably the most intense era in the history of globalization, there is much progress to be made before we can speak of a truly "global" financial market. There are powerful catalysts driving the integration of the world's markets, but there are also many roadblocks to overcome to achieve a deeper integration.
    Inadequate disclosure of economic and financial data. A caveat to those considering investing in foreign markets has been the huge disparity in listing and financial reporting requirements. Greater harmonization of accounting rules would permit improved comparability among companies and provide shareholders with access to the information they require to make intelligent investment decisions. Having identified a lack of uniform accounting rules as a considerable hindrance to the process of integration in Europe, the European Commission issued proposals last year to make companies apply global rules by 2005. The IMF (International Monetary Fund) is also establishing international standards and codes of practice. These initiatives will bring into being a set of rules that will enable companies on any stock market in the world to use a single set of financial statements.
    Poor corporate governance. For some years now, the inequitable treatment of minority shareholders and poor corporate governance in many developing markets have been a major concern for foreign investors. Although it continues to be a problem, many governments have clearly recognized the importance of good corporate governance in attracting foreign investment. Recent efforts to address the issue have been encouraging. Plans to tighten regulations on the disclosure of information should further increase transparency and help to create a more appealing environment for foreign investors.
    In April 2001, Brazil launched a new market that is governed by stricter standards of corporate governance in a bid to attract foreign investors while, at the same time, providing improved access to capital for young technology-related companies. In South Korea, laws were recently passed that require the 30 largest family-run companies to publish consolidated financial statements. Chile has also introduced new legislation to strengthen the rights of minority shareholders and improve corporate governance.
    Poorly functioning domestic financial systems. This is a problem for many emerging economies, where financial market weaknesses and economic volatility have consistently undermined the credibility of domestic financial systems. Once again, progress in this domain has been encouraging. Since the financial crises of the 1990s, the governments of many emerging economies have reduced fiscal deficits, lowered inflation and have shown considerable commitment to major structural changes that are paving the way for increasingly stable, market-driven economies.
    The IMF and the World Bank recently launched a joint initiative to reduce country vulnerability to external shocks. Known as the Financial Sector Assessment Program, its objective is to identify and remedy potential weaknesses in domestic financial systems and ultimately reduce the incidence of crises.
    In the future, those countries that continue to show a strong commitment to sound macro-economic policies and prudent financial regulation will attract foreign investment and set themselves on course for convergence with the developed world.
    Slow progress in integrating stock markets. Up until late last year, cooperation among the world's leading stock exchanges was seen to be the main driving force behind financial market integration. During the first half of 2000, there was considerable talk of mergers and alliances on both sides of the Atlantic and the creation of new exchanges, particularly in Europe. Inevitably, "talk" is all that much of the hype amounted to. The merger of the London and Frankfurt exchanges to form the so-called ix exchange fell through. The U.S. technology-based market, Nasdaq, had planned a joint venture with the newly created ix exchange, which subsequently ran aground. Similarly, the first attempt at creating a pan-European exchange has been far from a success. Launched in 1996 with the Nasdaq as a shareholder, the Easdaq aimed to have 500 companies listed within one year. Today, just 62 companies are listed on the exchange, with many of those looking to list elsewhere.
    So why have attempts to consolidate stock exchanges not been successful? First of all, competition from local "growth" markets--Neuer Mkt, Nouveau Marché and techMARK--has been intense. Investors have been discouraged by costly and convoluted clearing and settlement systems. Consolidation also has been plagued by the strong commercial interests of the various stock exchanges. If any of these initiatives are to succeed, they will first need to rise above national chauvinism.
    Inadequate clearing and settlement infrastructures. Clearing and settlement is neither a glamorous nor an interesting subject by any means. But it is a crucial one, particularly for Europe, where the shortcomings of clearing and settlement systems are hampering the progress of financial market integration. The European Commission estimates that the cost of clearing and settlement in Europe is eight times higher than in the United States. Inadequate clearing and settlement infrastructures are also a hindrance to greater integration for many emerging markets.


INSTITUTIONAL FUND MANAGEMENT IN A GLOBAL CONTEXT
    What are some of the key implications of these changes for the future development of the global institutional fund management industry?
    United States: the role model. One key feature of the asset management industry in an increasingly global marketplace is the continued dominance of the U.S. influence. The 1990s were amazingly prosperous years for the United States, during which the economy boomed and stock markets thrived. Not surprisingly, globalization became a predominantly U.S. phenomenon, and this is particularly true of the global asset management industry--over 50 percent of global pension fund assets and more than 60 percent of mutual fund assets are under U.S. management.
    Concentration at the top. Clearly, markets are no longer segmented. The success of local asset management firms is dependent on their ability to compete not just with local and regional rivals but also the much larger U.S., U.K. and Japanese giants. This implies a minimum size, which has gone up dramatically in the last few years.
    With many leading players looking to achieve critical mass, corporate activity in the fund management industry has been intense. In particular, consolidation among the largest managers has accentuated concentration--in 1999, merger-and-acquisition activity was responsible for the disappearance of 30 firms from the Watson Wyatt/Pensions and Investments compilation of the 500 largest money managers. Recent years have seen a spate of globalstyle deals, including Deutsche Bank/Bankers Trust, Allianz/Pimco and Allied Zurich/Scudder.
    Rise of the global approach to investing. The majority of multinational companies continue to have very different pension arrangements for each of the countries in which they operate. Although the characteristics of the demand for funded pension services are global, pension fund markets remain highly fragmented. This results in a multitude of investment strategies, very different risk profiles and ultimately very different costs of pension provision. Yet there is a growing appreciation of the benefits of cross-border pooling of pension fund schemes.
    Pension plans already are moving toward greater exposure to international equities; we can expect this trend to further intensify, particularly as many of the most influential consultants are fervently advocating the global approach. As domestic markets become increasingly concentrated in terms of sector coverage, the risks involved in holding a significant proportion of assets in domestic equities are becoming more of a concern (see Figure 2).
    A recent survey by investment management consultant Watson Wyatt found that continental European pension funds showed a growing appetite for international investing. Nearly half of those who responded to the survey indicated that they would be increasing their allocations to global equity mandates in the future and 39 percent of respondents already invested in emerging markets indicated they would be increasing allocations.
    Changes in global economic forces could have a considerable influence on investor behavior--the economic slowdown in the United States and a weaker dollar could send financial flows back overseas. As Figure 3 illustrates, cross-border investing is expected to grow considerably over the next few years, with the largest increase expected to come from the United States. In Europe, the largest increase is expected to come from Germany.
    In the United States, much of this growth will come from U.S. pension funds, whose nascent appetite for international diversification is likely to develop further, particularly with the outlook for U.S. domestic equities not nearly as promising as it was five years ago. Many small and medium-sized public funds recently have had restrictions to foreign investing removed, which will be a further impetus, albeit a relatively small one.
    Correlation among markets at large-cap level is increasing. Greater integration of financial markets is gradually reducing the availability of non-correlated assets. Many of the world's major markets are increasingly correlated, which suggests the diversification benefits of conventional international investing are on the decline. This is clearly not the case for either the small-cap market or many of the emerging markets, and institutional investors increasingly look to these asset classes in their search for diversification. Flows of institutional cash into "alternative investment" vehicles like private equity and hedge funds also have grown significantly as investors seek out returns from low-correlated asset classes.
    As industries become an increasingly global affair, the sector approach to investing has become extremely relevant. In 1997, only 23 percent of European fund managers selected assets on the basis of sector. By summer 2000, the figure had grown to 76 percent. In addition, a recent study by Goldman Sachs revealed global sector influences on share price performance have grown to outweigh the effect of local market factors over the past five years. Back in January 1995, the global sector effect accounted for just 7 percent of individual share performance, while the local market effect accounted for 23 percent. By summer 2000, global sector influence increased to 18 percent, with local market influence dropping to 15 percent. As technology stocks stumbled, it wasn't so much where you were, but what you were in, that mattered.
    Rising popularity of alternative investments. This growing interest in alternative investments is clearly an important trend, not least because it is providing access to a much wider and more sophisticated range of investment opportunities. Globalization of the private equity market, driven once again by a strong U.S. influence, has been an important trend, particularly in Europe where deregulation is fueling the growth of equity finance.
    However, this clearly does not mean demand for conventional products will weaken. We have seen how the development of an equity culture and the growth of the pension fund industry will stimulate huge growth in demand for portfolio investments. This will bring huge benefits to financial markets both in terms of liquidity and valuations.
    Is the degree of domestic bias overstated? Earlier on in this paper, we saw how pension funds continue to exhibit a strong preference for domestic equities. But with most companies deriving a significant proportion of their profits from non-domestic markets, this so-called "home bias" is perhaps not as significant as it appears. In the past, diversification was achieved through combining local and regional portfolios into global portfolios. Today, the companies in which we invest are already quite diversified and you could argue that the investor is equally well off from a diversification perspective. For many pension funds, foreign exchange risk has often been a hindrance to international investing. But if globalization is affecting the origin of company profits, pension funds with allocations to domestic equity could already be exposed to considerable currency risk.


THE FINAL WORD
    Markets are no longer segmented and the minimum size for survival has gone up dramatically--this is the case for the majority of product and service sectors and certainly for the global fund management industry. Globalization is a long-term trend, which will continue to improve correlations between the world's markets for many years to come. New technologies will accelerate the convergence process, bringing people, products, countries and markets ever closer together.
    It is important to remember that the future pace of financial market integration depends on the future direction of global economic fundamentals. A relatively stable economic backdrop has facilitated the proliferation of global consolidation over the past ten years. In assuming the sustainability of the pace of globalization, we are assuming the economic climate will remain favorable. Naturally, there is some risk it will not. If the global economic climate does become more hostile, cross-border investment will shrink and the pace of globalization will slacken.
    At the beginning of this paper, we spoke of "history repeating itself." If experience is anything to go by, the road to a truly global market will almost certainly be a long and winding one.
ADDED MATERIAL
    Before joining Pictet & Cie in 1996, Rolf Banz was the managing director of Alliance Capital in London, England, and was also a founder of Dimensional Asset Management in London, specializing in research and investments in small companies. He received an M.B.A. and doctorate in economics and finance from the University of Chicago.
    Before joining Pictet & Cie as communications manager, Sarah Clough worked for State Street as a client services manager. She graduated from Middlesex University and the Ecole Superieure de Commes Marseille with a B.A. in European Management and Diplome du Cesem, respectively.
    TABLE 1 Pension Funds Non-domestic Investment


                1994     1999     2004
U.S.             9%      11%      14%
Canada          16%      17%      20%
U.K.            24%      25%      25%
Netherlands     17%      36%      38%
Switzerland     19%      23%      35%
Germany          5%       9%      15%
Sweden           0%       6%       8%
Italy            1%       2%       2%
France           6%       9%      10%
Denmark          8%       9%      16%
Japan            7%      21%      24%
Australia       15%      21%      25%
Malaysia         0%       0%       0%
Singapore        0%       0%       1%
Hong Kong       50%      69%      70%
Brazil          0%        0%       4%
Chile            0%      14%      20%
South Africa     0%       4%       5%
    Source: InterSec Research Corp, Stamford, Conn.
    TABLE 2 Asset Allocation of European Pension Funds


               Domestic    Domestic    Foreign      Foreign     Real        Cash/
               Equities    Bonds       Equities     Bonds       Estate      Other
Austria            8%        55%           20%         17%          0%         0%
Belgium            9%        15%           46%         23%          3%         4%
Denmark           16%        58%           13%          2%          9%         2%
Finland           15%        57%            4%          9%          7%         8%
France            10%        65%            2%          3%          2%        18%
Germany           10%        43%            5%          2%          7%        33%
Ireland            25%       12%           44%         10%          5%         4%
Italy              16%       35%            0%          0%         48%         1%
Northlands        19%        38%           20%         15%          5%         2%
Norway            13%        50%           11%         16%          6%         4%
Portugal          15%        55%           14%          3%          2%        11%
Spain             13%        53%           12%          9%          1%        13%
Sweden            24%        44%           14%          8%          5%         5%
Switzerland       18%        26%            9%         13%         25%         9%
U.K.              55%         9%           18%          8%          3%         8%
    Source: William M Mercer, European Pension Fund Managers Guide 1999.
FIGURE 1 Net Inflows into European Mutual Funds
FIGURE 2 Stock Market Concentration: Top Five Stocks' Share of Index
FIGURE 3 Anticipated Growth in International Investments

使用道具 举报

Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16

声望
53
寄托币
31146
注册时间
2001-10-7
精华
284
帖子
171

Sagittarius射手座 荣誉版主

14
发表于 2004-4-1 23:40:40 |只看该作者

AUTHOR: Victor M. Ortiz

AUTHOR:  Victor M. Ortiz
TITLE:  The Unbearable Ambiguity Of the Border
SOURCE:  Social Justice 28 no2 96-112 Summ 2001

The magazine publisher is the copyright holder of this article and it is reproduced with permission. Further reproduction of this article in violation of the copyright is prohibited. To contact the publisher: http://www.csudh.edu/global_options/default.htm



INTRODUCTION
    AT THE 2001 CONFERENCE OF THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION FOR CHICANA AND Chicano Studies (NACCS), Isabel Garcia, a lawyer for Coalición de Derechos Humanos in the city of Tucson, Arizona, gave a compelling account of INS abuses along the U.S.-Mexican border. The clarity of her analysis and the strength of her commitment reminded me of Maria Jimenez, whom I had met in 1988 at another NACCS conference. At the time, Jimenez was in the process of launching the Immigration and Law Enforcement Monitoring Project of the American Friends Service Committee. Ever since, this project has documented abuses by INS officials. As I reflected on the parallels between the two women, I realized that despite their remarkable insights and longstanding efforts, as indispensable as invaluable, the abuses continue practically unabated. Moreover, in spite of additional research and documentation conducted by other scholars and activists, the problem escalates, dwarfing our efforts to solve it. In this article, I broaden the scope of analyses of the abuses to account for the contextual dimension that fosters and sustains them. My hope is that an integral understanding of the abuses within their context can alert us to better strategies to combat them. Below I will provide ethnographic reflections to illustrate that the abuses do not happen only in reference to INS practices. The abuses are influenced by geopolitical and economic developments such as the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA), the maquiladora industry, demographic growth of the Latino population, and xenophobia. More specific to the topic here, the abuses also concern the complex roles that local residents play in these abuses and, ultimately, the dislocated condition of the region itself. I explore this condition in terms of the ambiguous character of border living, which entails the contradictory impacts of multiple and dynamic delineations -- apparently as dumbfounding as readily transcended or reinforced.


CRIME AND PUNISHMENT: COOPERATION IN EL PASO
    Justino Samudio is a zestful man. In his early forties, he is probably the most active and enthusiastic reference librarian in the local branch of Texas State University. He knows the sources you ought to consult for your research, and he eagerly contributes some opinions of his own to your analysis. For his excellent help, you must pay with "your ear," as Milan Kundera would put it. Before you know it, you have learned that he is from Colorado, half Spanish and half Apache, has many sisters, likes expensive bikes, pens, and shirts, is a local patron for unknown local painters, loves Ciudad Juárez's nightlife, and knows the best places to buy antiques. If your consultation is conducted in Spanish, he will explain his heavy "Spaniard" intonations and expressions, alluding to three weeks he spent in Barcelona some years ago. If you will allow it and he is not too busy, he will proudly give you a tour of the new library building. Along the way, you will hear a detailed description of the collections donated to the library, which are found in its main conference room, the room where Texas Governor Ann Richards and Chihuahua Governor Fernando Baeza held an official meeting in 1991 to discuss the impending passage of NAFTA.
    Samudio's description of the collection has a great finale. After casually enumerating famous donors and the large financial value of the donations, he will just as casually walk you out onto the room's terrace for a scenic view of Ciudad Juárez's shantytowns. From your vantage point on the fifth floor of the library, you will clearly see -- no more than 800 feet away, beyond a highway, train rails, and the cement banks of the river -- an irregular topographic and residential landscape. The panoramic view is so magnificent and the landscape so dramatic that you will be stunned at the sight of the dusty brown hills that are dotted with houses dispersed irregularly among paved and unpaved roads. A chill crawls up your spine as you contemplate the sight of air conditioners on the roofs of sturdy houses painted in once-vivid shades of green, brown, and yellow, set among adobe shacks, junk cars and trucks, water tanks, and tin roofs. As your eyes begin to focus on the details, you'll find yourself watching, as if they were scenes in a silent movie, two children walking with their mother to the store, a city transportation van struggling up the steep hills, or a couple of skinny dogs roaming around piles of trash and old tires.
    Then Samudio will interrupt your contemplation, saying that he must get back to work. In the elevator, he will help you recover by remarking that he likes to show visitors that view. He will grow noticeably less cordial and more rushed, and this sudden change of mood will cloud your memory of the poor areas in El Paso which, although more hidden and remote, look very much like the view you just saw. Significantly, these areas are called colonias, perhaps to suggest the ethnicity of most of their residents or to distance them from the mainstream. Gradually, however, you will realize that the ironic interplay of physical proximity and institutional (national) distance you observed so vividly from that terrace was real, but misleading and incomplete. That panoramic view concealed the sordid "Third World" pockets of El Paso and displayed Ciudad Juárez as a gigantic shantytown, hiding its significant middle-class, upper-class, and even very affluent residential areas.
    These binational polarizations are not the only realities that are muted in the all-encompassing flow of Samudio's conversation. An additional piece of information is contained in a newspaper clipping, one not included in his well-kept files. It reports his beating and arrest by INS officers (Old, 1986). I asked him about this incident at a small gathering at his home. After a tour of his tiny apartment, which overflows with strikingly accomplished paintings and sculptures bought from local artists "to help them out," I inquired about the INS incident.
    He was, he told me, walking back from work to his apartment at 5:30 P.M., as he did every day. He heard somebody in a car saying something in Spanish, but he did not turn to look. Gradually, the tone of the voice got louder and angrier: "A donde vas? Tienes papeles?" (Where are you going? Do you have a passport?) Once he understood the questions and realized that they were addressed to him, he turned and said in English: "It is none of your business."
    "Yes, it is!" replied the INS officer, jumping out of his car. Samudio angrily refused to produce identification. "I was speaking in better English than he was. Moreover, when have you seen people who have just crossed the river wearing eighty-dollar shirts with Mount Blanc pens in their pocket?"
    At that point, Samudio noticed that a private car had stopped in the middle of the street. The driver -- in plain clothes -- stepped out of the car and without warning knocked him to the ground. He was "dragged and pressed to the floor" of the car, and the officers "twisted his arms and put the handcuffs on too tight." Throughout the encounter, Samudio kept yelling that they were "arresting a U.S. citizen." The officer and the other man took him to the officer's car and drove him to the INS Detention Center at one of the crossing points. "I had bruises on my face and neck. My arm hurt like hell for over a month," Samudio said.
    According to the newspaper clipping, Samudio was taken to the "Santa Fe Bridge, where they held him for about 45 minutes before deciding [my emphasis] he was a U.S. citizen and releasing him." The acting chief of the El Paso Border Patrol sector justified the arrest by saying Samudio "refused to cooperate with the agents who stopped him in an area and time of day that would lead them to believe Samudio was illegally in the United States."


ONE RIVER, ONE COUNTRY?
    In his 1983 television documentary on the border, One River, One Country, Bill Moyers insisted that the region is neither Mexico nor the United States, but an emergent geopolitical entity all of its own. Implicitly, Joel Garreau echoed this sentiment in 1986 when he referred to northern Mexico and the southwestern United States as MexAmerica. A year later, Chicana poet and author and a foremost pioneer of the current metaphorical use of the image of the border, Gloria Anzaldúa (1987: 3), replicated that unifying idea in her definition of the U.S.-Mexican border as an open wound, "where the third world grates against the first and bleeds. And before a scab forms it hemorrhages again, the lifeblood of two worlds merging to form a third country -- a border culture." The variations of these characterizations of the region as a merging "third space" respond to the distinct emphases and purposes of the authors as well as to their different audiences.
    How is one to reconcile this seductive perception of the merging of the two countries at the border region with Samudio's disconcerting, though not isolated incident, in which the right of a U.S. citizen of Mexican ancestry to walk home from work undisturbed is "decided" in an atmosphere of fear and coercion? In broader terms, how is the ongoing militarization of the border overlooked in this compelling perception of the highlighted merging? This article looks at this apparent incongruence. It points to diverse perceptions and divergent situations that serve as contextual factors for INS practices. It argues that the INS operates in a defined context constructed by the history of the border region, its persistent function as a transit site, and its current alluring characterization as an "entity on its own," "MexAmerica," or the "borderlands." In short, INS policies and actions do not happen in a vacuum. Moreover, they are not merely imposed by the federal government. Local residents partake, in different capacities and orientation, in those measures and their social impacts.
    The pervasive impacts of INS practices influence and are reinforced by the ambivalence apparent in Samudio's display of Ciudad Juárez's shantytowns. The grand finale of his library tour highlights the contrast -- the boundary -- between the two neighboring cities. His partial depiction underscores Mexico's poverty in terms of its shantytowns, while implicitly underscoring the wealth in the United States. Both impressions, however, are tendentious and inaccurate, as is any stereotypical representation. The entire country of Mexico is not a shantytown, just as not all of the United States is exempt from poverty and its own sordidness. Ironically and tragically, Samudio himself was not exempt from such sordidness and unevenness. His siding with the opulent version of the United States was seriously qualified -- and no doubt even reinforced -- by his arrest by the INS. Refusing to acknowledge the query about his "right" to be in this country, he was "put in his place" by the same exclusionary practices he reinforces. At that time, he was not acknowledged as being/belonging on the "right" side of the border. In this contested delineation, Samudio is as much a participant as a victim of that "alien-ated" environment. In this "alien-nation," pervasive conditions of ambivalence and ambiguity pervade the border region. Nevertheless, these conditions are not circumscribed by the INS. They are salient in the history, the function, and the representation of the site.


PERCEPTION AND REPRESENTATION OF THE BORDER AS A FRONTIER
    How do the social disruptions caused by the INS in local border settings relate to Samudio's complicit depiction of Ciudad Juárez? How does that relation fit with Bill Moyer's claim of "one river, one country"? Are we talking about a South African or a Palestinian sort of country?
    The border region is neither country, in spite of possible parallels or analogies. It is not even a country in itself. It is a sociopolitical landscape of dramatic historic and economic dynamics defined by a pervasive dislocation, which is experienced very differently by the individuals and institutions involved. Due to these pervasive contrasts and inequities, a persistent ambiguity permeates most of its interactions and demarcations. In a vicious cycle, because of these ambiguities, demarcations are challenged and, conversely, as a reaction, others reinforce the demarcations. This constant challenging and reinforcing of boundaries generates the contradictory perception of the border region at once as a linking area and a dividing zone under increasingly militarized intervention. As such, the border region is little more than a contested territory, a frontier.
    Anzaldúa's dramatic characterization of the region as "an open wound" captures the nature of the vicious circle: "And before a scab forms it haemorrhages again." However, her notion of the "merging" of a third country is contradicated by Samudio's incident. Her conflation of "country" with "culture" minimizes the sharp institutional divisions and power asymmetries that are violently dramatized by such abuse. Instead, in her view, border "culture" is characterized by an inherent tolerance for ambivalence. I add that intolerance equally characterizes the ambivalent attitudes of local residents in this frontier atmosphere. This conflicted dynamic can be illustrated with reference to two developments that took place in El Paso in the early 1990s, during the imminent enactment of NAFTA.
    In agreement with Anzaldúa's characterization, a "tolerance for ambivalence" was present in an emergent vision for a new relation between El Paso and Ciudad Juárez. According to this vision, interactions between the two cities would be free of international boundaries since these would be removed to their northern and southern city perimeters, respectively. Moving toward that vision, two conferences took place over one weekend, each organized independently. One, entitled "Redefining the Urban Space Toward Binational Metropolis" (Fried, 1994: 12), brought together urban planners from both cities in Ciudad Juárez. The other conference was a "community summit" organized by Unite El Paso, a multiethnic and mostly professional group of concerned citizens that aimed to foster a new, more inclusive leadership for the city. In this conciliatory tone, the group brought together 150 leaders of El Paso to draft a blueprint of strategic goals "interwoven with the concept of a 'borderless region' that would allow El Paso to integrate itself seamlessly into the global market" (Ibid.). One organizer stated, "We don't literally mean the elimination of the border, but the removal to the periphery of the area of all the federal inspection that clogs up commerce between El Paso and Ciudad Juárez" (Ibid.). Beyond commerce, the eventual document included a wide range of concerns, from human rights to poverty, infrastructure, and art. The visionary impulse was originally endorsed by the two cities' mayors, who publicly supported a "Good Neighbour Agreement" and expressed their desire to find "binational solutions to border problems."
    The momentum for this new relationship between the two cities, which resembled Anzaldúa's characterization, was abruptly disrupted by the deployment of draconian measures to stop undocumented immigration. On Sunday morning, September 19, 1993, only hours after the collective pronouncement for "freer" interaction between the two cities, Operation Blockade (later renamed Operation Hold the Line) went into effect. That morning the city's people woke up to the surprising news that officers of the Border Patrol had mounted permanent guard along the entire extension of the city. The operation "opened" with a spectacular, disquieting display:


Initially, approximately 400 of the El Paso Sector's 650 agents lined their vehicles up along a twenty-mile stretch of the border, while foot patrols roamed the hills of the northern end of the line. Helicopters went up and down the line in a show of force in the air, sometimes one on top of another. The initial mobilization turned the El Paso side of the border into "a militarized zone, like in Latin America," according to one observer (Ibid.: 15).
    As a collective display of intolerance, as opposed to Anzaldúa's claim, the harsh measure enjoyed wide support among residents and was vividly expressed in numerous gestures and venues. Acidly, one editorial stated that Operation Blockade managed what no other group had managed to do: unite El Paso. The media fueled as much as responded to the debate. Radio talk shows, editorials, letters to the editor, and ongoing surveys gave full expression to the heightened public sentiment. Surveys by radio stations and newspapers overwhelmingly supported the measure. Some of the statements expressed a greater sense of safety, a diminished fear of local crime committed by "illegal aliens."
    Support for the Border Patrol measures was not absolute. Angry and shocked voices expressed dismay at the measure. Critics highlighted the incongruence of seeing Mexican Americans whole-heartedly embrace the measure, and doing so with a blatant bias against "undocumented immigrants." I propose to look at these divisions, but to go beyond definite characteristics like ethnicity or class, which only lead to ideological perplexities and moralizing dismay: "How can poor Mexican Americans be against their 'brothers and sisters' across the river?" These projected social subjectivities, which are based on monolithic characterizations of "race," "class," or "nationality," deny the personal and practical concerns of individuals. Instead, a more agile and adequate understanding may emerge of the diverse and complex relations that individuals have (or may have) within this context.
    The context of the border is defined by an ambiguity. Its boundaries and delineations are at once transcended and reinforced. Because of the region's subordinate condition as a transit zone, the visitor, state or federal public official, or the non-local interest and agenda generally displace the concerns or prerogatives of local residents in most practical matters. In this scenario of displacement and displacements, belonging is generally externally defined. In El Paso, local residents often attempt to reestablish their own sense of belonging, if not of ownership, through ineffective gestures that range from naive claims of pride in their identity to a misdirected animosity toward Ciudad Juárez (which is frequently blamed for everything that goes wrong in El Paso). Most often, however, locals respond with a mixture of apathy and frontier individualism that covers up the underlying emotional rawness.


DISTANT PROXIMITIES
    The characterization of the border as a single country or culture obstructs recognition of the dramatic differences among the subjects and situations involved (Ruiz and Tiano, 1987: 3). At the national level, these mischaracterizations trivialize the wide and profound institutional delimitations separating the two countries; such delimitations are dramatically exemplified by the differential access residents of each side of the border have to the other. Officially, U.S. visitors have unhindered access to Mexican border cities, but Mexican visitors to U.S. border cities need crossing permits. Unofficially, of course, this restricted access to the U.S. can be bypassed, but this clandestine access does not erase the official barrier. Those who cross "unofficially" run the risk of being caught and deported. However, the demarcation does not stop at the crossing line, nor does it affect only the undocumented immigrant. As Samudio's story manifests, the impact of the border asymmetries is pervasive, but it is most directly felt by Mexicans and Mexican Americans.
    Along with the national demarcation, dramatic divisions proliferate within El Paso. Its ambiguous function as bridge and barrier underlies the tension between the local and non-local and seriously complicate issues of legitimacy and belonging. This inevitably disrupts the social texture of the locality. In a dislocated city, some strangers are stranger than others, depending on the individual's real or assumed proximity to the U.S. mainstream in terms of race and wealth. A rich Anglo, even if he or she has just arrived from Detroit to establish a company, is much less of an "other" than is an undocumented Mexican who grew up a stone's throw away. A rich Mexican, in turn, fares much better than his poor, undocumented countryman or woman -- especially if she/he is light-skinned and culturally attuned to the United States. Wealthy or Euro-American newcomers or visitors will probably be more accepted in the city than are many Mexican Americans who were born there or who have commuted daily to work with the proper permit for many years.
    In these discrepant levels of "otherness," the scope and character of the border are widely manipulated. The manipulation is easier and more beneficial for some than others. For example, companies with maquiladoras save millions of dollars by crossing the international divide to take advantage of a lower-wage labor market. Simply by relocating the plants a few miles away, from El Paso to Ciudad Juárez, they can drastically reduce production costs. Meanwhile, other local residents pay for this manipulation of boundaries. In the most direct example, thousands of workers in El Paso lost their jobs in plants that relocated to Ciudad Juárez and other parts of the world. At the same time, other local residents -- real estate agents, banking officials, accountants, engineers, and other practitioners of professions or skilled trades -- have benefited from these relocations.
    This economic manipulation of boundaries deepens the complexity of social demarcations. Each group engages in its own manipulation, deciding whom they will relate to as equals and whom they will relate to as "other." The manipulation is not done exclusively by any one group; each engages in it to different extents, with different degrees of success, and at different levels of risk. Look at colonia residents. They are invisible on Samudio's tour of the library, but the dramatic "third world" condition of some of El Paso's residents -- roughly 10% of the population -- challenges the generalized perception of monolithic contrasts between Mexico and the United States. The recognition of similarities that reach across international borders is a major contribution of the characterizations made by Garreau (1982) and Anzaldúa (1987). In that innovative emphasis on crisscrossed connections that belie rigid delimitations and monolithic categories, important overlappings and paradoxes are highlighted. This epistemological advantage is insightfully used by Kathleen Staudt (1998) in her study of colonias in El Paso and Ciudad Juárez. Beyond widespread scarcity of material resources and irregular attention from public officials, colonia residents share great resourcefulness in maximizing their options through informal networks that connect the two sides of the border. They might get used products on the U.S. side and sell them in Mexico, then buy basic goods for personal consumption on the Mexican side at a comparatively lower cost. This integrative strategy, however, is carried out against the tide of restrictive policies that hinder the flow of certain people (e.g., the poor) and certain goods (e.g., used products and vegetables). Meanwhile, under NAFTA conditions for "free trade" are enhanced for corporations.
    Colonias also illustrate the transborder displacement that the economic integration of Mexico and the United States generates in both cities. They are one of the shadows of the successful expansion of maquiladora industry. In the dislocating processes and persistent asymmetries that corporations and some residents exploit and reinforce, the social and institutional balances of the two cities are persistently disrupted. Although increasingly connected in terms of economic transactions, they remain apart in the restricted contact that their disintegrated social conditions generate. The blurriness of the delimitation and the manipulation of borders increase as the social setting of the city is fragmented.


HOW FAR TO THE FIRST WORLD?
    Consider the relationship between El Paso and Ciudad Juárez. How one perceives it depends on a number of factors. In El Paso the "one country" image is promoted by local businesses, by government representatives in tourism or the maquiladora industry; the two cities are pronounced to be "one" or to be "sister cities." These consolidating representations reflect a Euro-American or business perception that is not necessarily shared by other residents. Even when there is more intense economic integration, most business people in Ciudad Juárez and most Mexican Americans in El Paso are more cautious in describing the relationship of the two cities. These entrepreneurs talk not of one city or of sister cities, but of "one economy." For example, a director in the El Paso office of the Small Business Administration, Ralph Ordo&ntilde;ez, described it in the following manner:


El Paso and [Ciudad] Juárez are two cities. Yet, they are one in economic terms: 55,000 Juarences commute daily to work in El Paso. They buy gasoline here, clothes, cars, and so forth. The tourist attraction of El Paso is [Ciudad] Juárez: its bullfights, dog races, dancing halls, golf court. The three bridges are always full. It takes about 30 to 45 minutes to cross over. A lot of merchandise and equipment is bought here: electronic apparatuses, computers. You can take everything to Mexico quite easily. No customs or nothing. As one friend of mine from Mexico put it, "as long as it fits through the bridge." People from Mexico and Chihuahua have the money to pay for those items. Devaluations are what hurt all this.
    These divergent perceptions mirror to a certain extent the incongruence between celebrations of the merging of the two countries and the harsher tactics reflected in the militarization of the border (Dunn, 1996; Palafox, 1996). Unlike the blurriness suggested by authors such as Garreau and Anzaldúa, local perceptions reflect contrasting demarcations along national and ethnic lines. In very concrete respects, they indicate different degrees of access and limits, or the contrasting institutional magnitude of boundaries. U.S. citizens and residents, particularly Euro-Americans, have open access to most of Ciudad Juárez, with an especially welcoming reception by its businesses. Given this practically unlimited and unencumbered access to both cities, they perceive them as one. For people of Mexican ancestry or origin residing in or visiting El Paso, the experience is more diverse, complex, and uncertain. As Mr. Samudio learned, even U.S. citizenship does not assure unencumbered access. Even when they constitute over 70% of the city's population, Mexican Americans embody the border in their skin or in their last names. Some exclusionary actions, of course, are committed by Mexican Americans and Mexicans themselves. In the most literal and striking illustration of the divide, an increasing number of Mexican Americans have become Border Patrol agents. This obviously calls into question Anzaldúa's claim of a "border culture" defined by tolerance.


ELUSIVE CROSSINGS: INCONGRUITIES AND AGENCIES
    In the overlapping of the "no man's land" space and the living places of local residents, most border dwellers conduct, or try to conduct, their everyday lives beyond, along, or in spite of the dislocating impacts and overriding presence of the non-local. These impacts and presences are largely contained by resilient markers that delineate places and spaces. These delineations are indicators of the incompatible -- incommensurable? -- juxtapositions that local residents (long- and short-term) confront and/or exploit. Some residents can cross or ignore these delineations with ease and fluidity. Indeed, some capitalize on this dislocation with little or no difficulty, while some are thrown entirely off balance by it. The latter are more constrained by boundaries of income, skin tone, status, linguistic skills, and technical proficiencies. Such parameters and dynamics of inequality are common to most settings. What distinguishes the border situation is the pervasive presence of non-local agendas and actors.
    Conditions in the city are greatly influenced by immigrants and transient visitors. These two groups represent a wide variety of nations and of regions in the U.S. People from Mexico are the most noticed because they are the most numerous. Some come with visiting or working permits, while others enter the country without documents. The number of Mexican immigrants and visitors to the city is impossible to accurately ascertain. In spite of the general perception of a constant flow, many "border crossers" do not stay in El Paso. Some relocate, others commute back and forth to Ciudad Juárez, and many proceed to other U.S. cities or return to the interior of Mexico. The proportion of non-locals in the city is imprecise yet determinant, regardless of the stream of new arrivals and their diverse destinctions. The 1990 census reports 66.9% of the population as having been born in the city or at least in Texas (City of El Paso, 1990). According to the city demographer, undocumented residents may amount to only one percent of the total population, or about 6,000 people.
    Regardless of actual numbers, the flow of immigrants, visitors, and commuters has major impacts. Mexicans bring with them Mexican practices and culture. In economic terms, the immigrants, documented and undocumented, create a dual market economy. One segment of the market employs skilled workers at relatively high salaries. The other employs mostly unskilled or semiskilled workers at very low wages. The low-wage labor market is considerably larger and is overwhelmingly Mexican American and Mexican. These low wages and this ethnic concentration are influenced by the availability of a virtually endless source of new workers from Mexico (Cardenas, 1988; Fernandez, 1989). Low wages and an inextinguishable labor pool are two factors in the subordination of the site to non-local interests. A third factor is the social impact of INS operations. We will observe the debilitating effects that rampant and incongruent INS measures generate for the city. These measures, while less diffuse since the passage of NAFTA, are still responsible for a climate of hostility and uncertainty.(FN1)


INSTITUTIONAL ANOMALIES AND CONFLICTING AGENDAS
    The official crossing points between Ciudad Juárez and El Paso are the inspection centers at the four bridges over the river that divides the cities. The bridges are massive, bow-like concrete structures about a quarter of a mile long and about 60-feet tall at their highest points. At these high points, the two national flags hang from their poles, 10 feet apart. Until recently, the fourth bridge, 80-feet long, rose 10 feet above the water. In 1991, a considerably larger bridge was built to meet the transportation needs of the maquiladora industry.
    The three older bridges have worn out prematurely from the weight of the hundreds of cars and trailers lined up to reach the U.S. checking stations. Hours can be wasted while waiting to cross. The longest lines are usually toward the United States, and traffic congestion is aggravated by the frequent overheating of engines and numerous small collisions. This chaotic wait is often worsened by the apprehension -- or the actual occurrence -- of rude treatment or denigrating inspections by INS officers, almost exclusively reserved for Mexican and Chicano crossers.
    Until 1993, the great inconveniences "legal" crossers underwent were intensified by blatant incongruities in the prevention of "illegal" crossings. While documented crossers tested the limits of their exasperation in almost constant processions of private and commercial vehicles (including numerous massive "eighteen-wheel" trailers transporting maquiladora products and components), undocumented workers entered the United States through numerous widely known passages apparently unattended by the INS. These well-known crossing points and the relative ease with which experienced crossers for decades entered the U.S. suggested a conscious inefficiency in the implementation of immigration laws by INS officers. A frequent explanation for this blatant inefficiency cited the considerable economic benefits employers gain from the highly exploitable labor of undocumented workers. Mario Barrera alluded to perceptions and assumptions to explain this incongruence in the pre-NAFTA decades:


The general assumption is that the Border Patrol is intended simply to keep the workers out, given its limited resources. This is not only the attitude of the public at large, but often finds expression in the writings of scholars.... In my opinion, this is a serious misreading of the situations and there is considerable evidence to support the claim that things are as they are on the border because of the interplay of some very special interests (1979: 126, emphasis added).
    Referring to these special interests, as early as 1951, Saunders and Leonard noted that: "Between the farmers and the Patrol Inspector there exists a considerable amount of informal cooperation from which both benefit" (in Barrera, 1979: 127). Ellwyn Stoddard (1979) found the same collusion. Writing about the border at the same time as Barrera, Stoddard noted that,


Inasmuch as the INS and its various agencies are sensitive and responsive to political, social, and economic pressures which may cause them to lose congressional support during budgetary hearings, their legal operations are frequently curtailed to fit local expectations. For instance, the subtle effect of deploying personnel in those services least likely to interfere with local farm interests has been documented.... Although the linewatch activities resulted in the least productive rate of apprehension of illegal aliens, 35 percent of the total officer time was spent in that Border Patrol activity, whereas only 9 percent of the officers' hours were used for Farm-Ranch checks (the most productive activity in discovering and apprehending undocumented Mexican aliens). Either the linewatch is mainly a deterrent function...or else it is the least disruptive but still visible use of control officers without becoming enmeshed in controversies with the politically and economically powerful agribusiness interests in the Borderlands (Stoddard, 1979: 174-175; emphasis added).
    Incongruence is embedded in the operations of the agency, whose budget is determined by the number of apprehensions, not by the prevention of crossings. The number and the diversity of these unofficial strategies and crossing points, along with the volume of undocumented crossers, are used by INS officials to explain their very limited success in curbing irregular immigration and increase their agency budget for equipment and agents.


THE WHO'S WHO IN THE COSTS AND BENEFITS OF ABUSE AND LEGAL UNCERTAINTY
    Any simple explanation of INS operations in the complex context of El Paso is bound to fall short. Many interests and individuals with divergent, incongruent, or contradictory agendas and orientations are involved in the unofficial immigration the agency is officially set to prevent. This complexity was first revealed to me 13 years ago by a local Chicano activist. I was requesting sources of funding for a community-based organization that documented human and civil rights abuses by INS officers. He referred me to the officers themselves, who had voiced complaints to him regarding the detrimental effect of their colleagues' abusive behavior while on their professional duty. Such individual concerns did not seem to be supported by the federal agency itself, since no officer has ever been penalized or found guilty by the Internal Office of Professional Responsibility. The only official action taken has been to relocate an officer to another city.
    These alleged abuses are expressions and outgrowths of unresolved circumstances, and they remain mostly allegations because the victims seldom pursue legal action. Alleged civil and human rights abuses by INS officers are tangled in the confusion of legality and illegality imposed on the border. Central to this difficulty is a problematic overlap between the sovereignty concerns of the INS and the constitutional and human rights of the alleged victims. The agency enforces the right of the federal government to regulate the entrance and actions of foreigners in U.S. territory. However, the rights and well-being of foreigners, as well as of U.S. citizens and residents, are seriously undermined in the enforcement or pursuit of that sovereignty. In the frontier setting, even the demarcations of human and civil rights are unclear. Are "illegal aliens" deprived of any human consideration for their violation of immigration law? Do undocumented workers deserve the same persecution as drug traffickers? Can distinctions not be readily established in most cases? Is the distinction between Mexican Americans and undocumented crossers irrelevant?
    In official terms, INS officers can interrogate individuals, beyond official crossing points, only when there are reasonable grounds for suspicion of unlawful entry. In Samudio's case, those grounds left ample room for interpretation and argument. Did walking near the riverbank constitute grounds for interrogation and detention? Did Samudio's ethnicity and appearance automatically legitimize the inquiry in spite of his class, his flawless English, and, eventually, his loud assertions of U.S. citizenship? Was the alleged degree of violence warranted or was it a gesture of dominance and intimidation? Did his "unwillingness to cooperate" warrant the magnitude of the punishment? What was at stake in "cooperation" was his disputed construction of himself. As a U.S. citizen, in his view, he did not need to "cooperate." Moreover, what does cooperation mean? Abject compliance? Subordination of dignity and free will? As a Mexican-looking subject refusing to answer the questions posed, he was a potential lawbreaker in the officers' view. Yet, "looking Mexican" -- a vague criterion at best -- is both unsatisfactory grounds for interrogation, according to the agency's standards, and unconstitutional because of its discriminatory implications. Ultimately, as the eventual outcome of the incident reflects, such distinctions were lost in the agency's sense of its unstated and mostly undisputed prerogatives. Beyond individual occurrences, do the social costs of these alleged incidents of abuse matter? Although collective, the abuses were, indeed, collectively ignored until very recently.


ALLEGATIONS OF ABUSE AND ACTION SUIT
    In 1993, a federal judge ruled in favor of a class action suit that residents of the city of El Paso, predominantly high school students, filed against the INS. The suit came about through complaints of unconstitutional searches and instances of physical and psychological violence that the plaintiffs experienced due to intimidatory and intrusive exchanges with the Border Patrol. The officers were conducting disruptive actions in the neighborhood of the high school, which is practically adjacent to the boundary with Mexico. As the severity and frequency of the altercations with the INS intensified, awareness of the alleged abuses and of their social toll was recognized by a larger number of students. Eventually, their suit brought the occurrences and their impacts to the attention of many other people in the city, as well as in other regions of Mexico and the U.S. The court ruling eventually led to the replacement of the District Chief of the Border Patrol and the arrival of a new one, Sylvester Reyes.
    Mr. Reyes, originally from a small town near El Paso, was perceived by many as a local. Soon after his arrival, Reyes led an initial campaign of active consultation with many sectors of the city and even participated in the massive "Unite El Paso" meeting in which the idea of moving the international boundaries to the outskirts of the two border cities was discussed. Only hours after that discussion, in the early morning of the following day, he directed Operation Hold the Line. Shattering at once -- or at least postponing to some distant future -- the idea of a more integrated flow of people between the two cities, the operation galvanized widespread support among all sectors of the city's population. Overnight, the momentum toward a more lenient accent between the two cities' populations was arrested. This harsh measure suddenly shattered Anzaldúa's claim about tolerance, giving rise to expressions of intense "intolerance."
    Why did many people who were directly or indirectly affected by INS abuses and interference welcome the draconian measure? Why was it so eagerly embraced at a time when more fluid interconnections were envisioned and the judge's ruling against the INS was still fresh in people's memory? How many of them shared the stigmatizing attitude toward Mexico that Samudio had displayed in his library tour? How many of them had been victimized by the INS? These questions must be added to the list of apparently incongruent developments in the region, along with the celebration of Anzaldúa just as the militarization of the border escalates. In my view, the perception of Reyes as a local and his initial gesture of consultation with diverse sectors of the city contributed to the "enthusiastic" support for the operation. Reinforcing these two reasons, practical and personalized factors inherent to the context fueled the vividness of the support -- regardless of its unfounded simplistic claims and xenophobic overtones.
    According to a perceptive observer, the blockade brought into the open that which people only dared to mumble before (Vila, 2000). Operation Blockade was suddenly seen as the solution to annoying problems, ranging from the number of cars stolen to the amount of tax-funded school and hospital services used by Ciudad Juárez residents. Among the many pronouncements of support, exaggerated, hasty, and unsubstantiated claims were made. Swayed by public opinion, the recently appointed mayor reversed his initial criticism of the measure. While at the GOP task force on illegal immigration in Washington, D.C., the mayor made the unsubstantiated claim that undocumented "aliens" const the city $30 million (Fried, 1994). Support for Operation Blockade was expressed in very direct ways. For example, some residents brought doughnuts and coffee to the Border Patrol agents stationed along the riverbanks. In addition, many drivers tied olive green ribbons -- the color of the Border Patrol uniforms -- to their car antennas. In the midst of the "euphoria," the outnumbered critics of the blockade held their ground. Confronted with simple-minded claims of the right and need of the United States to enforce its laws, they repeated that the majority of undocumented workers came to this country to work.
    The analysis offered by critics of the operation was more sober than that of its supporters. However, like the limited results achieved by activists such as Maria Jimenez or the scholarly contributions of people like Barrera (1979), Stoddard (1979), Dunn (1996), and Palafox (1996), initiatives here have lacked the effectiveness needed to counter the inertia and stigma that lead the general public to overlook or disregard constitutional and human violations involved in INS practices. Some blockade supporters expressed frustration over damages they, their relatives, neighbors, or friends had suffered in terms of houses or cars burglarized or stolen. Yet, the degree to which those property crimes are attributable to undocumented immigrants or to residents of Ciudad Juárez is very imprecise. Rumors and long-established perceptions do gain widespread credibility. For example, groups of begging children, who had supposedly crossed the river from Ciudad Juárez, had become a common sight in the downtown areas at night. Comments on this nuisance were often accompanied by expressions of fear or accounts of petty shoplifting, general mischief, and irritating or even intimidating requests for money. Rumors of bands of car thieves added to the threat emanating from Ciudad Juárez. In fact, levels of car robbery had gone up. One's own car may not have been stolen, but reports and perceptions of these robberies reinforced the sense of danger and increased car insurance premiums, making them higher in El Paso than in most other regions of the country.
    This article argues that recognizing the contextual dynamics in El Paso helps us understand pervasive incongruent practices and representations related to the border region. Such recognition of the ambiguous and unstable condition of the border region may generate more comprehensive and effective responses to disruptive INS militarization practices. Improvements in documenting abuses and policies should enhance their effectiveness and appeal with local populations once their displaced situation is addressed. If left unacknowledged, local residents may continue to feel threatened, invaded, and given a bad image by the "illegals/immigrants." Immigrants are perpetually made the scapegoat for local problems, and are seen to undermine the opportunities for and conditions of "legitimate citizens." Although attention to abuses often rapidly fades, the context remains, and the abuses have major social costs. In El Paso and along most of border region, this social cost fosters a pervasive sense of alienation. The social fabric is corroded and the basis for a sustainable response to INS atrocities erodes. Information on the abuses or on the INS is not enough.
ADDED MATERIAL
    VICTOR M. ORTIZ is Assistant Professor and coordinator of the Mexican and Caribbean Studies Program at Northeastern Illinois University (5500 North St. Louis Avenue, Chicago, IL 60625-4699; e-mail: v-ortiz@neiu.edu). A longer version of this article will appear in his forthcoming book, El Paso, a Frontier Between Space and Hyper-Space; Otherness and Globalization on the U.S.-Mexican Border (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press).


FOOTNOTE
1. A vivid statement of the disorienting and alienating effects of the climate of abuse is found in a short story by Saenz (1986). The story depicts the alienating potential that his moments of interpolation (à la Althusser) present.


REFERENCES
    American Friends Service Committee
    1992 Sealing Our Borders: The Human Toll. Third Report of the Immigration Law Enforcement Monitoring Project (ILEMP).
    Anzaldúa, Gloria
    1987 Borderlands/La Frontera: The New Mestiza. San Francisco: Spinsters/Aunt Lute Book Company.
    Barrera, Mario
    1979 Race and Class in the Southwest. Notre Dame: Notre Dame University Press.
    Cardenas, Gilbert
    1988 "The Changing U.S.-Border Region." Edan Acosta Belen and Barbara R. Sjostrom (eds.), The Hispanic Experience in the United States: Contemporary Issues and Perspectives. New York: Praeger Publishers.
    City of El Paso
    1990 Census Profile from Summary Tape. (Table 1.)
    Dunn, Timothy J.
    1996 The Militarization of the U.S.-Mexico Border, 1978-1992: Low-Intensity Conflict Doctrine Comes Home. Austin: CMAS Books.
    Fernandez, Raul A.
    1989 The Mexican-American Border Region: Issues and Trends. Notre Dame: University of Notre Dame Press.
    Fried, Jonathan L.
    1994 Operation Blockade: A City Divided. Philadelphia, PA: American Friends Service Committee, Community Relations Division. A report from the American Friends Service Committee's Immigration Law Enforcement Monitoring Project (ILEMP).
    Garreau, Joel
    1982 Nine Nations of North America. New York: Avon.
    Old, Joe
    1986 "Citizen: Border Patrol Roughed Me Up." El Paso Herald-Post (July 24).
    Palafox, Jose
    2000 "Opening Up Borderland Studies: A Review of U.S.-Mexico Border Militarization Discourse." Social Justice 27,3: 56-72.
    1996 "Militarizing the Border." Covert Action Quarterly 56: 14-19.
    Ruiz, Vicki L. and Susan Tiano
    1987 Women on the U.S.-Mexican Border. Boston: Allen and Unwin, Inc.
    Saenz, Ben
    1986 "Exile in Sunset Heights." Rio Grande Review: A Journal of the English Department 6,1.
    Staudt, Kathleen
    1998 Free Trade! Informal Economics at the U.S.-Mexico Border. Philadelphia: Temple University Press.
    Stoddard, Ellwyn
    1979 "A Conceptual Analysis of the 'Alien Invasion': Institutional Support of Illegal Mexican Aliens in the United States." International Migration Review (Summer): 157-189.
    Vila, Pablo
    2000 Crossing Borders, Reinforcing Borders: Social Categories, Metaphors, and Narrative Identities on the U.S.-Mexico Border. Austin: University of Texas Press.

使用道具 举报

Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16Rank: 16

声望
53
寄托币
31146
注册时间
2001-10-7
精华
284
帖子
171

Sagittarius射手座 荣誉版主

15
发表于 2004-4-1 23:41:09 |只看该作者

AUTHOR: Mark W. Zacher

AUTHOR:  Mark W. Zacher
TITLE:  Globalization, Justice, and International Organizations: A Commentary
SOURCE:  Ethics & International Affairs 14 119-23 2000

The magazine publisher is the copyright holder of this article and it is reproduced with permission. Further reproduction of this article in violation of the copyright is prohibited.

    The interrelationships among globalization, international organizations (IOs), and social justice are complex, and our understanding of these connections is modest. It is, nonetheless, important to explore possible trends and causal relationships in order to guide future thinking. Both Steven Weber and I are offering some tentative judgments here in an effort to provoke debate and research.
    Weber argues that international organizations have not yet made major contributions to social justice. Moreover, he maintains that their ability to foster social justice in the future will be undermined by globalization. The main reasons for these perspectives are that international institutions have weak political constituencies and bases of legitimacy; their historical ideology of liberalization has produced somewhat ineffective results and has decreasing support today; and globalization increases the gaps in states' wealth and objective interests. On the matter of what constitutes social justice, Weber is flexible in that he ties it to the promotion of universal access to certain benefits and the awareness of what people have valued in different eras. Thus, he recognizes that notions of social justice are historically contingent.
    Weber's argument clearly contains valid insights, but it is too pessimistic with regard to the ability of IOs to generate regimes and foster social justice in our present stage of globalization. International institutions have indeed been limited in what they could do to promote higher standards of living and greater economic equity, but it is quite possible that they will be able to contribute more to social justice, not less, in coming decades. Most small and poor states are members of global bodies, and they have increasing influence in bargaining over international regimes. Public-interest nongovernmental organizations (NGOs) are increasingly active in international organizations as well as national societies, and linked to this is the modest, but real, growth of transnational humanitarian sentiments. Also, support for modified economic liberalism has been tied, at least to a degree, to a concern for welfare and peace throughout the world, and liberalism still commands significant support because of these impacts.
    The following commentary focuses on two general subjects that influence the ability of international organizations to promote social and economic justice: their political constituencies and legitimacy, and the prevailing ideology and international economic conditions that affect them. From my perspective, social justice concerns the promotion of better standards of living along with more equal standards among nations. Although better and more equal living standards can conflict, on the whole they should develop along parallel paths.


THE POLITICAL CONSTITUENCIES AND LEGITIMACY OF INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS
    Weber maintains that an important impediment to the ability of IOs to contribute to social justice is that peoples throughout the world do not feel any loyalty to these political institutions: hence these bodies do not possess the legitimacy to make binding rules. While a primary loyalty to and identification with international institutions would support strong global institutions capable of legislating on behalf of greater justice, such loyalty and identification have not existed in the past, and we are unlikely to see them in the near future. This, however, does not rule out the possibility that international bodies can promote justice if they possess the support of those organizations that do command the primary political loyalty of peoples--that is, states. It is states that created international or intergovernmental organizations, and it is states that utilize them to cooperate on a host of issues. States are huge backers of international organizations; just look at the plethora of IOs that have come into existence since the mid-nineteenth century. International organization is a global industry--perhaps the largest one of all.(FN1)
    In order to understand the possibilities for IOs to contribute to international justice it is important to understand the relationship between IOs and NGOs. NGOs, whether industrial organizations or public-interest groups, have to work within the legal and political structures that states establish. Weber speaks of a "disaggregation of legitimacy," but significant devolutions of authority from states have not occurred to date. NGOs, as has always been the case, have major impacts on transactions among states, but people still look to states as the sources of political legitimacy and authority when it comes to rule making.
    IOs integrate NGOs into their decision-making processes, but the NGOs are there to provide and gather information and to lobby states to adopt certain resolutions and treaties. In fact, there are often more NGO representatives at treaty-making meetings than there are government representatives. Many of the industrial NGOs are concerned simply with the financial well being of their members, but an increasingly large number of public-interest NGOs are promoting particular just causes and demanding particular types of regulations. Think of bodies such as Greenpeace and Friends of the Earth, Oxfam and Save the Children, and Amnesty International and Human Rights Watch. These groups have influence largely because they have affiliates in member states and appeal to important domestic constituencies. Their participation in international organizations affords them opportunities to lobby governments and assist particular states that share common causes. These public-interest NGOs often are involved in projects in various countries, but most are concerned primarily that states adopt particular rules and enforce them within their territorial jurisdictions. Their behavior in international organizations indicates that they recognize the crucial roles of states in realizing greater justice in the world.
    Progress by IOs in furthering justice rests significantly on the growth of transnational humanitarian concerns that are supported by states; but these concerns are rather modest, though certainly greater than in the past. Progress in promoting social justice, however, rests more on something that is often not recognized--namely, the universal (or very broad) membership of international organizations. Since most IOs require a qualified majority (often two-thirds) in favor of treaties or resolutions, there is a need to reconcile the preferences of a large number of countries. The democratic component of international decision making introduces an element of justice, because accords rest on mutual concessions. One would be foolish to assert that the weaker states gain more than the more powerful countries in international bargaining, but the views of the majority of small countries do influence international decisions, and their interests are reflected in the international regimes that flow from IOs. The fact that a large number of international issues are regulated in varying degrees by international institutions diffuses power and consequently promotes social justice.


IDEOLOGY AND INTERNATIONAL ECONOMIC CONDITIONS
    A major issue raised by Weber is the relationship between the prevailing economic ideology (more particularly, economic liberalism) and the promotion of social justice by international institutions. It is, after all, liberalism or its embedded variant that has shaped most post-World War II international regimes.(FN2) It is true that economic liberalism can be viewed as being unconcerned with social justice, but it would be difficult to attribute a lack of ethical concerns to the major builders of the postwar international economic order. They viewed this order as being embedded in a concern for social justice on a number of grounds. First, it aimed to increase the social welfare pie and hence the possibility that all would realize absolute welfare gains. Second, the international regimes often provided escape clauses that permitted states to revoke the application of particular regulations in order to protect the welfare of threatened domestic groups. States would, in fact, not have accepted such regimes if they were not confident that they could suspend regulations for reasons of domestic economic stability and welfare. Moreover, the regimes often included provisions that allowed developing countries to delay the application of particular regulations or simply created double standards that worked to their advantage. Finally, the shapers of the postwar order saw economic liberalism as an important basis of international economic interdependence and communications--and hence of international peace. And, of course, the absence of war was viewed as an important element of any international order that would promote social justice.
    Some commentators have deprecated the normative underpinnings of the liberal economic order, but this is a great mistake. Those who fashioned this order were motivated by normative considerations as well as self-interest. One has only to think of Cordell Hull, who did so much to shape the parameters of postwar American diplomacy, to realize that economic liberalism and ethical internationalism were inextricably bound.(FN3)
    The global economy, as noted by Weber, is in the process of transformation with the increase in economic transactions and interdependencies. This process of globalization has many dimensions, including a reduction of barriers to the flow of goods, services, and finance. The reduction of these barriers often involves national legislation in combination with international regimes associated with deregulation that proscribe states from interfering with international economic flows. Globalization is also associated with growing gaps in economic living standards within and between states. These changes in international economic conditions, policies, and standards cannot be disputed, but they are not as radical as Weber and others believe. States still have considerable leeway in opting out of international regimes or at least interpreting their obligations in ways that provide greater control over their own economies. Embedded liberalism with its provisions for economic policy discretion is not dead, although it has been weakened by globalization.
    This commentary is not meant to imply that we do not have to worry about the economic disparities that are accompanying liberalization. In fact, the challenges to promote greater equity in standards of living are going to be greater than has been the case in recent decades. It is obvious that increasing gaps in standards of living are social and political time bombs that will explode if the international economic order is not refashioned to address them. It is certainly questionable whether the society of states will address them adequately, but there is at least a solid chance that intelligence will win out in the corridors of power at national and international levels.
ADDED MATERIAL
    Mark Zacher is Professor of Political Science at the University of British Columbia. He was Director of the Institute of International Relations from 1971-91. Presently he serves on the editorial boards of International Organization and International Studies Quarterly. He has written extensively on international regimes and particularly the roles of UN bodies in these regimes. His recent publications are Governing Global Networks: International Regimes for Transportation and Communications (Cambridge University Press, 1996) and The United Nations and Global Commerce (United Nations, 1999).


FOOTNOTES
1 For example, see Mark Zacher, Governing Global Networks: International Regimes for Transportation and Communications (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1996); and The United Nations and Global Commerce (New York: United Nations, 1999).
2 John Gerard Ruggie, "International Regimes, Transactions, and Change: Embedded Liberalism in the Post-World War II Economic Order," International Organization 36 (1982), pp. 379-415.
3 John Gerard Ruggie, Winning the Peace: America and the World Order in the New Era (New York: Columbia University Press, 1996); Steven Weber, "Shaping the Postwar Balance of Power: Multilateralism in NATO," in John Gerard Ruggie, ed., Multilateralism Matters (New York: Columbia University Press, 1993), pp. 233-92.

使用道具 举报

RE: 希望在国外上大学的朋友帮个忙 找点资料 谢谢--- [修改]

问答
Offer
投票
面经
最新
精华
转发
转发该帖子
希望在国外上大学的朋友帮个忙 找点资料 谢谢---
https://bbs.gter.net/thread-179042-1-1.html
复制链接
发送
回顶部